Home

man pages section 5 - Oracle Documentation

1. Break Macro Name Initial Value Reset Explanation BT date n bottom title printed at foot of page BXx n print word x in a box CM ift n cut mark between pages CT yy chapter title page number moved to CF TM only DAx ifn n force date x at bottom of page today if no x DE y end display unfilled text of any kind DS xy I y begin display with keep x I L C B y indent IDy 8n 5i y indented display with no keep y indent LD y left display with no keep CD y centered display with no keep BD y block display center entire block EF x n even page footer x 3 part as for t1 EH x n even page header x 3 part as for t1 EN y end displayed equation produced by eqn EQxy y break out equation x L LC y equation number FE n end footnote to be placed at bottom of page FP n numbered footnote paragraph may be redefined FSx n start footnote x is optional footnote label HD undef n optional page header below header margin Ix n italicize x if no x switch to italics IPxy yy indented paragraph with hanging tag x y indent IXxy y index words x y and so on up to 5 levels KE n end keep of any kind KF n begin floating keep text fills remainder of page KS y begin keep unit kept together on a single page LG n larger increase point size by 2 LP yy left block paragraph MCx yy multiple columns x column width ND x ift n no date
2. Name Register Controls Takes Effect Default cl contents level table of contents 2 De display eject display 0 Df display floating display 5 Ds display spacing display lv Hb heading break heading 2 Hc heading centering heading 0 Hi heading indent heading 1 Hi heading spacing heading 1 Hu heading unnumbered heading 2 Li list indentation list 6 nroff 5 troff Ls list spacing list 6 Pi paragraph indent paragraph 5 Pt paragraph type paragraph 1 Si static indent display 5 nroff 3 troff When resetting these values make sure to specify the appropriate units Setting the line length to 7 for example will result in output with one character per line Setting Pi to 0 suppresses paragraph indentation Here is a list of string registers available in mm they may be used anywhere in the text Standards Environments and Macros 255 mm 5 256 Name String s Function Q quote innroff introff U unquote innroff introff dash in nroff in troff MO month month of the year DY day current date Noe automatically numbered footnote NRI acute accent before letter NEC grave accent before letter circumflex before letter NES cedilla before letter umlaut before letter NES tilde before letter BU bullet item DT date month day
3. The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal For the conversion of ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Converted to Underscore 137 For the conversion of ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646de all characters not in the following tables are mapped unchanged Standards Environments and Macros 135 iconv 8859 1 5 ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646da DANISH 136 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 1 ISO 646de ISO 8859 1 ISO 646de 247 100 337 176 304 133 344 173 326 134 366 174 334 135 374 175 Converted to Underscore 137 100 133 134 135 173 174 175 176 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 305 306 307 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 321 322 323 324 325 327 330 331 332 333 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 367 370 371 372 373 375 376 377 For the conversion of ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646da all characters not in the following tables are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 1 ISO 646da ISO 8859 1 ISO 646da 305 135 345 175 306 133 346 173 330 134
4. 345 375 40 For the conversion of MS 852 to DHN all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed MS 852 DHN MS 852 DHN 200 205 40 244 200 206 212 245 211 207 40 246 247 40 210 214 250 202 211 214 40 251 213 215 207 253 220 216 40 254 270 40 217 201 275 210 220 226 40 276 221 227 206 306 336 40 230 217 340 205 233 234 40 342 40 235 203 343 204 236 237 40 344 215 242 216 345 375 40 252 254 usr lib iconv so usr lib iconv t usr lib iconv iconv data iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 conversion modules conversion tables list of conversions supported by conversion tables 134 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 NAME DESCRIPTION CONVERSIONS ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646 7 bit ASCII ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646de GERMAN iconv_8859 1 5 iconv_8859 1 code set conversion tables for ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 The following code set conversions are supported Code Set Conversions Supported Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Output ISO 8859 1 8859 ISO 646 646 7 bit ASCII ISO 8859 1 8859 ISO 646de 646de German ISO 8859 1 8859 ISO 646da 646da Danish ISO 8859 1 8859 ISO 646en 646en English ASCII ISO 8859 1 8859 ISO 646es 646es Spanish ISO 8859 1 8859 ISO 646fr 646fr French ISO 8859 1 8859 ISO 646it 646it Italian ISO 8859 1 8859 ISO 646sv 646sv Swedish
5. mapped unchanged Conversions Performed MS 1251 KOI8 R MS 1251 KOI8 R 24 4 310 351 200 261 311 352 201 262 312 353 202 40 313 354 203 242 314 355 204 207 40 315 356 210 255 316 357 211 40 317 360 212 271 320 362 213 40 321 363 Standards Environments and Macros 115 iconv_1251 5 Conversions Performed MS 1251 KOI8 R MS 1251 KOI8 R 214 215 216 217 220 221 227 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 241 242 243 244 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 260 261 262 263 272 274 273 277 241 40 255 40 251 40 252 254 253 257 276 256 270 40 263 40 264 40 55 40 267 40 266 246 322 323 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 364 365 346 350 343 376 373 375 377 371 370 374 340 361 301 302 327 307 304 305 326 332 311 312 313 314 315 316 116 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 MS 1251 to PC Cyrillic iconv_1251 5 Conversions Performed MS 1251 KOI8 R MS 1251 KOI8 R 264 267 40 356 317 270 243 357 320 271 260 360 322 272 244 361 323 273 40 362 324 274 250 363 325 275 265 364 306 276 245 365 310 277 247 366 303 300 34 367 336 301 342 370 333 302 367 371 335 303 347 372 337 304 344 373 331 305 345 374 330 306 366 375 334 307 372 3
6. An argument when surrounded by brackets is optional l Arguments separated by a vertical bar are exclusive You can supply only one item from such a list Arguments followed by an ellipsis can be repeated When an ellipsis follows a bracketed set the expression within the brackets can be repeated Functions If required the data declaration or include directive is shown first followed by the function declaration Otherwise the function declaration is shown SH DESCRIPTION A narrative overview of the command or function s external behavior This includes how it interacts with files or data and how it handles the standard input standard output and standard error Internals and implementation details are normally omitted This section attempts to provide a succinct overview in answer to the question what does it do 240 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 30 Jan 1995 FILES SEE ALSO man 5 Literal text from the synopsis appears in constant width as do literal filenames and references to items that appear elsewhere in the reference manuals Arguments are italicized If a command interprets either subcommands or an input grammar its command interface or input grammar is normally described in a USAGE section which follows the OPTIONS section The DESCRIPTION section only describes the behavior of the command itself not that of subcommands The list of options alon
7. LC CTYPE This category specifies character classification character conversion and widths of multibyte characters When LC CTYPE is set to a valid value the calling utility can display and handle text and file names containing valid characters for that locale Extended Unix Code EUC characters where any individual character can be 1 2 or 3 bytes wide and EUC characters of 1 2 or 3 column widths The default C locale corresponds to the 7 bit ASCII character set only characters from ISO 8859 1 are valid The information corresponding to this category is stored in a database created by the 1ocaledef command This environment variable is used by ctype 3C mblen 3C and many commands such as cat 1 ed 1 1s 1 and vi 1 LC MESSAGES This category specifies the language of the message database being used For example an application may have one message database with French messages and another database with German messages Message databases are created by the mkmsgs 1 command This environment variable is used by exstr 1 gettxt 1 srchtxt 1 gettxt 3C and gettext 3C LC MONETARY This category specifies the monetary symbols and delimiters used for a particular locale The information corresponding to this category is stored in a database created by the 1ocaledef 1 command This environment variable is used by 1ocaleconv 3C LC NUMERIC This category specifies the decimal and thousands delimiters The information
8. Standards Environments and Macros 251 mm 5 252 Break Macro Name Initial Value Reset Explanation AS m n n 0 y begin abstract AU y author s name AV X y signature and date line of verifier x JB n embolden x if no x switch to boldface BE y end block text BIxy x n embolden x and underline y BL i y bullet list BRXY n embolden x and use Roman font for y BS n start block text CN y same as DE nroff CS y cover sheet CW n same as DS I nroff DE y end display DF pI fll rp p Ljf N y start floating display position p L C CB L left I indent C center CB center block fill f N Y right position rp fill only DL i s y start dash list DS pI fll rp p L f N y begin static display see DF for argument descriptions ECx n n 1 y equation title equation x number n EF x n even footer appears at the bottom of even numbered pages x l c r I left c center r right EH x n even header appears at the top of even numbered pages x l c r I left c center r right EN y end displayed equation produced by ean EQ y break out equation produced by eqn EXx n n 1 y exhibit title exhibit x man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Jan 1997 mm 5 Break
9. argument purpose LFS CFLAGS obtain compilation flags necessary to enable the large file compilation environment FS LDFLAGS obtain link editor options FS LIBS obtain link library names FS LINTFLAGS obtain lint options m Set the compile time flag FILE OFFSET BITS to 64 before including any headers Applications may combine objects produced in the large file compilation environment with objects produced in the transitional compilation environment but must be careful with respect to interoperability between those objects Applications should not declare global variables of types whose sizes change between compilation environments Access to The fseek and fte11 functions do not map to functions named seek64 and Additional Large te1164 rather the large file additions seeko and ftello have File Interfaces functionality identical to fseek and te11 and do map to the 64 bit functions fseeko64 and fte11064 Applications wishing to access large files should use fseeko and ftello in place of fseek and fte11 See the seek 3C and te11 3C manual pages for information about fseeko and ftello Standards Environments and Macros 203 Ifcompile 5 204 EXAMPLES SEE ALSO NOTES Applications wishing to access seeko and ftello as well as the POSIX and X Open specification conforming interfaces should define the macro LARGEFILE SOURCE to be 1 and
10. profil 2 monitor 3C man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 3 Jul 1990 NAME DESCRIPTION Authorizations Creating Authorization Checks rbac 5 rbac role based access control The addition of role based access control RBAC to the Solaris operating environment gives developers the opportunity to deliver fine grained security in new and modified applications RBAC is an alternative to the all or nothing security model of traditional superuser based systems With RBAC an administrator can assign privileged functions to specific user accounts or special accounts called roles There are two ways to give applications privileges 1 Administrators can assign special attributes such as setUID to application binaries executable files 2 Administrators can assign special attributes such as setUID to applications using execution profiles Special attribute assignment along with the theory behind RBAC is discussed in detail in Role Based Access Control chapter of the System Administration Guide Security Services This chapter describes what authorizations are and how to code for them An authorization is a unique string that represents a user s right to perform some operation or class of operations Authorization definitions are stored in a database called auth attr 4 For programming authorization checks only the authorization name is significant Some typical values in an auth
11. Architecture defines processor or specific hardware See p option of uname 1 In some cases it may indicate required adapters or peripherals This refers to the software package which contains the command or component being described on the man page To be able to use the command the indicated package must have been installed For information on how to add a package see pkgadd 1M OS utilities and libraries which are free of dependencies on the properties of any code sets are said to have Code Set Independence CSI They have the attribute of being CSI enabled This is in contrast to many commands and utilities in Solaris for example that work only with Extended Unix Codesets EUC an encoding method that allows concurrent support for up to four code sets and is commonly used to represent Asian character sets However for practical reasons this independence is not absolute Certain assumptions are still applied to the current CSI implementation m File code is a superset of ASCII To support multi byte characters and null terminated UNIX file names the NULL and slash characters cannot be part of any multi byte characters Only stateless file code encodings are supported Stateless encoding avoids shift locking shift designation invocation and so forth although single shift is not excluded m Process code wchar_t values is implementation dependent and can change over time or between implementations or betwe
12. int openat ftw h int ftw const struct stat ey int nftw const struct stat ey lt libgen h gt char copylist off t lt stdio h gt int fgetpos 1f64 5 int aio write64 struct aiocb64 int lio listioe4 const struct aiocbe64 struct dirent64 readdire64 struct dirent64 readdir64 r int att ropen64 int creat64 int open64 int openat64 int ftw64 const struct stat64 e int nftw64 const struct stat64 e char copylist64 off64 t int fgetpos64 Standards Environments and Macros 199 1f64 5 200 FILE open FILE reopen int fseeko OEE trmo int fsetpos const fpos t off t ftello FILE tmpfile lt stdlib h gt int mkstemp sys async h intaioread off t D intaiowrite off t 2 lt ucbinclude sys dir h gt int alphasort struct direct struct direct struct direct readdir int scandir struct direct e lt sys dirent h gt FILE fopen64 FILE freopen64 int fseeko64 off64 t int fsetpos64 const fpos64 t off64 t ftelloe4 FILE tmpfilee4 int mkstemp64 int aioread64 off64 t e int aiowrite 4 of 64 t int alphasort64 struct direct 64 struct direct64 struct direct64 readdir 4 int scandir64
13. pam krb5 5 pam krb5 authentication account session and password management PAM modules for Kerberos V5 usr lib security pam krb5 so 1 The Kerberos V5 service module for PAM usr lib security pam krb5 so 1 provides functionality for all four PAM modules authentication account management session management and password management The pam krb5 so 1 module is a shared object that can be dynamically loaded to provide the necessary functionality upon demand Its path is specified in the PAM configuration file The Kerberos V5 authentication component provides functions to verify the identity of a user pam sm authenticate and to refresh the Kerberos credentials cache pam sm setcred pam sm authenticate authenticates a user principal though the Kerberos authentication service If the authentication request is successful the authentication service sends a ticket granting ticket tgt back to the pam krb5 so 1 module which then verifies that the TGT came from a valid KDC by attempting to get a service ticket for the local host service For this to succeed the local host s keytab file etc krb5 krb5 keytab must contain the entry for the local host service for example host hostname com REALM where hostname com is the fully qualified local hostname and REALM is the default realm of the local host as defined in etc krb5 krb5 conf Once the TGT is verified it is stored in the credentials cache for later use by Kerber
14. An ERE can be limited to matching strings that begin or end a line this is called anchoring The circumflex and dollar sign special characters are considered ERE anchors when used anywhere outside a bracket expression This has the following effects 1 A circumflex outside a bracket expression anchors the expression or subexpression it begins to the beginning of a string such an expression or subexpression can match only a sequence starting at the first character of a string For example the EREs ab and ab match ab in the string abcdef but fail to match in the string cdefab and the ERE a b is valid but can never match because the a prevents the expression b from matching starting at the first character A dollar sign outside a bracket expression anchors the expression or subexpression it ends to the end of a string such an expression or subexpression can match only a sequence ending at the last character of a string For example the EREs ef and ef match ef in the string abcdef but fail to match in the string cdefab and the ERE e f is valid but can never match because the f prevents the expression e from matching ending at the last character localedef l regcomp 3C attributes 5 environ 5 locale 5 regexp 5 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 12 Jul 1999 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION Basic Regular Expressions regexp 5 regexp compile step advance
15. The Solaris DHCP service bundles three modules with the service which are described below There are three dhcpsvc con 4 DHCP service configuration parameters pertaining to public modules RESOURCE PATH and RESOURCE CONFIG See dhcpsvc con 4 for more information about these parameters This module stores its data in ASCII files Although the format is ASCII hand editing is discouraged It is useful for DHCP service environments that support several hundred to a couple thousand of clients and lease times are a few hours or more This module s data may be shared between DHCP servers through the use of NFS This module stores its data in binary files It is useful for DHCP service environments with many networks and many thousands of clients This module provides an order of magnitude increase in performance and capacity over SUNWfiles This module s data cannot be shared between DHCP servers This module stores its data within a NIS domain It is useful in environments where NIS is already deployed and facilitates sharing among multiple DHCP servers This module suports several hundred to a few thousand clients with lease times of several hours or more The NIS service should be hosted on a machine with ample CPU power memory and disk space as the load on NIS is significant when it is used to store DHCP data Periodic checkpointing of the NIS service is necessary in order to roll the transaction logs and keep the NIS se
16. The following code set conversions are supported Code Set Conversions Supported Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Output ISO 646 646 ISO 8859 1 8859 US ASCII ISO 646de ISO 8859 1 8859 German 646de ISO 646da ISO 8859 1 8859 Danish 646da ISO 646en ISO 8859 1 8859 English ASCII 646en ISO 646es 646es ISO 8859 1 8859 Spanish ISO 646fr 646fr ISO 8859 1 8859 French ISO 646it 646it ISO 8859 1 8859 Italian ISO 646sv ISO 8859 1 8859 Swedish 646sv The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal For the conversion of ISO 646 to ISO 8859 1 all characters in ISO 646 can be mapped unchanged to ISO 8859 1 For the conversion of ISO 646de to ISO 8859 1 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 646de ISO 8859 1 ISO 646de ISO 8859 1 100 247 173 344 133 304 174 366 134 326 175 374 135 334 176 337 For the conversion of ISO 646da to ISO 8859 1 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged 126 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 28 Apr 1997 ISO 646en ENGLISH ASCID to ISO 8859 1 ISO 646es SPANISH to ISO 8859 1 ISO 646fr FRENCH to ISO 8859 1 iconv_646 5 Conversions Performed ISO 646da ISO 8859 1 ISO 646da ISO 8859 1 133 306 173 346 134 330 174 370 135
17. man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 25 Feb 1992 Request c T sie a2 EN EQxy Initial Value Cause Break yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes me 5 Explanation End delayed text End footnote End list End major quote End index item End floating keep Define paper section m defines the part of the paper and can be C chapter A appendix P preliminary for instance abstract table of contents etc B bibliography RC chapters renumbered from page one each chapter or RA appendix renumbered from page one Begin chapter or appendix etc as set by T is the chapter title One column format on a new page Two column format Space after equation produced by eqn or neqn Precede equation break out and add space Equation number is y The optional argument x may be I to indent equation default L to left adjust the equation or C to center the equation End gremlin picture Standards Environments and Macros 247 me 5 Request GS TS x acAN ba n bu DXX LA ef XYZ eh x yz fo x yz hx he x yz hl Initial Value no no no no HII HII HII HI Cause Break yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes no yes no no no no no no yes Explanation Begin gremlin picture E
18. pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 Standards Environments and Macros 299 prof 5 300 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES SEE ALSO prof profile within a function define MARK include lt prof h gt void MARK name MARK introduces a mark called name that is treated the same as a function entry point Execution of the mark adds to a counter for that mark and program counter time spent is accounted to the immediately preceding mark or to the function if there are no preceding marks within the active function name may be any combination of letters numbers or underscores Each name in a single compilation must be unique but may be the same as any ordinary program symbol For marks to be effective the symbol MARK must be defined before the header prof h is included either by a preprocessor directive as in the synopsis or by a command line argument cc p DMARK work c If MARK is not defined the MARK rame statements may be left in the source files containing them and are ignored prof g must be used to get information on all labels In this example marks can be used to determine how much time is spent in each loop Unless this example is compiled with MARK defined on the command line the marks are ignored include lt prof h gt work int i j MARK 100p1 for i 0 i lt 2000 i MARK loop2 for j 0 j lt 2000 j
19. Directories containing Java programs and libraries usr kernel Subtree of platform amp hyphen dependent loadable kernel modules not needed in the root filesystem An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software usr kvm A mount point retained for backward compatibility that formerly contained platform specific binaries and libraries Standards Environments and Macros 55 filesystem 5 usr lib Platform amp hyphen dependent libraries various databases commands and daemons not invoked directly by a human user An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename lib usr lib 64 Symbolic link to the most portable 64 bit Solaris interfaces usr lib acct Accounting scripts and binaries See acct 1M usr lib class Scheduling amp hyphen class specific directories containing executables for priocnt1 1 and dispadmin 1M usr lib dict Database files for spe11 1 usr lib font troff 1 font description files usr lib fs File system type dependent modules generally not intended to be invoked directly by the user usr lib iae4 x86 64 bit plattorm amp hyphen dependent libraries various databases commands and daemons not invoked directly by a human user Note that ia64 is an example name the actual name might be different An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The
20. Standards Environments and Macros 295 pam unix account 5 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION ERRORS ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES pam unix account PAM account management module for UNIX pam unix account so 1 pam unix account provides functionality to the PAM account management stack The function pam 3PAM function retrieves password aging information from the repositories specified in nsswitch conf 4 and verifies that the user s account and password have not expired The following options can be passed to the module debug syslog 3C debugging information at the LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages server policy Ifthe account authority for the user as specified by PAM USER is a server do not apply the Unix policy from the passwd entry in the name service switch The following values are returned PAM AUTHTOK EXPIRED Password expired and no longer usable PAM BUF ERR Memory buffer error PAM IGNORE Ignore module not participating in result PAM NEW AUTHTOK REQD Obtain new authentication token from the user PAM SERVICE ERR Error in underlying service module PAM SUCCESS Successfully obtains authentication token See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Interface Stability Evolving MT Level MT Safe with exceptions pam 3PAM pam authenticate 3PAM syslog 3C 1ibpam 3LIB pam conf 4 nsswitch conf 4 attributes
21. The implementation may treat a dollar sign as an anchor when used as the last character of a subexpression The dollar sign will anchor the expression to the end of the string being matched the dollar sign can be said to match the end of string following the last character 3 A BRE anchored by both and matches only an entire string For example the BRE abcde matches strings consisting only of abcdef 4 and are not special in subexpressions Note The Solaris implementation does not support anchoring in BRE subexpressions The rules specififed for BREs apply to Extended Regular Expressions EREs with the following exceptions m The characters and have special meaning as defined below mw The and characters when used as the duplication operator are not preceded by backslashes The constructs V and simply match the characters and respectively m The back reference operator is not supported m Anchoring is supported in subexpressions An ERE ordinary character a special character preceded by a backslash or a period matches a single character A bracket expression matches a single character or a single collating element An ERE matching a single character enclosed in parentheses matches the same as the ERE without parentheses would have matched An ordinary character is an ERE that matches itself An ordinary character is any character in the supported character set except for the ERE specia
22. _t f blocks tf bfree _t f_bavial t f files _t f_ffree tf favail Standards Environments and Macros 197 1f64 5 System Interfaces 198 ino_t blkent_t fsblkent t fsfilcnt t unistd h lt sys unistd h gt lt aio h gt int aio_cancel struct aiocb intaio error const struct aiocb int aio_fsync struct aiocb intaio read struct aiocb intaio return struct aiocb intaio suspend const struct aiocb ino64 t blkent64 t fsblkent64 t fsfilcnto4 t LFS64 LARGEFILE LFS64 STDIO CS LFS64 CFLAGS CS LFS64 LDFLAGS CS LFS64 LIBS CS LFS64 LINTFLAGS The following tables display the standard API and the corresponding transitional interfaces for 64 bit file offsets The interfaces are grouped by header The interface name and the affected data types are displayed in courier font intaio cancele4 struct aiocbe4 intaio errore4 const struct aiocb64 intaio fsynce4 struct aiocbe4 intaio reade4 struct aiocb64 intaio returne4 struct aiocbe64 intaio suspende4 const struct aiocb64 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Aug 2001 intaio write struct aiocb int lio listio const struct aiocb lt dirent h gt struct dirent readdir struct dirent readdir r fcntl h int att ropen int creat int open
23. day hour min EXAMPLE 2 To show pi written to 5 decimal places pi 5 n lt value of pi EXAMPLE 3 To show an input file format consisting of five colon separated fields oo oo S 59 99 99 9 sWVn arg1 lt arg2 gt lt arg3 gt arg4 arg awk 1 printf l printf 3C scan 3C Standards Environments and Macros 95 fsattr 5 NAME fsattr extended file attributes DESCRIPTION Attributes are logically supported as files within the file system The file system is therefore augmented with an orthogonal name space of file attributes Any file including attribute files can have an arbitrarily deep attribute tree associated with it Attribute values are accessed by file descriptors obtained through a special attribute interface This logical view of attributes as files allows the leveraging of existing file system interface functionality to support the construction deletion and manipulation of attributes on The special files and retain their accustomed semantics within the attribute hierarchy The attribute file refers to the current directory and the attribute file refers to the parent directory The unnamed directory at the head of each attribute tree is considered the child of the file it is associated with and the file refers to the associated file For any non directory file with attributes the entry in the unnamed directory refers to a
24. iconv 646 126 iconv 852 129 345 code set conversion tables Continued iconv 8859 1 135 iconv 8859 2 141 iconv 8859 5 147 iconv dhn 155 iconv koi8 r 159 iconv mac cyr 167 iconv_maz 175 iconv pc cyr 179 compilation environment transitional Ifcompile64 206 crypt unix traditional UNIX crypt algorithm 32 CSI attributes of interfaces 18 D data storage modules for the DHCP service dhcp modules 35 dhcp Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 33 dhcp modules data storage modules for the DHCP service 35 document production man macros to format manual pages 238 mansun macros to format manual pages 242 me macros to format technical papers 246 mm macros to format articles theses and books 251 ms macros to format articles theses and books 258 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol dhcp 33 E environ user environment 37 environment variables HOME 37 LANG 37 LC COLLATE 37 LC CTYPE 37 LC MESSAGES 37 LC MONETARY 37 environment variables Continued LC NUMERIC 37 LC TIME 37 MSGVERB 37 NETPATH 37 PATH 37 SEV_LEVEL 37 TERM 37 TZ 37 eqnchar special character definitions for eqn 42 extended file attributes fsattr 96 extensions localedef extensions description file 43 F file format notation formats formats 91 file name pattern matching fnmatch 63 filesystem
25. pam projects account management PAM module for projects usr lib security pam projects so 1 The projects service module for PAM usr lib security pam projects so 1 provides functionality for the account management PAM module The pam projects so 1 module is a shared object that can be dynamically loaded to provide the necessary functionality upon demand Its path is specified in the PAM configuration file pam projects so 1is designed to be stacked on top of the pam unix account so 1 module for all services This module is normally configured as required implying that any user lacking a default project will be denied login The project account management component provides a function to perform account management pam sm acct mgmt This function uses the getdefaultproj function see getprojent 3PROJECT to retrieve the user s default project entry from the proj ect 4 database It then sets the project ID attribute of the calling process using the settaskid 2 system call If the user does not belong to any project defined in the proj ect 4 database or if the settaskid system call failed to set the project ID attribute of the calling process the module will display an error message and will return error code PAM PERM DENIED See attributes 5 for description of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE MT Level MT Safe with exceptions settaskid 2 getprojent 3PROJECT Libpam 3LIB pam 3PAM
26. simple regular expression compile and match routines define INIT declarations define GETC void getc code define PEEKC void peekc code define UNGETC void ungetc code define RETURN ptr return code define ERROR val error code extern char locl loc2 locs include lt regexp h gt char compile char instring char expbuf const char endfug int eof int step const char string const char expbuf int advance const char string const char expbuf Regular Expressions REs provide a mechanism to select specific strings from a set of character strings The Simple Regular Expressions described below differ from the Internationalized Regular Expressions described on the regex 5 manual page in the following ways m only Basic Regular Expressions are supported m the Internationalization features character class equivalence class and multi character collation are not supported The functions step advance and compile are general purpose regular expression matching routines to be used in programs that perform regular expression matching These functions are defined by the lt regexp h gt header The functions step and advance do pattern matching given a character string and a compiled regular expression as input The function compile takes as input a regular expression as defined below and produces a compiled expression that can be used with step or advance A regular ex
27. steamer flies would match tramp steamer trampflies or steamerflies Contrary to some forms of regular expressions vgrindef alternation binds very tightly Grouping parentheses are likely to be necessary in expressions involving alternation The keyword list is just a list of keywords in the language separated by spaces If the oc boolean is specified indicating that upper and lower case are equivalent then all the keywords should be specified in lower case EXAMPLE 1 A sample program The following entry which describes the C language is typical of a language entry C e the C programming language V pb d d p d a Nd bb be cb ce sb se e le e tl kw asm auto break case char continue default do double else enum extern float for fortran goto if int long register return short sizeof static struct switch typedef union unsigned void while define else endif if ifdef ifndef include undef define endif ifdef ifndef include undef defined Note that the first field is just the language name and any variants of it Thus the C language could be specified to vgrind 1 as c or C Standards Environments and Macros 339 vgrindefs 5 FILES usr lib vgrindefs file containing vgrind descriptions SEE ALSO ex 1 1ex 1 troff 1 vgrind 1 340 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 10 Aug 1994 NAME DESCRIPT
28. the reference would look like this wiz com wiz nisplus server 133 33 33 33 For NIS the reference information is of the form lt domainname gt server name gt For example if the machine woz nis server serves the NIS domain Woz COM the reference would look like this Woz COM woz nis server Standards Environments and Macros 69 fns dns 5 After obtaining this information you then edit the DNS table see in named 1M and add a TXT record with this reference information The TXT record must be associated with a DNS domain that includes an NIS record For example the reference information shown in the examples above would be entered as follows For NIS TXT XFNNISPLUS wiz com wiz nisplus server 133 33 33 33 For NIS TXT XFNNIS woz com woz nis server Note the mandatory double quotes delimiting the contents of the TXT record After making any changes to the DNS table you must notify the server by either restarting it or sending it a signal to reread the table kill HUP cat etc named pid This update effectively adds the next naming system reference to DNS You can look up this reference using fnlookup 1 to see if the information has been added properly For example the following command looks up the next naming system reference of the DNS domain Wiz COM nlookup v Wiz COM Note the mandatory trailing slash After this administrative step has been taken clie
29. 200 307 236 234 201 374 237 40 202 351 240 217 203 342 241 257 204 344 242 363 205 40 243 323 206 271 244 361 207 347 245 321 210 40 246 237 211 353 247 277 212 213 40 250 251 40 214 356 252 254 215 346 253 255 40 216 304 256 253 176 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 Mazovia to MS 852 iconv maz 5 Mazovia MS 1250 Mazovia MS 1250 217 245 257 273 220 312 260 340 40 221 352 341 337 222 263 342 345 40 223 364 346 265 224 366 347 360 40 225 306 361 261 226 227 40 362 365 0 230 214 366 367 231 326 367 40 232 334 370 260 233 40 371 40 234 243 372 267 235 40 373 376 40 274 212 For the conversion of Mazovia to MS 852 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed Mazovia MS 852 Mazovia MS 852 205 40 234 235 206 245 235 40 210 213 40 236 230 215 206 237 40 217 244 240 215 220 250 241 275 221 251 243 340 222 210 244 344 225 217 245 343 Standards Environments and Macros 177 iconv maz 5 Mazovia to DHN FILES SEE ALSO Conversions Performed Mazovia MS 852 Mazovia MS 852 226 227 40 246 253 230 227 247 276 233 40 250 375 40 227 327 For the conversion of Mazovia to DHN all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed Mazovia DHN Mazovia DHN 200 205 40 234 203 206 2
30. 215 216 217 220 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 40 346 40 227 233 246 215 40 347 40 230 234 247 253 377 363 364 235 317 244 40 365 371 40 270 256 252 360 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 220 250 323 267 326 327 322 321 343 325 340 342 212 231 236 374 336 351 353 232 355 335 341 352 240 203 307 204 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 MS 1250 to Mazovia iconv_1250 5 Conversions Performed MS 1250 MS 852 MS 1250 MS 852 256 40 345 222 257 275 346 206 260 370 347 207 261 40 350 237 262 362 351 202 263 210 352 251 264 357 353 211 265 267 40 354 330 270 367 355 241 271 245 356 214 272 255 357 324 273 257 360 320 274 225 361 344 275 361 362 345 276 226 363 242 277 276 364 223 300 350 365 213 301 265 366 224 302 266 367 366 303 306 370 375 304 216 371 205 305 221 372 243 306 217 374 201 307 200 375 354 310 254 376 356 For the conversion of MS 1250 to Mazovia all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Standards Environments and Macros 109 iconv_1250 5 110 Conversions Performed MS 1250 Mazovia MS 1250 Mazovia 200 213 40 310 311 40 214
31. 306 316 326 336 346 356 366 376 For the conversion of ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646fr all characters not in the following tables are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 1 ISO 646fr ISO 8859 1 ISO 646fr 243 043 347 134 247 135 350 175 250 176 351 173 260 133 371 174 340 100 Converted to Underscore 137 Standards Environments and Macros 137 iconv 8859 1 5 043 100 133 134 135 173 174 175 176 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 240 241 242 244 245 246 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 320 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 341 342 343 344 345 346 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 370 372 373 374 375 376 377 ISO 8859 1 to ISO For the conversion of ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646it all characters not in the following tables 646it ITALIAN are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 1 ISO 646it ISO 8859 1 ISO 646it 243 043 350 175 247 100 351 135 260 133 354 176 340 173 362 174 347 134 371 140 Converted to Underscore 137 TI 100 133 134 135 173 174 175 176 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 230 231 232 233
32. 64 5 manual page since these names are used by the implementation to name the alternative entry points When using Sun WorkShop Compiler C 5 0 applications conforming to the specifications listed above should be compiled using the utilities and flags indicated in the following table Specification Compiler Flags Feature Test Macros ANSI ISO C c89 none Standards Environments and Macros 331 standards 5 332 SEE ALSO Specification Compiler Flags Feature Test Macros SVID3 cc Xt none POSIX 1 1990 c89 POSIX SOURCE POSIX 1 1990 and c89 POSIX SOURCE and POSIX C SOURCE 2 POSIX 2 1992 C Language Bindings Option POSIX 1b 1993 c89 POSIX C SOURCE 199309L POSIX 1c 1996 c89 POSIX C SOURCE 199506L CAE XPG3 cc Xa XOPEN SOURCE CAE XPG4 c89 XOPEN SOURCE and XOPEN VERSION 4 SUS CAE XPG4v2 includes c89 XOPEN SOURCE and XNS4 XOPEN SOURCE EXTENDED 1 SUSv2 includes XNS5 c89 XOPEN SOURCE 500 For platforms supporting the LP64 64 bit programming environment where the SC5 0 Compilers have been installed SUSv2 conforming LP64 applications using XNS5 library calls should be built with command lines of the form c89 getconf XBS5 LP64 OFF64 CFLAGS D XOPEN SOURCE 500 V getconf XBS5 LP64 OFF64 LDFLAGS foo c o foo getconf XBS5 LP64 OFF64 LIBS l1xnet sysconf 3C environ 5 1 64 5 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 29
33. DEBUG level If PAM USER see pam set item 3PAM is specified as type normal in the user attr 4 database the module returns PAM IGNORE If PAM RUSER see pam set item 3PAM is not set the uid of the process loading the module is used to determine PAM RUSER The module returns success if the user attr 4 entry for PAM RUSER has an entry in the roles field for PAM USER otherwise it returns PAM PERM DENIED This module is generally stacked above the account management module pam unix so 1 The error messages indicating that roles cannot be logged into correctly are only issued if the user has entered the correct password Here are some sample entries from pam conf 4 demonstrating the use of the pam roles so 1 module dtlogin account requisite usr lib security 1SA pam roles so 1 dtlogin account required usr lib security ISA pam unix so 1 su account requisite usr lib security 1SA pam roles so 1 su account requisite usr lib security 1SA pam roles so 1 rlogin account requisite usr lib security ISA pam_roles so 1 rlogin account required usr lib security 1SA pam unix so 1 The dtlogin program invokes pam roles so 1 PAM RUSER is the username corresponding to the uid of the dt login process which is 0 The user_attr entry for root user uid 0 is empty so all role logins are prevented through dt login The same rule applies to Login The su program invokes pam roles so 1 PAM RUSER is the username of the userid
34. Legacy management applications can administer WBEM enabled software in the Solaris operating environment Developers can write agents or providers that convert information from these protocols to WBEM and they can write adapters that convert WBEM information into these protocols See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Availability SPARC and x86 Architecture SUNWwbapi SUNWwbcor SUNWwbcou SUNWwbdev SUNWwbdoc SUNWwbpro CSI Enabled appletviewer 1 cimworkshop 1M init wbem 1M mofcomp 1M mofreg 1M snmpdx 1M wbemadmin 1M woemconfig 1M wbemlogviewer 1M attributes 5 Standards Environments and Macros 343 wbem 5 344 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 5 Nov 2001 Index A account management PAM module for projects pam projects 285 ANSI standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 architecture attributes of interfaces 18 ascii ASCII character set 16 attributes attributes of interfaces 18 attributes of interfaces architecture 18 attributes of interfaces attributes 18 attributes of interfaces availability 18 attributes of interfaces CSI 18 attributes of interfaces MT Level 18 attributes of interfaces stability 18 attributes characteristics of commands utilities and device drivers Architecture 18 Availability 18 Interfa
35. Libpam 3LIB pam conf 4 attributes 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 NOTES The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 268 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 21 Jan 2003 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION ERRORS ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES pam authtok store 5 pam authtok store password management module pam authtok store so 1 pam authtok store provides functionality to the PAM password management stack It provides one function pam sm chauthtok When invoked with flags set to PAM UPDATE AUTHTOK this module updates the authentication token for the user specified by PAM USER The authentication token PAM OLDAUTHTOK can be used to authenticate the user against repositories that need updating NIS LDAP After successful updates the new authentication token stored in PAM AUTHTOK is the user s valid password This module honors the PAM REPOSITORY item which if set specifies which repository
36. Macro Name Initial Value Reset Explanation number n FD f r f 10 r 1 n set footnote style format f 0 11 renumber r 0 1 FE y end footnote FGx n n 1 y figure title figure x number n FS n start footnote HI t y produce numbered heading level l 1 7 title t HUt y produce unnumbered heading title t Ix n underline x IBxy n underline x and embolden y IRXY n underline x and use Roman font on y LE s s 0 y end list separation s LI m p y start new list item mark m prefix p mark only MLm i s s 0 y start marked list mark m indentation i separation s 0 1 MT x y memo title title x ND x n no date in page footer x is date on cover NE B y end block text NS y start block text OF x n odd footer appears at the bottom of odd numbered pages x l c r I left c center r right OF x n odd header appears at the top of odd numbered pages x l c r I left c center r right OP y skip to the top of an odd number page P t t 0 yy begin paragraph t 0 1 O justified 1 indented Standards Environments and Macros 253 mm 5 Break Macro Name Initial Value Reset Explanation PF Xx n page footer appears at the bottom of every page x l c r I left c center r right PHx n page header appears at the top of every page x l c t I left c center r right R on n
37. NS 3 2 1 1234 56 789 3 2 177 32 12 34 56 789 3 2 1 123456789 177 In these examples the octal value of CHAR MAX is 177 A string used to indicate a non negative valued formatted monetary quantity A string used to indicate a negative valued formatted monetary quantity An integer representing the number of fractional digits those to the right of the decimal delimiter to be written in a formatted monetary quantity using int curr symbol An integer representing the number of fractional digits those to the right of the decimal delimiter to be written in a formatted monetary quantity using currency symbol An integer set to 1 if the currency symbol or int curr symbol precedes the value for a monetary quantity with a non negative value and set to 0 if the symbol succeeds the value An integer set to 0 if no space separates the currency symbolorint curr symbol from the value for a monetary quantity with a non negative value set to 1 if a space separates the symbol from the value and set to 2 if a space separates the symbol and the sign string if adjacent An integer set to 1 if the currency symbol or int curr symbol precedes the value for a monetary quantity with a negative value and set to 0 if the symbol succeeds the value An integer set to 0 if no space separates the currency symbolorint curr symbol from the value for a monetary quantity with a negative value Standards Environments a
38. The account management module reads this file to determine the previous time the user logged in The following options may be passed in to the UNIX service module debug syslog 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages pam close session is a null function The UNIX password management component provides a function to change passwords pam sm chauthtok in the UNIX password database This module must be required in pam conf It cannot be optional or sufficient The following options may be passed in to the UNIX service module debug syslog 3C Debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages use first pass It compares the password in the password database with the user s old password entered to the first password module in the stack If the passwords do not match or if no password has been entered it quits and does not prompt the user for the old password It also attempts to use the new password entered to the first 294 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 11 Dec 2001 ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES pam unix 5 password module in the stack as the new password for this module If the new password fails it quits and does not prompt the user for a new password try first pass It compares the password in the password database with the user s old password entered to the first password module in the stack If the password
39. The following is a description of some of the elements from the SolBook DTD which are used for reference pages The first line in an SGML file that identifies the location of the DTD that is used to define the document The DOCTYPE string is what the SGML aware man 1 command uses to identify that a file is formatted in SGML rather than nroff 1 The top layer element that contains a reference page is lt refentry gt All of the text and other tags must be contained within this tag The next tag in a reference page is lt refmeta gt which is a container for several other tags They are lt refentrytitle gt This is the title of the reference page It is equivalent to the name of the reference page s file name without the section number extension lt manvolnum gt This is the section number that the reference page resides in The contents may be a text entity reference 322 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 7 Jan 1997 RefNameDiv sgml 5 refmiscinfo There are one or more lt refmiscinfo gt tags which contain meta information Meta information is information about the reference page The lt refmiscinfo gt tag has the class attribute There are four classes that are routinely used date This is the date that the file was last modified By consensus this date is changed only when the technical information on the page changes and not simply for an editorial change sectde
40. and etc d_passwd files exist The user s terminal line is checked against entries in the etc dialups file If there is a match the user s shell is compared against entries in the etc d_passwd file If there is a matching entry the user is prompted for a password which is validated against the entry in the etc d_passwd file If the passwords match the user is authenticated The following option may be passed in to this service module debug syslog 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level See attributes 5 for description of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE MT Level MT Safe with exceptions pam 3PAM pam authenticate 3PAM d passwa 4 dialups 4 libpam 3LIB pam conf 4 attributes 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 272 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 11 Dec 2001 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION Kerberos Authentication Module
41. and other FNS commands Changes to NIS related properties including default access control rights could be effected using NIS administration tools and interfaces after the context has been created The NIS object name that corresponds to an FNS composite name can be obtained using fnlookup 1 and fnlist 1 fnlist 1 fnlookup 1 nis 1 nischgrp 1 nischmod 1 nischown 1 nisdefaults 1 nisls 1 fncreate 1M xfn 3XFN ns 5 fns_dns 5 fns files 5 fns initial context 5 fns nis 5 fns policies 5 fns references 5 fns x500 5 78 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 22 Nov 1996 NAME DESCRIPTION FNS Policies and NIS Federating NIS with DNS or X 500 Security Considerations fns nis 5 fns nis overview of ENS over NIS YP implementation Federated Naming Service FNS provides a method for federating multiple naming services under a single simple interface for the basic naming operations One of the naming services supported by FNS is NIS YP the enterprise wide information services in Solaris see ypcat 1 ypmatch 1 ypfiles 4 FNS provides the XFN interface for performing naming and attribute operations on FNS enterprise objects organization site user host and service objects using NIS FNS stores bindings for these objects in NIS and uses them in conjunction with existing NIS objects FNS defines policies for naming objects in the federated namespace see
42. corresponding to this category is stored in a database created by the localedef command The default C locale corresponds to as the decimal delimiter and no thousands delimiter This environment variable is used by localeconv 3C print 3C and strtod 3C LC_TIME This category specifies date and time formats The information corresponding to this category is stored in a database specified in localedef The default C locale corresponds to U S date and time formats This environment variable is used by many commands and functions for example at 1 calendar 1 date 1 strftime 3C and getdate 3C MSGVERB Controls which standard format message components mtmsg selects when messages are displayed to stderr see mtmsg 1 and fmtmsg 3C NETPATH A colon separated list of network identifiers A network identifier is a character string used by the Network Selection component of the system to provide application specific default network search paths A network identifier must consist of non null characters and must have a length of at least 1 No maximum length is specified Network identifiers are normally chosen by the system administrator A network identifier is also the first field in any etc netconfig file entry NETPATH thus provides a link into the etc netconfig file and the information 38 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 25 Oct 2001 environ 5 about a network conta
43. file system layout 44 filesystem file system organization 44 Root File System 44 usr File System 53 fnmatch file name pattern matching 63 fns overview of FNS 67 Composite Names 67 FNS and Naming Systems 68 ENS overview fns 67 overview of ENS References fns references 85 overview over DNS implementation fns dns 69 overview over files implementation fns files 71 overview over NIS implementation fns_nis 77 overview over NIS YP implementation fns nis 79 overview over X 500 implementation fns x500 88 fns overview of FNS Why ENS 67 XEN 67 fns dns overview of FNS over DNS implementation 69 346 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros September 2004 fns files overview of FNS over files implementation 71 fns files overview of FNS over etc files implementation FNS Policies and etc Files 71 fns initial context overview of the FNS Initial Context 73 fns nis overview of FNS over NIS YP implementation 79 Federating NIS with DNS or X 500 79 FNS Policies and NIS 79 NIS Security 79 fns nis overview of FNS over NIS implementation 77 FNS Policies and NIS 77 fns_policies overview of the FNS Policies 81 fns_references overview of FNS References 85 Address Types 85 Reference Types 85 fns_x500 overview of FNS over X 500 implementation 88 formats file format notation 91 fsattr extende
44. instructions in the SPARC V9 instruction set as defined in The SPARC Architecture Manual Version 9 Prentice Hall 1994 that can be used according to The V8 Technical Specification This corresponds to code produced with the xarch v8plus option of Sun s C 4 0 compiler Like sparcv8plus with the addition of those UItraSPARC I Visualization Instructions that can be used according to The V8 Technical Specification This corresponds to code produced with the arch v8plusa option of Sun s C 4 0 compiler Like sparcv8plus with the addition of the Hal SPARC64 floating multiply add and multiply subtract instructions man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Feb 1997 x86 Platforms SEE ALSO isalist 5 6 sparcv9 Indicates the SPARC V9 instruction set as defined in The SPARC Architecture Manual Version 9 Prentice Hall 1994 7a sparcv9 vis Like sparcv9 with the addition of the UltraSPARC I Visualization Instructions 7b sparcv9 fmuladd Like sparcv9 with the addition of the Hal SPARC64 floating multiply add and multiply subtract instructions 1 i386 The Intel 80386 instruction set as described in The i386 Microprocessor Programmer s Reference Manual 2 1486 The Intel 80486 instruction set as described in The i486 Microprocessor Programmer s Reference Manual This is effectively i386 plus the CMPXCHG BSWAP and XADD instructions 3 pentium The Intel Pentium instructio
45. nfssec 5 nfssec overview of NFS security modes The mount_nfs 1M and share_nfs 1M commands each provide a way to specify the security mode to be used on an NFS file system through the sec mode option mode can be either sys dh krb5 krb5i krb5p or none These security modes may also be added to the automount maps Note that mount_nfs 1M and automount 1M do not support sec none at this time The sec mode option on the share_nfs 1M command line establishes the security mode of NFS servers If the NFS connection uses the NFS Version 3 protocol the NFS clients must query the server for the appropriate mode to use If the NFS connection uses the NFS Version 2 protocol then the NFS client will use the default security mode which is currently sys NFS clients may force the use of a specific security mode by specifying the sec mode option on the command line However if the file system on the server is not shared with that security mode the client may be denied access If the NFS client wants to authenticate the NFS server using a particular stronger security mode the client will want to specify the security mode to be used even if the connection uses the NFS Version 3 protocol This guarantees that an attacker masquerading as the server does not compromise the client The NFS security modes are described below Of these the krb5 krb5i krb5p modes use the Kerberos V5 protocol for authenticating and protecting the shared filesy
46. pam acct mgmt 3PAM pam conf 4 project 4 attributes 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 Standards Environments and Macros 285 pam rhosts auth 5 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES pam rhosts auth authentication management PAM module using ruserok usr lib security pam rhosts auth so 1 The rhosts PAM module usr lib security pam rhosts auth so 1 authenticates a user via the rlogin authentication protocol Only pam sm authenticate isimplemented within this module pam sm authenticate uses the ruserok 3SOCKET library function to authenticate the rlogin or rsh user pam sm setcred isanull function usr lib security pam rhosts auth so 1 is designed to be stacked on top of the usr lib security pam unix so 1 module for both the rlogin and rsh services This module is normally configured as sufficient so that subsequent authentication is performed only on failure
47. sparc 1b sparcv7 2 sparcv8 fsmuld 3 sparcv8 4 sparcv8plus 5a sparcv8plus vis 5b sparcv8plus fmuladd command of sysinfo 2 are listed here The list is ordered within an instruction set family in the sense that later names are generally faster then earlier names note that this is in the reverse order than listed by isalist 1 and sysinfo 2 In the following list of values numbered entries generally represent increasing performance lettered entries are either mutually exclusive or cannot be ordered Where appropriate correspondence with a given value of the arch option of Sun s C 4 0 compiler is indicated Other compilers may have similar options Indicates the SPARC V8 instruction set as defined in The SPARC Architecture Manual Version 8 Prentice Hall Inc 1992 Some instructions such as integer multiply and divide FSMULD and all floating point operations on quad operands may be emulated by the kernel on certain systems Same as sparc This corresponds to code produced with the arch v7 option of Sun s C 4 0 compiler Like sparc except that integer multiply and divide must be executed in hardware This corresponds to code produced with the arch v8a option of Sun s C 4 0 compiler Like sparcv8 fsmuld except that FFMULD must also be executed in hardware This corresponds to code produced with the xarch v8 option of Sun s C 4 0 compiler Indicates the SPARC V8 instruction set plus those
48. struct directe4 ey man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Aug 2001 int getdents dirent lt sys mman h gt void mmap off t lt sys resource h gt int getrlimit struct rlimit int setrlimit const struct rlimit lt sys stat h gt int fstat struct stat int fstatat struct stat int intlstat struct stat int stat struct stat lt sys statvfs h gt int statvfs struct statvfs int fstatvfs struct statvfs lt unistd h gt 1f64 5 int getdents64 dirent64 void mmape4 off64 t int getrlimit 4 struct rlimit 4 int setrlimit 4 const struct rlimit64 int stat64 struct stat64 int fstatat64 struct stat64 int int 1state64 struct stat64 int stat64 struct stat64 int statvfs64 struct statvfs64 int statvfs64 struct statvfs64 Standards Environments and Macros 201 1f64 5 int lockf of _t int lockf64 of 64 t off t lseek off t off64 t lseeke4 ea of 64 t int ftruncate off t int ftruncatee4 off64 t ssize t pread off t ssize t pread64 off64 t ssize t pwrite off t ssize t pwrite64 off64 t inttruncate off t int truncate64 off64 t SEE ALSO 1 compile 5 lfcompil
49. to tell pam passwd auth so 1 to ignore the LDAP users passwd auth binding pam passwd auth so 1 server policy passwd auth required pam ldap so 1 4 Password management updates This stack is limited to updating password stored in the Standards Environments and Macros 281 pam ldap 5 FILES ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES EXAMPLE 4 Using pam 1dap With Password Management if There are no Local Accounts Continued LDAP directory The preferred method is shown in Example 3 other password required pam ldap so 1 var ldap ldap client file var ldap ldap client cred The LDAP configuration files of the client Do not manually modify these files as these files may not be human readable Use ldapclient 1M to update these files etc pam conf PAM configuration file See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE MT Level MT Safe with exceptions Stability Level Evolving ldap 1 idsconfig 1M 1dap cachemgr 1M 1dapclient 1M 1ibpam 3LIB pam 3PAM pam sm authenticate 3PAM pam sm chauthtok 3PAM pam sm setcred 3PAM syslog 3C pam conf 4 attributes 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle For information on how to configure the
50. 200 300 256 201 201 301 257 203 202 302 260 263 40 203 303 264 263 204 304 266 264 205 305 267 243 206 306 270 252 207 307 271 272 210 310 272 257 211 311 273 277 212 312 274 212 213 313 275 232 214 314 276 214 215 315 277 234 216 316 300 274 172 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 iconv mac cyr 5 Conversions Performed Mac Cyrillic MS 1251 Mac Cyrillic MS 1251 217 317 301 275 220 320 302 254 221 321 303 306 40 222 322 307 253 223 323 310 273 224 324 311 205 225 325 312 240 226 326 313 200 227 327 314 220 230 330 315 215 231 331 316 235 232 332 317 276 233 333 320 226 234 334 321 227 235 335 322 223 236 336 323 224 237 337 324 221 240 206 325 222 241 260 326 40 242 245 327 204 243 40 330 241 244 247 331 242 245 267 332 217 246 266 333 237 247 262 334 271 250 256 335 250 252 231 336 270 253 200 337 377 Standards Environments and Macros 173 iconv mac cyr 5 Conversions Performed Mac Cyrillic MS 1251 Mac Cyrillic MS 1251 254 220 362 324 FILES usr lib iconv so usr lib iconv t usr lib iconv iconv data SEE ALSO iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 conversion modules conversion tables list of conversions supported by conversion tables 174 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 NAME DESCRIPTION CO
51. 234 235 236 237 240 241 242 244 245 246 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 341 342 343 344 345 346 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 370 372 373 374 375 376 377 138 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 28 Apr 1997 ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646es SPANISH ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646sv SWEDISH iconv 8859 1 5 For the conversion of ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646es all characters not in the following tables are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 1 ISO 646es ISO 8859 1 ISO 646es 241 133 321 134 247 100 347 175 260 173 361 174 277 135 Converted to Underscore 137 100 133 134 135 173 174 175 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 240 242 243 244 245 246 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 322 323 324 325 326 327 330 331 232 333 33234 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 362 363 364 365 366 367 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 For the conversion of ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646sv all characters not in the
52. 243 244 245 246 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 Standards Environments and Macros 179 iconv pc cyr 5 Conversions Performed PC Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 PC Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 215 275 247 327 216 276 250 330 217 277 251 331 220 300 252 332 221 301 253 333 222 302 254 334 223 303 255 335 224 304 256 336 225 305 257 337 226 306 260 337 255 227 307 360 241 230 310 362 376 255 PC Cyrillic to For the conversion of PC Cyrillic to KOI8 R all characters not in the following table KOI8 R are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed PC Cyrillic KOI8 R PC Cyrillic KOI8 R 24 4 242 327 200 341 243 307 201 342 244 304 202 367 245 305 203 347 246 326 204 344 247 332 205 345 250 311 206 366 251 312 207 372 252 313 210 351 253 314 211 352 254 315 180 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 iconv pc cyr 5 Conversions Performed PC Cyrillic KOI8 R PC Cyrillic KOI8 R 212 353 255 316 213 354 256 317 214 355 257 320 215 356 260 337 255 216 357 340 322 217 360 341 323 220 362 342 324 221 363 343 325 222 364 344 306 223 365 345 310 224 346 346 303 225 350 347 336 226 343 350 333 227 376 351 335 230 373 352 337 231 375 353 331 232 377 354 330 233 371 355 334 234 370 356 300 235 374 357 321 236 340 360 263 237 361 361 243 240 301 362 376 255 241 302
53. 277 257 260 263 243 321 301 302 327 307 304 305 326 332 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 322 323 324 325 306 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 Mac Cyrillic to PC Cyrillic iconv mac cyr 5 Conversions Performed Mac Cyrillic KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic KOI8 R 260 263 40 365 310 264 246 366 303 265 266 40 367 336 267 270 370 333 270 264 371 335 271 244 372 337 272 267 373 331 273 247 374 330 274 271 375 334 275 251 376 300 375 370 For the conversion of Mac Cyrillic to PC Cyrillic all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed Mac Cyrillic PC Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic PC Cyrillic 24 4 355 255 240 334 40 356 256 335 360 357 257 336 361 360 340 337 357 361 341 340 240 362 342 341 241 363 343 342 242 364 344 343 243 365 345 344 244 366 346 345 245 367 347 346 246 370 350 Standards Environments and Macros 171 iconv mac cyr 5 Conversions Performed Mac Cyrillic PC Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic PC Cyrillic 347 247 371 351 350 250 372 352 351 251 373 353 352 252 374 354 353 253 375 355 354 254 376 356 303 366 Mac Cyrillic to MS For the conversion of Mac Cyrillic to MS 1251 all characters not in the following table 1251 are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed Mac Cyrillic MS 1251 Mac Cyrillic MS 1251 24 4 255 40
54. 315 220 311 327 316 221 305 330 354 222 345 331 334 40 223 364 335 336 224 366 336 331 225 274 337 40 226 276 340 323 227 214 341 337 230 234 342 324 231 326 343 321 232 334 344 361 233 215 345 362 234 235 346 212 235 243 347 232 236 327 350 300 237 350 351 332 240 341 352 340 241 355 353 333 242 363 354 375 243 372 355 335 244 245 356 376 245 271 357 264 246 216 360 255 247 236 361 275 250 312 362 262 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 MS 852 to Mazovia iconv_852 5 Conversions Performed MS 852 MS 1250 MS 852 MS 1250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 260 264 265 266 267 352 254 237 310 272 253 273 40 301 302 314 363 364 365 366 367 370 371 372 374 375 376 241 242 247 367 270 260 250 377 330 370 40 For the conversion of MS 852 to Mazovia all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed MS 852 Mazovia MS 852 Mazovia 205 40 246 247 40 206 215 250 220 210 222 251 221 212 213 40 253 246 215 240 254 270 40 217 225 275 241 220 226 40 276 247 227 230 306 336 40 230 236 340 243 233 234 40 342 40 235 234 343 245 236 243 40 344 244 Standards Environments and Macros 133 iconv_852 5 MS 852 to DHN FILES SEE ALSO Conversions Performed MS 852 Mazovia MS 852 Mazovia 244 217 245 206
55. 346 212 257 210 347 351 40 260 370 352 213 261 361 353 354 40 262 40 355 241 263 214 356 360 40 264 40 361 215 265 346 362 40 266 40 363 216 267 372 364 223 270 40 365 40 271 211 366 224 272 40 367 366 273 257 370 371 40 274 276 40 372 243 277 221 373 376 40 300 305 40 usr lib iconv so usr lib iconv t usr lib iconv iconv data iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 conversion modules conversion tables list of conversions supported by conversion tables man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 NAME DESCRIPTION CONVERSIONS MS 1251 to ISO 8859 5 iconv_1251 5 iconv_1251 code set conversion tables for MS 1251 Windows Cyrillic The following code set conversions are supported The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal Code Set Conversions Supported Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Output MS 1251 wind ISO 8859 5 iso5 ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic MS 1251 win5 KOI8 R koi8 KOI8 R MS 1251 win5 PC Cyrillic alt Alternative PC Cyrillic MS 1251 win5 Mac Cyrillic mac Macintosh Cyrillic For the conversion of MS 1251 to ISO 8859 5 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed MS 1251 ISO 8859 5 MS 1251 ISO 8859 5 24 4 310 270 200 242 311 271 201 243 312 272 202 40 313 273 203 363 314 274 20
56. 363 322 340 243 361 323 341 244 364 324 342 245 365 325 343 246 366 327 322 247 367 330 354 250 370 331 353 251 371 332 327 252 372 333 350 253 373 334 355 254 374 335 351 256 376 336 347 Standards Environments and Macros 159 iconv_koi8 r 5 160 Conversions Performed KOI8 R ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R ISO 8859 5 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 310 311 312 377 360 242 243 241 244 245 246 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 356 320 321 346 324 325 344 323 345 330 331 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 370 371 372 352 316 260 261 306 264 265 304 263 305 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 317 300 301 302 303 266 262 314 313 267 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 KOIS R to PC Cyrillic iconv_koi8 r 5 Conversions Performed KOI8 R ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R ISO 8859 5 313 314 315 316 317 332 333 334 335 336 373 374 375 376 310 315 311 307 For the conversion of KOI8 R to PC Cyrillic all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed KOI8 R PC Cyrillic KOI8 R PC Cyrillic 24 200 242 2
57. 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 In the conversion library usr 1lib iconv see iconv 3C the library module filename is composed of two symbolic elements separated by the percent sign The first symbol specifies the code set that is being converted the second symbol specifies the target code that is the code set to which the first one is being converted FILES SEE ALSO iconv_unicode 5 EXAMPLE 1 The library module filename Continued In the conversion table above the first symbol is termed the FROM Filename Element The second symbol representing the target code set is the TO Filename Element For example the library module filename to convert from the Korean EUC code set to the Korean UTF 8 code set is ko KR euc ko KR UTF 8 usr lib iconv so conversion modules iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 Chernov A Registration of a Cyrillic Character Set RFC 1489 RELCOM Development Team July 1993 Chon K H Je Park and U Choi Korean Character Encoding for Internet Messages RFC 1557 Solvit Chosun Media December 1993 Goldsmith D and M Davis UTF 7 A Mail Safe Transformation Format of Unicode RFC 1642 Taligent Inc July 1994 Lee F HZ A Data Format for Exchanging Files of Arbitrarily Mixed Chinese and ASCII characters RFC 1843 Stanford University August 1995 Murai J M Crispin and E van der Poel Japanese Character Encoding for Internet Messages RFC 1468 Keio Univer
58. 852 DHN Mazovia ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R iconv_8859 5 5 ISO 8859 5 PC Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 MS 1251 ISO 8859 5 Mac Cyrillic KOI8 R ISO 8859 5 iconv_koi8 r 5 KOI8 R PC Cyrillic KOI8 R MS 1251 KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic PC Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 iconv_pc_cyr 5 PC Cyrillic KOI8 R man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 5 Dec 2001 iconv 5 Index of Conversion Code Tables PC Cyrillic MS 1251 PC Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic MS 1251 ISO 8859 5 iconv 1251 5 MS 1251 KOI8 R MS 1251 PC Cyrillic MS 1251 Mac Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 iconv_mac_cyr 5 Mac Cyrillic KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic PC Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic MS 1251 FILES usr lib iconv so conversion modules usr lib iconv t Conversion tables usr lib iconv geniconvtbl binarytables bt Conversion binary tables usr lib iconv iconv data List of conversions supported by conversion tables SEE ALSO iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 1250 5 iconv 1251 5 iconv 646 5 iconv_852 5 iconv_8859 1 5 iconv_8859 2 5 iconv_8859 5 5 iconv_dhn 5 iconv koi8 r 5 iconv_mac_cyr 5 iconv_maz 5 iconv pc cyr 5 iconv_unicode 5 Standards Environments and Macros 125 iconv_646 5 NAME DESCRIPTION CONVERSIONS ISO 646 US ASCII to ISO 8859 1 ISO 646de GERMAN to ISO 8859 1 ISO 646da DANISH to ISO 8859 1 iconv_646 code set conversion tables for ISO 646
59. 9899 C Standard Amendment 1 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 29 Aug 2001 Utilities Feature Test Macros standards 5 X Open CAE Specification Description Release XNS5 superset and LP64 clean derivative of Solaris 7 XNS4 The XNS4 specification is safe for use only in ILP32 32 bit environments and should not be used for LP64 64 bit application environments Use XNS5 which has LP64 clean interfaces that are portable across ILP32 and LP64 environments Solaris releases 7 through 9 support both the ILP32 and ILP64 enviornments Solaris releases 7 through 9 have been branded to conform to The Open Group s UNIX 98 Product Standard Solaris releases 2 0 through 9 support the interfaces specified by the System V Interface Definition Third Edition Volumes 1 through 4 SVID3 Note however that since the developers of this specification UNIX Systems Laboratories are no longer in business and since this specification defers to POSIX and X Open CAE specifications there is some disagreement about what is currently required for conformance to this specification When Sun WorkShop Compiler C 4 2 is installed Solaris releases 2 0 through 9 support the ANSI X3 159 1989 Programming Language C and ISO IEC 9899 1990 Programming Language C C interfaces When Sun WorkShop Compiler C 5 0 is installed Solaris releases 7 through 9 also support ISO IEC 9899 Amendment 1
60. Aug 2001 NAME DESCRIPTION FILES SEE ALSO BUGS sticky 5 sticky mark files for special treatment The sticky bit file mode bit 01000 see chmod 2 is used to indicate special treatment of certain files and directories A directory for which the sticky bit is set restricts deletion of files it contains A file in a sticky directory may only be removed or renamed by a user who has write permission on the directory and either owns the file owns the directory or is the super user This is useful for directories such as tmp which must be publicly writable but should deny users permission to arbitrarily delete or rename the files of others If the sticky bit is set on a regular file and no execute bits are set the system s page cache will not be used to hold the file s data This bit is normally set on swap files of diskless clients so that accesses to these files do not flush more valuable data from the system s cache Moreover by default such files are treated as swap files whose inode modification times may not necessarily be correctly recorded on permanent storage Any user may create a sticky directory See chmod for details about modifying file modes tmp chmod 1 chmod 2 chown 2 mkdir 2 mkdir 2 will not create a directory with the sticky bit set Standards Environments and Macros 333 term 5 334 NAME DESCRIPTION term conventional names for terminals Terminal names are maintain
61. Level attributes of interfaces 18 N native instruction sets known to Solaris isalist 190 NFS and sticky bits sticky 333 nfssec overview of NFS security modes 263 O overview of FNS fns 67 overview of FNS over DNS implementation fns_dns 69 overview of FNS over files implementation fns_files 71 overview of FNS over NIS implementation fns_nis 77 overview of FNS over NIS YP implementation fns_nis 79 overview of FNS over X 500 implementation fns_x500 88 overview of FNS References fns_references 85 overview of NFS security modes nfssec 263 overview of the FNS Initial Context fns_initial_context 73 overview of the FNS Policies fns_policies 81 P PAM account management module for UNIX pam unix account 296 pam authtok check authentication and password management module 265 pam authtok get authentication and password management module 267 pam authtok store password management module 269 pam dial auth authentication management for dialups 272 pam krb5 authentication account session and password management for Kerberos V5 273 pam krb5 authentication account session and password management PAM modules for Kerberos V5 273 pam passwd auth authentication module for password 283 pam projects account management PAM module for projects 285 pam rhosts auth authentication management using ru
62. OU IMPLICITE N EST ACCORDEE Y COMPRIS DES GARANTIES CONCERNANT LA VALEUR MARCHANDE L APTITUDE DE LA PUBLICATION A REPONDRE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU LE FAIT QU ELLE NE SOIT PAS CONTREFAISANTE DE PRODUIT DE TIERS CE DENI DE GARANTIE NE S APPLIQUERAIT PAS DANS LA MESURE OU IL SERAIT TENU JURIDIQUEMENT NUL ET NON AVENU O a e Adobe PostScript tr 04071499061 Contents Preface 7 Introduction 13 Intro 5 14 Standards Environments and Macros 15 ascii 5 16 attributes 5 18 charmap 5 26 crypt bsdbf 5 29 crypt bsdmd5 5 30 crypt sunmd5 5 31 crypt_unix 5 32 dhep 5 33 dhcp modules 5 35 environ 5 37 eqnchar 5 42 extensions 5 43 filesystem 5 44 fnmatch 5 63 fns 5 67 fns_dns 5 69 fns_files 5 71 fns initial context b 73 fns_nis 5 77 fns_nis 5 79 fns policies 5 81 fns_references 5 85 fns x500 5 88 formats 5 91 fsattr 5 96 iconv 1250 5 107 iconv 1251 5 113 iconv 5 122 iconv_646 5 126 iconv_852 5 129 iconv_8859 1 5 135 iconv_8859 2 5 141 iconv_8859 5 5 147 iconv_dhn 5 155 iconv_koi8 r 5 159 iconv mac cyr 5 167 iconv maz 5 175 iconv_pc_cyr 5 179 iconv unicode 5 185 isalist 5 190 largefile 5 192 1f64 5 196 Ifcompile 5 203 Ifcompile64 5 206 live upgrade 5 208 locale 5 212 man 5 238 mansun 5 242 me 5 246 mm 5 251 ms 5 258 nfssec 5 263 pam_authtok_check 5 265 pam_authtok_get 5 267 pam authtok store 5 269 pam dhkeys 5 270 pam
63. PC Cyrillic to MS For the conversion of PC Cyrillic to MS 1251 all characters not in the following table 1251 are mapped unchanged Standards Environments and Macros 181 iconv pc cyr 5 182 Conversions Performed PC Cyrillic MS 1251 PC Cyrillic MS 1251 24 4 242 342 200 300 243 343 201 301 244 344 202 302 245 345 203 303 246 346 204 304 247 347 205 305 250 350 206 306 251 351 207 307 252 352 210 310 253 353 211 311 254 354 212 312 255 355 213 313 256 356 214 314 257 357 215 315 260 337 210 216 316 340 360 217 317 341 361 220 320 342 362 221 321 343 363 222 322 344 364 223 323 345 365 224 324 346 366 225 325 347 367 226 326 350 370 227 327 351 371 230 330 352 372 231 331 353 373 232 332 354 374 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 PC Cyrillic to Mac Cyrillic iconv pc cyr 5 Conversions Performed PC Cyrillic MS 1251 PC Cyrillic MS 1251 233 333 355 375 234 334 356 376 235 335 357 377 236 336 360 250 237 337 361 270 240 340 362 376 210 241 341 For the conversion of PC Cyrillic to Mac Cyrillic all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed PC Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic PC Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic 24 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 3
64. TXfp Cause Break no yes yes no yes yes no no yes no yes no yes yes yes no If no Argument t n t l t n t l i p i t n t l t n t l i p i mansun 5 Explanation Index macro for SunSoft internal use Begin left aligned paragraph Set prevailing indent to 5i Same as LP Set vertical distance between paragraphs Same as LP End of relative indent Restores prevailing indent Join words alternating Roman and bold Join words alternating Roman and italic Start relative indent increase indent by i Sets prevailing indent to 5i for nested indents Reduce size of text by 1 point make text bold Section Heading Reduce size of text by 1 point Section Subheading Begin reference page n of of section s d is the date of the most recent change If present f is the left page footer m is the main page center header Sets prevailing indent and tabs to 5i Begin indented paragraph with the tag given on the next text line Set prevailing indent to i Resolve the title abbreviation t join to punctuation mark or text p When formatting a manual page mansun examines the first line to determine whether it requires special processing For example a first line consisting of ENU t indicates that the manual page must be run through the tb1 1 preprocessor Standards Environments and Macros 243 mansun 5 A typical manual page
65. Unix module Because the try first pass option is designated if the initial password entered for the Unix module authenticates Kerberos V5 successfully the old Kerberos V5 password is not requested from the user only the new Kerberos V5 password is requested See attributes 5 for description of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE MT Level MT Safe with exceptions Interface Stability Evolving keylogin 1 ktutil 1 pam 3PAM pam authenticate 3PAM syslog 3C libpam 3LIB pam conf 4 attributes 5 SEAM 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 21 Jan 2003 pam krb5 5 The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 Standards Environments and Macros 277 pam ldap 5 278 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION LDAP Authentication Module pam ldap authentication account and password management PAM module for LDAP usr lib securi
66. administrative utilities required for boot Semantics are equivalent to sbin An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software proc Root of a subtree for the process file system sbin Essential executables used in the booting process and in manual system recovery The full complement of utilities is available only after usr is mounted sbin is an approved installation location for bundled Solaris software tmp Temporary files cleared during the boot operation usr Mount point for the usr file system See description of usr file system below var Root of a subtree for varying files Varying files are files that are unique to a machine but that can grow to an arbitrary that is variable size An example is a log file An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is var opt packagename var adm System logging and accounting files var apache Scripts icons logs and cache pages for Apache web server var audit Basic Security Module BSM audit files var crash Default depository for kernel crash dumps var cron Log files for cron 1M var dmi Solstice Enterprise Agents SEA Desktop Management Interface DMI run time components var dt dtlogin configuration files 50 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Nov 2001 file
67. an ANSI X3 159 1989 ANSI C Language standard conforming compilation system and the cc and c89 utilities Solaris 7 through 9 were tested with the cc and c89 utilities and the compilation system provided by Sun WorkShop Compiler C 5 0 in the SPARC and x86 environments When cc is used to link applications usr ccs lib values xpg4 o must be specified on any link load command line but the preferred way to build applications is described below An XNS4 or XNS5 conforming application must include 1 XNS on any link load command line in addition to defining the feature test macros specified for SUS or SUSv2 respectively If the compiler suppports the redefine_extname pragma feature the Sun WorkShop Compiler C 4 2 and Sun WorkShop Compiler C 5 0 compilers define the macro PRAGMA REDEFINE EXTNAME to indicate that it supports this feature then the standard headers use pragma redefine extname directives to properly map function names onto library entry point names This mapping provides full support for ISO C POSIX and X Open namespace reservations The Sun WorkShop Compiler C 5 0 compiler was used for all branding and certification tests for Solaris releases 7 through 9 If this pragma feature is not supported by the compiler the headers use the define directive to map internal function names onto appropriate library entry point names In this instance applications should avoid using the explicit 64 bit file offset symbols listed on the 1
68. another naming system Resolution of a composite name proceeds from contexts within one naming system to those in the next until the name is resolved XEN is X Open Federated Naming The programming interface and policies that FNS supports are specified by XFN See x n 3XEN and fns_policies 5 A composite name is a name that spans multiple naming systems It consists of an ordered list of components Each component is a name from the namespace of a single naming system FNS defines the syntax for constructing a composite name using names from component naming systems Individual naming systems are responsible for the syntax of each component The syntax for composite names is that components are composed left to right using the slash character as the component separator For example the composite name Wiz Com site Oceanview East consists of four components Wiz COM site and Oceanview East See fns policies 5 and fns initial context 5 for more examples of composite names ENS is useful for the following reasons m A single uniform naming interface is provided to clients for accessing naming services Consequently the addition of new naming services does not require changes to applications or existing naming services Furthermore applications that use FNS will be portable across platforms because the interface exported by FNS is XEN a public open interface endorsed by other vendors and by the X Open Company Sta
69. attr database are shown below Solaris jobs Cron and At Jobs help JobHeader html solaris jobs grant Delegate Cron amp At Administration help JobsGrant html Solaris jobs admin Manage All Jobs help AuthJobsAdmin html Solaris jobs user Cron amp At User help JobsUser html Authorization name strings ending with the grant suffix are special authorizations that give a user the ability to delegate authorizations with the same prefix and functional area to other users To check authorizations use the chkauthattr 3SECDB library function which verifies whether or not a user has a given authorization The synopsis is int chkauthattr const char authname const char username The chkauthattr function checks the policy conf 4 user_attr 4 and prof attr 4 databases in order for a match to the given authorization If you are modifying existing code that tests for root UID you should find the test in the code and replace it with the chkauthattr function A typical root UID check is shown in the first code segment below An authorization check replacing it is shown in the second code segment it uses the solaris jobs admin authorization and a variable called real login representing the user EXAMPLE 1 Standard root check ruid getuid Standards Environments and Macros 301 rbac 5 302 EXAMPLE 1 Standard root check Continued if eflag lflag rflag amp amp argc 1 if pwp getpwnam a
70. buffer error PAM IGNORE Ignore module not participating in result PAM SUCCESS Successfully obtains authentication token PAM SYSTEM ERR System error See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Interface Stability Evolving MT Level MT Safe with exceptions passwd 1 pam 3PAM pam authenticate 8PAM pam start 3PAM pam set item 3PAM syslog 3C libpam 3LIB pam conf 4 attributes 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle Standards Environments and Macros 283 pam passwd auth 5 This module relies on the value of the current real UID this module is only safe for MT applications that don t change UIDs during the call to pam authenticate 3PAM The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 284 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 21 Jan 2003 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION Projects Account Management Module ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES pam projects 5
71. character if it is a colon Otherwise TZ has the form stdoffset dst offset start time end time std and dst offset Three or more bytes that are the designation for the standard std and daylight savings time dst timezones Only std is required If dst is missing then daylight savings time does not apply in this locale Upper and lower case letters from the portable character set are explicitly allowed Any graphic characters from the portable character set except a leading colon or digits the comma the minus the plus and the null character are permitted to appear in these fields but their meaning is unspecified Indicates the value one must add to the local time to arrive at Coordinated Universal Time The offset has the form hh mm 5ss The minutes mm and seconds ss are optional The hour hh is required and may be a single digit The offset following std is required If no offset follows dst daylight savings time is assumed to be one hour ahead of standard time One or more digits may be used The value is always interpreted as a decimal number The hour must be between 0 and 24 and the minutes and seconds if present must be between 0 and 59 Out of range values may cause unpredictable behavior If preceded by a the timezone is east of the Prime Meridian Otherwise it is west of the Prime Meridian which may be indicated by an uam optional precedin
72. chown 2 Link 2 open 2 pathconf 2 rename 2 stat 2 unlink 2 utimes 2 attropen 3C standards 5 106 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Aug 2001 NAME DESCRIPTION CONVERSIONS MS 1250 to ISO 8859 2 MS 1250 to MS 852 iconv_1250 5 iconv_1250 code set conversion tables for MS 1250 Windows Latin 2 The following code set conversions are supported Code Set Conversions Supported Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Output MS 1250 win2 ISO 8859 2 iso2 ISO Latin 2 MS 1250 win2 MS 852 dos2 MS DOS Latin 2 MS 1250 win2 Mazovia maz Mazovia MS 1250 win2 DHN dhn Dom Handlowy Nauki The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal For the conversion of MS 1250 to ISO 8859 2 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed MS 1250 ISO 8859 2 MS 1250 ISO 8859 2 24 211 40 235 273 212 251 236 276 213 40 237 274 214 246 241 267 215 253 245 241 216 256 246 267 40 217 254 271 261 221 231 40 273 40 232 271 274 245 233 40 276 265 234 266 247 365 For the conversion of MS 1250 to MS 852 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Standards Environments and Macros 107 iconv_1250 5 108 Conversions Performed MS 1250 MS 852 MS 1250 MS 852 200 211 212 213 214
73. circumflex character in its role in a non matching list in the regular expression notation A bracket expression starting with an unquoted circumflex character produces unspecified results The restriction on a circumflex in a bracket expression is to allow implementations that support pattern matching using the circumflex as the negation character in addition to the exclamation mark A portable application must use something like A to match either character When pattern matching is used where shell quote removal is not performed such as in the argument to the ind name primary when ind is being called using one of the exec functions or in the pattern argument to the nmatch 3C function special characters can be escaped to remove their special meaning by preceding them with a backslash character This escaping backslash will be discarded The sequence represents one literal backslash All of the requirements and effects of quoting on ordinary shell special and special pattern characters will apply to escaping in this context Standards Environments and Macros 63 fnmatch 5 Patterns Matching 64 Multiple Characters Both quoting and escaping are described here because pattern matching must work in three separate circumstances Calling directly upon the shell such as in pathname expansion or in a case statement All of the following will match the string or file abc abc abc a b c a be alble
74. column 1 and preceding a trailer line containing the string END CHARMAP starting in column 1 Empty lines and lines containing a lt comment_char gt in the first column will be ignored Each non comment line of the character set mapping definition that is between the CHARMAP and END CHARMAP lines of the file must be in either of two forms Ss s sWn symbolic name encoding comments Ss 8 Ss sWn symbolic name symbolic name lt encoding gt lt comments gt In the first format the line in the character set mapping definition defines a single symbolic name and a corresponding encoding A character following an escape character is interpreted as itself for example the sequence Vi V represents the symbolic name enclosed between angle brackets In the second format the line in the character set mapping definition defines a range of one or more symbolic names In this form the symbolic names must consist of zero or more non numeric characters followed by an integer formed by one or more decimal digits The characters preceding the integer must be identical in the two symbolic names and the integer formed by the digits in the second symbolic name must be equal to or greater than the integer formed by the digits in the first name This is interpreted as a series of symbolic names formed from the common part and each of the integers between the first and the second integer inclusive As an example lt j0101
75. comparing strings using the first primary weight the second when comparing strings using the second weight and so on Operands are separated by semicolons Standards Environments and Macros 221 locale 5 222 Collation Order Each operand consists of one or more collation directives separated by commas If the number of operands exceeds the COLL WEIGHTS MAX limit the utility will issue a warning message The following directives will be supported forward Specifies that comparison operations for the weight level proceed from start of string towards the end of string backward Specifies that comparison operations for the weight level proceed from end of string towards the beginning of string position Specifies that comparison operations for the weight level will consider the relative position of elements in the strings not subject to IGNORE The string containing an element not subject to IGNORE after the fewest collating elements subject to IGNORE from the start of the compare will collate first If both strings contain a character not subject to IGNORE in the same relative position the collating values assigned to the elements will determine the ordering In case of equality subsequent characters not subject to IGNORE are considered in the same manner The directives forward and backward are mutually exclusive For example order start forward backward If no operands are specified a single forwa
76. configuration information var spool Contains directories for files used in printer spooling mail delivery cron 1M at 1 and so forth var spool clientmqueue sendmail 1M client files var spool cron cron 1M and at 1 spooling files var spool locks Spooling lock files var spool lp Line printer spool files See 1p 1 var spool mqueue Mail queued for delivery var spool pkg Spooled packages var spool print LP print service client side request staging area var spool samba Samba print queue var spool uucp Queued uucp 1C jobs var spool uucppublic Files deposited by uucp 1C var statmon Network status monitor files var tmp Files that vary in size or presence during normal system operations This directory is not cleared during the boot operation An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software and applications var uucp uucp 1C log and status files 52 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Nov 2001 usr File System filesystem 5 var yp Databases needed for backwards compatibility with NIS and ypbind 1M unnecessary after full transition to NIS Because it is desirable to keep the root file system small and not volatile on disk based systems larger file systems are often mounted on home opt usr and var The file system mounted on usr contains platform dependent and platfor
77. controlled by Sun intrarelease incompatibilities are common 20 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Aug 2001 attributes 5 Stability Release Comments Obsolete Minor x y Deprecated interface likely to be removed in a future minor release The interface stability levels described in this manual page apply to both source and binary interfaces unless otherwise stated The stability level of each interface is unknown unless explicitly stated Standard organization name standard name version The documented interface complies with the standard listed If a standard is not specified the interface is defined by several standards This is usually the hierarchy built up from the C Language defined by ISO IEC or K amp R SVID 3 and associated ABIs defined by AT amp T the POSIX standards defined by IEEE and ISO IEC and the Single UNIX Specifications defined by The Open Group See standards 5 for a complete list of these standards Most of these interfaces are defined by a formal standard and controlled by a standards development organization Changes will usually be made in accordance with approved changes to that standard This stability level can also apply to interfaces that have been adopted without a formal standard by an industry convention Support is provided for only the specified version s of a standard support for later versions is not guaranteed If the
78. currently where attributes such as owner and mode are not copied unless the p option is specified With the e or p option cp attempts to copy all attributes along with the file data cpio The e option informs cpio to archive attributes but by default cpio ignores extended attributes See Extended Archive Formats below for a description of the new archive records du File sizes computed include the space allocated for any extended attributes present find By default ind ignores attributes The xattr expression provides support for searches involving attribute space It returns true if extended attributes are present on the current file fsck The fsck utility manages extended attribute data on the disk A file system with extended attributes can be mounted on versions of Solaris that are not attribute aware versions prior to Solaris 9 but the attributes will not be accessible and sck will strip them from the files and place them in lost found Once the attributes have been stripped the file system is completely stable on Solaris versions that are not attribute aware but would now be considered Standards Environments and Macros 97 fsattr 5 98 fsdb ls mv pax tar corrupted on attribute aware versions of Solaris The attribute aware sck utility should be run to stabilize the file system before using it in an attribute aware environment This sdb utility is able to find the inode for
79. dependent libraries various databases commands and daemons that are associated with subsystem and that are not invoked directly by a human user An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename 1ib usr lib subsystem ia64 x86 64 bit platform amp hyphen dependent libraries various databases commands and daemons that are associated with subsystem and that are not invoked directly by a human user Note that ia64 is an example name the actual name might be different An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename 1ib iae4 usr lib subsystem sparcv9 SPARC 64 bit platform amp hyphen dependent libraries various databases commands and daemons that are associated with subsystem and that are not invoked directly by a human user An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename 1ib sparcv9 usr subsystem 1ib Platform amp hyphen dependent libraries various databases commands and daemons not invoked directly by a human user An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename 1ib Standards Environments and Macros 57 f
80. described in Locale Definition above lt collating symbol gt s lt collating element gt s an ellipsis or the special symbol IGNORE A single character a collating symbol or a lt collating element gt represent the relative Standards Environments and Macros 223 locale 5 position in the character collating sequence of the character or symbol rather than the character or characters themselves Thus rather than assigning absolute values to weights a particular weight is expressed using the relative order value assigned to a collating element based on its order in the character collation sequence One to many mapping is indicated by specifying two or more concatenated characters or symbolic names For example if the character lt eszet gt is given the string s s as a weight comparisons are performed as if all occurrences of the character lt eszet gt are replaced by lt s gt lt s gt assuming that s has the collating weight lt s gt If it is necessary to define lt eszet gt and lt s gt lt s gt as an equivalence class then a collating element must be defined for the string ss All characters specified via an ellipsis will by default be assigned unique weights equal to the relative order of characters Characters specified via an explicit or implicit UNDEFINED special symbol will by default be assigned the same primary weight that is belong to the same equivalence class An ellipsis symbol as a weight i
81. discuss OPTIONS or cite EXAMPLES Interactive commands subcommands requests macros and functions are described under USAGE This section appears on pages in Section 7 only Only the device class that supplies appropriate parameters to the ioct1 2 system call is called ioctl and generates its own heading ioct1 calls for a specific device are listed alphabetically on the man page for that specific device ioct1 calls are used for a particular class of devices all of which have an io ending such as mt io 7I This secton lists the command options with a concise summary of what each option does The options are listed literally and in the order they appear in the SYNOPSIS section Possible arguments to options are discussed under the option and where appropriate default values are supplied This section lists the command operands and describes how they affect the actions of the command This section describes the output standard output standard error or output files generated by the command If the man page documents functions that return values this section lists these values and describes the conditions under which they are returned If a function can return only constant values such as 0 or 1 these values are listed in tagged paragraphs Otherwise a single paragraph describes the return values of each function Functions declared void do not return values so they are not discussed in RETURN VALUES On fail
82. element except for the expressions represented in the list after the leading circumflex For example abc is an RE that matches any character or collating element except the characters a b or c The circumflex will have this special meaning only when it occurs first in the list immediately following the left bracket Standards Environments and Macros 305 regex 5 4 Acollating symbol is a collating element enclosed within bracket period delimiters Multi character collating elements must be represented as collating symbols when it is necessary to distinguish them from a list of the individual characters that make up the multi character collating element For example if the string ch is a collating element in the current collation sequence with the associated collating symbol lt ch gt the expression ch will be treated as an RE matching the character sequence ch while ch will be treated as an RE matching c or h Collating symbols will be recognized only inside bracket expressions This implies that the RE ch c matches the first to fifth character in the string chchch If the string is not a collating element in the current collating sequence definition or if the collating element has no characters associated with it the symbol will be treated as an invalid expression An equivalence class expression represents the set of collating elements belonging to an equivalence class Only primary equivalence classe
83. file that is not a directory Conceptually the attribute model is fully general Extended attributes can be any type of file doors links directories and so forth and can even have their own attributes fully recursive As a result the attributes associated with a file could be an arbitrarily deep directory hierarchy where each attribute could have an equally complex attribute tree associated with it Not all implementations are able to or want to support the full model Implementation are therefore permitted to reject operations that are not supported For example the implementation for the UFS file system allows only regular files as attributes for example no sub directories and rejects attempts to place attributes on attributes The following list details the operations that are rejected in the current implementation link Any attempt to create links between attribute and non attribute space is rejected to prevent security related or otherwise sensitive attributes from being exposed and therefore manipulable as regular files rename Any attempt to rename between attribute and non attribute space is rejected to prevent an already linked file from being renamed and thereby circumventing the link restriction above mkdir symlink mknod Any attempt to create a non regular file in attribute space is rejected to reduce the functionality and therefore exposure and risk of the initial implementation 96 manpages section
84. filter the output through co1 1 All external mm macros are defined below Note this mm macro package is an extended version written at Berkeley and is a superset of the standard mm macro packages as supplied by Bell Labs Some of the Bell Labs macros have been removed for instance it is assumed that the user has little interest in producing headers stating that the memo was generated at Whippany Labs Many nroff and troff requests are unsafe in conjunction with this package However the first four requests below may be used with impunity after initialization and the last two may be used even before initialization bp begin new page br break output line Spn insert n spacing lines cen center next n lines lsn line spacing 1 1 single 122 double space na no alignment of right margin Font and point size changes with f and Vs are also allowed for example fIword fR will italicize word Output of the tb1 1 eqn 1 and refer 1 preprocessors for equations tables and references is acceptable as input Here is a table of macros Break Macro Name Initial Value Reset Explanation SEG on yy one column format on a new page x2 1 yy two column format l line length AE y end abstract AL t il s t 1 i Li s 0 y Start automatic list type t 1 A a I i 1 arabic numbers A uppercase letters a lowercase letters I uppercase Roman numerals i lowercase Roman numerals indentation i separation s
85. fns policies 5 At the enterprise level FNS policies specify naming for organizations hosts users sites and services The enterprise level naming service provides contexts to allow other objects to be named relative to these objects The FNS organizational unit namespace provides a hierarchical namespace for naming subunits of an enterprise However NIS does not support a hierarchical organizational structure Therefore a NIS domain maps to a single organizational unit in the FNS namespace Users in an FNS organizational unit correspond to the users in the passwd byname map of the corresponding NIS domain FNS provides a context for each user in the passwd byname map Hosts in an FNS organizational unit correspond to the hosts in the hosts byname map of the corresponding NIS domain FNS provides a context for each host in the hosts byname map Federating NIS with the global naming systems DNS or X 500 makes NIS contexts accessible outside of an NIS domain To enable the federation the administrator must first add address information in either DNS or X 500 see fns_dns 5 and fns_x500 5 After this administrative step has been taken clients outside of the NIS domain can access contexts and perform operations Changes to the FNS information using the commands ncreate 1M fncreate_fs 1M fncreate_printer 1M fnbind 1 fndestroy 1M fncheck 1M and fnunbind 1 can be performed only by the privileged users on the NIS maste
86. following tables are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 1 ISO 646sv ISO 8859 1 ISO 646sv 304 133 344 173 305 135 345 175 311 100 351 140 326 134 366 174 334 136 374 176 Converted to Underscore 137 100 133 134 135 136 M40 173 174 175 176 Standards Environments and Macros 139 iconv 8859 1 5 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 306 307 310 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 321 322 323 324 325 327 330 331 332 333 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 346 347 350 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 367 370 371 372 373 375 376 377 FILES usr lib iconv so conversion modules usr lib iconv t conversion tables usr lib iconv iconv data list of conversions supported by conversion tables SEE ALSO iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 140 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 28 Apr 1997 NAME DESCRIPTION CONVERSIONS ISO 8859 2 to MS 1250 ISO 8859 2 to MS 852 iconv_8859 2 5 iconv_8859 2 code set conversion tables for ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 The following code set conversions are supported Code Set Conversions Supported Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Ou
87. for organizations hosts users sites and services The enterprise level naming service provides contexts to allow other objects to be named relative to these objects The organizational unit namespace provides a hierarchical namespace for naming subunits of an enterprise In etc files there is no concept of an organization Hence with respect to etc files as the naming service there is a single organizational unit context that represents the entire system Users in an FNS organizational unit correspond to the users in the etc passwd file FNS provides a context for each user in the etc passwd file Hosts in an FNS organizational unit correspond to the hosts in the etc hosts file FNS provides a context for each host in the etc hosts file Changes to the FNS information using the commands ncreate 1M fncreate fs 1M fnbind 1 fndestroy 1M and fnunbind 1 can be performed only by the privileged users on the system that exports the var fn directory Also based on the UNIX user IDs users are allowed to modify their own contexts bindings and attributes from any machine that mounts the var fn directory For example the command ncreate 1M creates FNS related files and directories in the system on which the command is executed Hence the invoker of the fncreate 1M command must have super user privileges in order to create the user host site and service contexts However a user could use the fnunbind 1 command to cre
88. for a command or function is laid out as follows TH title 1 8 The name of the command or function which serves as the title of the manual page This is followed by the number of the section in which it appears SH NAME The name or list of names by which the command is called followed by a dash and then a one line summary of the action performed All in Roman font this section contains no trof 1 commands or escapes and no macro requests It is used to generate the windex database which is used by the whatis 1 command SH SYNOPSIS Commands The syntax of the command and its arguments as typed on the command line When in boldface a word must be typed exactly as printed When in italics a word can be replaced with an argument that you supply References to bold or italicized items are not capitalized in other sections even when they begin a sentence Syntactic symbols appear in Roman face An argument when surrounded by brackets is optional l Arguments separated by a vertical bar are exclusive You can supply only one item from such a list Arguments followed by an ellipsis can be repeated When an ellipsis follows a bracketed set the expression within the brackets can be repeated Functions If required the data declaration or include directive is shown first followed by the function declaration Otherwise the function declaration is shown SH DESCRIPTION A narrative overview of the command
89. for domain names For NIS the fully qualified domain name is case insensitive and terminated by a dot character For NIS the fully qualified domain name is case sensitive and not terminated by a dot character For both NIS and NIS server address gt is optional If it is not supplied a host name lookup will be performed to get the machine s address For example if the machine wiz nisplus server with address 133 33 33 33 serves the NIS domain wiz com the reference would look like this wiz com wiz nisplus server 133 33 33 33 For another example if the machine woz nis server serves the NIS domain Woz COM the reference would look like this Woz COMwoz nis server Before the next naming system reference can be added to X 500 the X 500 schema must be altered to include the following object class and associated attributes defined in ASN 1 notation 88 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 29 Jan 1998 fns x500 5 xFNSupplement OBJECT CLASS SUBCLASS OF top KIND auxiliary MAY CONTAIN objectReferenceString nNSReference String ID id oc xFNSupplement id oc xFNSupplement OBJECT IDENTIFIER iso member body 2 ansi 840 sun 113536 25 objectReferenceString ATTRIBUTE WITH SYNTAX OCTET STRING EQUALITY MATCHING RULE octetStringMatch SINGLE VALUE TRUE ID id at objectReferenceString id at objectReferenceString OBJECT IDENTIFIER iso m
90. g par un copyright et licenci par des fournisseurs de Sun Certaines parties de ce produit pourront tre d riv es du syst me Berkeley BSD licenci s par l Universit de Californie UNIX est une marque d pos e aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays et licenci e exclusivement par X Open Company Ltd Sun Sun Microsystems le logo Sun docs sun com AnswerBook AnswerBook2 et Solaris sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques d pos es de Sun Microsystems Inc aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilis es sous licence et sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques d pos es de SPARC International Inc aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays Les produits portant les marques SPARC sont bas s sur une architecture d velopp e par Sun Microsystems Inc L interface d utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et Sun a t d velopp e par Sun Microsystems Inc pour ses utilisateurs et licenci s Sun reconnait les efforts de pionniers de Xerox pour la recherche et le d veloppement du concept des interfaces d utilisation visuelle ou graphique pour l industrie de l informatique Sun d tient une licence non exclusive de Xerox sur l interface d utilisation graphique Xerox cette licence couvrant galement les licenci s de Sun qui mettent en place l interface d utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et qui en outre se conforment aux licences crites de Sun CETTE PUBLICATION EST FOURNIE EN L ETAT ET AUCUNE GARANTIE EXPRESSE
91. gt j lt a acute gt lt a grave gt lt a gt j lt a grave gt lt A gt lt a gt lt A gt lt A acute gt lt a gt lt A acute gt lt A grave gt lt a gt lt A grave gt lt ch gt lt ch gt lt ch gt lt Ch gt lt ch gt lt Ch gt lt S gt lt S gt lt S gt lt eszet gt lt S gt lt S gt lt eszet gt lt eszet gt order_end This example is interpreted as follows 1 The UNDEFINED means that all characters not specified in this definition explicitly or via the ellipsis are ignored for collation purposes for regular expression purposes they are ordered first 2 All characters between space and lt a gt have the same primary equivalence class and individual secondary weights based on their ordinal encoded values 3 All characters based on the upper or lower case character a belong to the same primary equivalence class 4 The multi character collating element ch is represented by the collating symbol ch and belongs to the same primary equivalence class as the multi character collating element Ch The collating order entries must be terminated with an order end keyword The LC MONETARY category defines the rules and symbols that are used to format monetary numeric information This information is available through the localeconv 3C function The following items are defined in this category of the locale The item names are the keywords recognized by the 1ocaledef 1 utility when d
92. in page footer x is date on cover Standards Environments and Macros 259 ms 5 260 Break Macro Name Initial Value Reset Explanation NHxy yy numbered header x level x 0 resets x S sets to y NL 10p n set point size back to normal OF x n odd page footer x 3 part as for t1 OH x n odd page header x 3 part as for t1 P1 if TM n print header on first page PP yy paragraph with first line indented PT Yo n page title printed at head of page PXx y print index table of contents x no suppresses title QP yy quote paragraph indented and shorter R on n return to Roman font RE 5n yy retreat end level of relative indentation RP x n released paper format x no stops title on first page RS 5n yy right shift start level of relative indentation SH yy section header in boldface SM B n smaller decrease point size by 2 TA 8n 5n n set TAB characters to 8n 16n nrof or 5n 10n troff TCX B y print table of contents at end x no suppresses title TE y end of table processed by tbl TH y end multi page header of table TL y title in boldface and two points larger TM off n UC Berkeley thesis mode TS x yy begin table if x H table has multi page header ULx n underline x even in troff UXx n UNIX trademark message first time x appended XAxy y another index entry x page or no f
93. is Wiz COM and sales is a subdomain of that Then the names org sales Wiz COM and org sales both refer to the organizational unit corresponding to the same NIS domain sales Wiz COM User names correspond to names in the corresponding NIS passwd org dir table The file system context associated with a user is obtained from his entry in the NIS passwd org dir table Host names correspond to names in the corresponding NIS hosts org_dir table The file system context associated with a host corresponds to the files systems exported by the host EXAMPLE 1 The types of objects that may be named relative to an organizational unit name are user host service file and site Here are some examples of names name objects relative to organizational unit names org accounts payable finance site videoconference northwing names a conference room videoconference located in the north wing of the site associated with the organizational unit accounts payable finance org finance user mjones names a user mjones in the organizational unit finance org finance host inmail names a machine inmail belonging to the organizational unit finance org accounts payable finance fs pub blue and whites FY92 124 names a file pub blue and whites FY92 124 belonging to the organizational unit accounts payable finance org accounts payable finance service calendar names the calendar service of the organizational unit accounts payable finance This might manag
94. locale at a minimum the 26 upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ are mapped to the corresponding 26 lower case characters abcdefghijkimnopqrstuvwxwyz In a locale definition file the operand consists of character pairs separated by semicolons The characters in each character pair are separated by a comma and the pair enclosed by parentheses The first character in each pair is the upper case letter the second the corresponding lower case letter Only characters specified for the keywords lower and upper can be specified If the tolower keyword is omitted from the locale definition the mapping will be the reverse mapping of the one specified for toupper The LC COLLATE category provides a collation sequence definition for numerous utilities such as sort 1 uniq 1 and so forth regular expression matching see regex 5 and the st rco11 3C strxfrm 3C wcsco11 3C and wesxfrm 3C functions Standards Environments and Macros 219 locale 5 collating element keyword A collation sequence definition defines the relative order between collating elements characters and multi character collating elements in the locale This order is expressed in terms of collation values that is by assigning each element one or more collation values also known as collation weights At least the following capabilities are provided 1 Multi character collating elements Specification of multi character collatin
95. locale 5 p sign posn 4 1 25 1 25 1 25 4 The monetary formatting definitions for the POSIX locale follow the code listing depicting the localedef 1 input the table representing the same information with the addition of 1ocaleconv 3C and n1 langinfo 3C formats AII values are unspecified in the POSIX locale LC MONETARY This is the POSIX locale definition for the LC MONETARY category int_curr_symbol wn currency symbol n mon decimal point n mon thousands sep n mon grouping positive_sign n negative sign n int frac digits a p cs precedes cm p sep by space I n cs precedes eu n sep by space 1 p sign posn 1 n_sign_posn i END LC MONETARY The entry n a indicates that the value is not available in the POSIX locale LC NUMERIC The LC NUMERIC category defines the rules and symbols that will be used to format non monetary numeric information This information is available through the localeconv 3C function The following items are defined in this category of the locale The item names are the keywords recognized by the localedef utility when defining a locale They are also similar to the member names of the conv structure defined in lt locale h gt The localeconv function returns CHAR MAX for unspecified integer items and the empty string for unspecified or size zero string items Standards Environments and Macros 229 locale 5 In a locale definition file the oper
96. login account require pam_sample so 1 allow larry dtlogin account require pam_sample so 1 allow larry rlogin account require pam sample so 1 allow don allow larry su account require pam sample so 1 allow sam eric The debug and nowarn options are also supported The SAMPLE Password Management Component function pam sm chauthtok 3PAM always returns PAM SUCCESS The SAMPLE Session Management Component functions pam sm open session 3PAM pam sm close session 3PAM always return PAM SUCCESS See attributes 5 for description of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE MT Level MT Safe with exceptions pam 3PAM pam sm authenticate 3PAM pam sm chauthtok 3PAM pam sm close session 3PAM pam sm open session 3PAM pam sm setcred 3PAM libpam 3LIB pam conf 4 att ributes 5 The interfaces in 1libpam are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle 290 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 28 Oct 1996 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION Smart Card Authentication Module Smart Card Module Configuration SEE ALSO pam smartcard 5 pam smartcard PAM authentication module for Smart Card usr lib security pam smartcard so The Smart Card service module for PAM usr lib security pam smartcard so provides functionality to obtain a user s information such as user name and password for a smart c
97. of the shell that invokes su A user needs the appropriate entry in the roles list inuser attr 4 to be able to su to another user Standards Environments and Macros 287 pam roles 5 288 SEE ALSO NOTES In the example above the rlogin program invokes the pam roles so 1 module The module checks for PAM RUSER and determines whether the role being assumed PAM RUSER is in the roles list of the userattr entry for PAM RUSER If it is in the roles list the module returns PAM SUCCESS otherwise it returns PAM PERM DENIED keylogin 1 libpam 3LIB pam 3PAM pam acct mgmt 3PAM pam setcred 3PAM pam set item 3PAM syslog 3C pam conf 4 user attr 4 attributes 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 11 Dec 2001 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION SAMPLE Authentication Component pam sample 5 pam sample a sample PAM module usr
98. openat 2 function Once a file descriptor has been obtained for an attribute file by an openat call all normal file system semantics apply There is no attempt to place special semantics on read 2 write 2 ftruncate 3C or other functions when applied to attribute file descriptors relative to normal file descriptors The set of existing attributes can be browsed by calling openat with as the file name and the O XATTR flag set resulting in a file descriptor for the attribute directory The list of attributes is obtained by calls to getdents 2 on the returned file descriptor If the target file did not previously have any attributes associated with it an empty top level attribute directory is created for the file and subsequent getdents calls will return only and While the owner of the parent file owns the extended attribute directory it is not charged against its quota if the directory is empty Attribute files themselves however are charged against the user quota as any other regular file Additional system calls have been provided as convenience functions These include the chownat 2 statat 2 futimesat 2 renameat 2 unlinkat 2 These new functions along with openat provide a mechanism to access files relative to an arbitrary point in the file system rather than only the current working directory This mechanism is particularly useful in situations when a file descriptor is available with no pa
99. or X Open specification conforming interfaces should use the following compilation methods and set whichever feature test macros are appropriate to obtain the desired environment see standards 5 m Setthe compile time flag LARGEFILE64 SOURCE to 1 before including any headers m Use the getconf 1 command with one or more of the following arguments argument purpose LFS64 CFLAGS obtain compilation flags necessary to enable the transitional compilation environment man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 26 Jan 1998 EXAMPLES SEE ALSO Ifcompile64 5 argument purpose 1FS64_LDFLAGS obtain link editor options FS64 LIBS obtain link library names FS64_LINTFLAGS obtain lint options In the following examples the transitional compilation environment is accessed by invoking the get conf utility with one of the arguments listed in the table above The additional large file interfaces are accessed either by specifying D LARGEFILE64 SOURCE or by invoking the get conf utility with the arguments listed above The example that uses the form of command substitution specifying the command within parentheses preceded by a dollar sign can be executed only ina POSIX conforming shell such as the Korn Shell see ksh 1 In a shell that is not POSIX conforming such as the Bourne Shell see sh 1 and the C Shell see csh 1 the command must be enclosed within
100. or an X 500 name can appear after the Support for federating global naming services is planned for a future release of FNS Standards Environments and Macros 81 fns policies 5 Within an enterprise there are namespaces for organizational units sites hosts users files and services referred to by the names orgunit site host user s and service In addition these namespaces can be named using these names with an added underscore _ prefix for example host and host have the same binding The following table summarizes the FNS policies Context Subordinate Parent Type Context Context org unit site enterprise root user host file system service site user enterprise root host org unit file system service user service enterprise root file system org unit host service enterprise root file system org unit service not specified enterprise root org unit site user host file system none enterprise root org unit site user host 82 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 4 Nov 1994 EXAMPLES fns policies 5 In Solaris an organizational unit name corresponds to an NIS domain name and is identified using either the fully qualified form of its NIS domain name or its NIS domain name relative to the NIS root Fully qualified NIS domain names have a terminal dot For example assume that the NIS root domain
101. or function s external behavior This includes how it interacts with files or data and how it handles the standard input standard output and standard error Internals and implementation details are normally omitted This section attempts to provide a succinct overview in answer to the question what does it do 244 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 11 Jun 1992 FILES SEE ALSO SH OPTIONS SH FILES SSH SEE ALSO SH DIAGNOSTICS SH BUGS mansun 5 Literal text from the synopsis appears in constant width as do literal filenames and references to items that appear elsewhere in the reference manuals Arguments are italicized If a command interprets either subcommands or an input grammar its command interface or input grammar is normally described in a USAGE section which follows the OPTIONS section The DESCRIPTION section only describes the behavior of the command itself not that of subcommands The list of options along with a description of how each affects the command s operation A list of files associated with the command or function A comma separated list of related manual pages followed by references to other published materials A list of diagnostic messages and an explanation of each A description of limitations known defects and possible problems associated with the command or function usr share lib tmac ansun usr share man windex man 1 nr
102. pattern that will match the concatenation of the single characters or collating elements matched by each of the concatenated patterns m The concatenation of one or more patterns matching a single character with one or more asterisks is a valid pattern In such patterns each asterisk will match a string of zero or more characters matching the greatest possible number of characters that still allows the remainder of the pattern to match the string man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 28 Mar 1995 Patterns Used for Filename Expansion fnmatch 5 Since each asterisk matches zero or more occurrences the patterns a b and a b have identical functionality Examples a bc matches the strings ab and ac a d matches the strings ad abd and abcd but not the string abc a d matches the strings ad abcd abcdef aaaad and adddd a d matches the strings ad abcd efabcd aaaad and adddd The rules described so far in Patterns Matching Multiple Characters and Patterns Matching a Single Character are qualified by the following rules that apply when pattern matching notation is used for filename expansion 1 The slash character in a pathname must be explicitly matched by using one or more slashes in the pattern it cannot be matched by the asterisk or question mark special characters or by a bracket expression Slashes in the pattern are identified before bracket expressions thus a slash cannot be in
103. return to Roman font RBxy n use Roman on x and embolden y RIXy n use Roman on x and underline y RP x yy released paper format x no stops title on first RS 5n yy right shift start level of relative indentation Smn n set character point size amp vertical space character point size m vertical space n SAx x 1 n justification x 0 1 SKx y skip x pages SM n smaller decrease point size by 2 SP x y leave x blank lines TBx n n i y table title table x number n DG y print table of contents put at end of input file TE i y end of table processed by tbl TH y end multi page header of table TL n title in boldface and two points larger TM n UC Berkeley thesis mode TPi y y i p i Begin indented paragraph with the tag given on the next text line Set prevailing indent to i PSU yy begin table if x H table has multi page header JTY y display centered title CONTENTS 254 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Jan 1997 REGISTERS mm 5 Break Macro Name Initial Value Reset Explanation vLi m s m 0 s 0 y start variable item list indentation i mark indentation m separation s Formatting distances can be controlled in mm by means of built in number registers For example this sets the line length to 6 5 inches nr LL 6 51 Here is a table of number registers and their default values
104. should have a in their name as in 4415 n1 Here are some of the known terminal names For a complete list enter the command ls C usr share lib terminfo 2621 hp2621 2631 2631 c 2631 e 2640 hp2640 2645 hp2645 3270 33 tty33 35 tty35 37 tty37 4000a 4014 tek4014 40 tty40 43 tty43 4410 5410 4410 nfk 5410 nfk 4410 nsl 5410 nsl 4410 w 5410 w 4410v1 5410v1 4410v1 w 5410v1 w 4415 5420 4415 n1 5420 nl Hewlett Packard 2621 series Hewlett Packard 2631 line printer Hewlett Packard 2631 line printer compressed mode Hewlett Packard 2631 line printer expanded mode Hewlett Packard 2640 series Hewlett Packard 2645 series IBM Model 3270 AT amp T Teletype Model 33 KSR AT amp T Teletype Model 35 KSR AT amp T Teletype Model 37 KSR Trendata 4000a TEKTRONIX 4014 AT amp T Teletype Dataspeed 40 2 AT amp T Teletype Model 43 KSR AT amp T 4410 5410 in 80 column mode version 2 AT amp T 4410 5410 without function keys version 1 AT amp T 4410 5410 without pln defined AT amp T 4410 5410 in 132 column mode AT amp T 4410 5410 in 80 column mode version 1 AT amp T 4410 5410 in 132 column mode version 1 AT amp T 4415 5420 in 80 column mode AT amp T 4415 5420 without changing labels Standards Environments and Macros 335 term 5 4415 rv 5420 rv 4415 rv nl 5420 rv nl 4415 w 5420 w 4415 w nl 5420 w nl 4415 w rv 5420 w rv 4418 5418 4418 w 5418 w 4420 4424 4424 2 44
105. that begin with host names explicitly via host or implicitly via thishost and name objects relative to hosts when resolved in the Initial Context host mailhop service mailbox names the mailbox service associated with the machine mailhop host mailhop fs pub saf archives 91 names the directory pub saf archives 91 found under the root directory of the machine mailhop thishost service printer names the printer service of H SEE ALSO nis 1 geteuid 2 fn ctx handle from initial 3XFEN xfn 3XFEN ns 5 fns policies 5 76 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Nov 1994 NAME DESCRIPTION FNS Policies and NIS fns_nis 5 fns_nis overview of FNS over NIS implementation Federated Naming Service FNS provides a method for federating multiple naming services under a single simple interface for the basic naming operations One of the naming services supported by FNS is NIS the enterprise wide information service in Solaris see nis 1 FNS provides the XFN interface for performing naming and attribute operations on FNS enterprise objects organization site user host and service objects using NIS FNS stores bindings for these objects in NIS and uses them in conjunction with existing NIS objects FNS defines policies for naming objects in the federated namespace see fns policies 5 At the enterprise level FNS policies specify naming for organizations hosts u
106. that for every process 1 There is a user associated with the process when fn ctx handle from initial is invoked This association is based on the effective uid of the process In the following discussion this user is denoted by U The association of user to process may change during the life of a process but does not affect the context handle originally returned by fn ctx handle from initial 2 The process is running on a host when n ctx handle from initial is invoked In the following discussion this host is denoted by H The following atomic names can appear in the Initial Context thishost thisorgunit thisens myself myorgunit myens orgunit site user host Except for these names with an added underscore prefix are also in the Initial Context and have the same binding as their counterpart for example thishost and thishost have the same binding In addition org has the same binding as orgunit and thisuser has the same binding as myself The bindings for these names are summarized in the following table Some of these names may not necessarily appear in all Initial Contexts For example a process owned by the super user of a machine does not have any of the user related bindings Or for another example an installation that has not set up a site namespace will not have the site related bindings global context for resolving DNS or X 500 names Synonym thishost H s host context Synonym th
107. to many mappings see 1ocale 5 will not be performed For example assuming that the character eszet is placed in the collation sequence after r and s but before t and that it maps to the sequence ss for collation purposes then the expression r s matches only r and s but the expression s t matches s beta or t The interpretation of range expressions where the ending range point is also the starting range point of a subsequent range expression for instance a m o is undefined The hyphen character will be treated as itself if it occurs first after an initial if any or last in the list or as an ending range point in a range expression As examples the expressions ac and ac are equivalent and match any of the characters a c or ac and ac are equivalent and match any characters except a c or the expression matches any of the characters between 96 and inclusive the expression matches any of the characters between and inclusive and the expression a is invalid because the letter a follows the symbol in the POSIX locale To use a hyphen as the starting range point it must either come first in the bracket expression or be specified as a collating symbol for example 0 which matches either a right bracket or any character or collating element that collates between hyphen and 0 inclusive If a bracket expression must specify both and the must be pla
108. to the end of the buffer and continues up to and including the current line 7 An address followed by a plus sign or a minus sign followed by a decimal number specifies that address plus respectively minus the indicated number of lines A shorthand for 5 is 5 8 If an address begins with or the addition or subtraction is taken with respect to the current line for example 5 is understood to mean 5 9 If an address ends with or then 1 is added to or subtracted from the address respectively As a consequence of this rule and of Rule 8 immediately above the address refers to the line preceding the current line To maintain compatibility with earlier versions of the editor the character in addresses is entirely equivalent to Moreover trailing and characters have a cumulative effect so refers to the current line less 2 10 For convenience a comma stands for the address pair 1 while a semicolon stands for the pair Characters that have special meaning except when they appear within square brackets 1 or are preceded by are V Other special characters such as have special meaning in more restricted contexts The character at the beginning of an expression permits a successful match only immediately after a newline and the character at the end of an expression requires a trailing newline Two characters have special meaning only when used within squ
109. using nlookup 1 to see if the information has been added properly For example the following command looks up the next naming system reference of the Wiz organization example fnlookup v c us o wiz Note the mandatory trailing slash After this administrative step has been taken clients outside of the NIS hierarchy or NIS domain can access and perform operations on the contexts in the NIS hierarchy or NIS domain Foreign NIS clients access the hierarchy as unauthenticated NIS clients Continuing the example above and assuming that NIS is federated underneath the Wiz organization the root of the NIS enterprise may be listed using the command example fnlist c us o wiz Note the mandatory trailing slash The next naming system reference may be removed using the command example fnunbind c us o wiz Note the mandatory trailing slash fnattr 1 fnbind 1 fnlist 1 fnlookup 1 nis 1 ypserv 1M x n 3XEN fns 5 fns_dns 5 fns nis 5 fns nis 5 fns references 5 Solstice X 500 In a 64 bit XFN application retrieval and modification of information stored in the X 500 directory service is not supported man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 29 Jan 1998 NAME DESCRIPTION Format Escape Sequences formats 5 formats file format notation Utility descriptions use a syntax to describe the data organization within files stdin stdout stderr input f
110. usr sadm bin Binaries for the Form and Menu Language Interpreter FMLI scripts See m1i 1 usr sadm install Executables and scripts for package management usr sbin Platform amp hyphen dependent executables for system administration expected to be run only by system administrators An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename sbin usr sbin install d Custom Jumpstart scripts and executables usr sbin static Statically linked version of selected programs from usr bin and usr sbin These are used to recover from broken dynamic linking and before all pieces necessary for dynamic linking are present usr sbin sparc7 and sparc9 32 bit and 64 bit versions of commands usr sfw GNU and open source executables libraries and documentation usr sbin subsystem Platform amp hyphen dependent executables for system administration expected to be run only by system administrators and associated with subsystem An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename sbin usr subsystem sbin Platform amp hyphen dependent executables for system administration expected to be run only by system administrators and associated with subsystem An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location fo
111. vi 1 exec 2 addseverity 3C catopen 3C ctime 3C ctype 3C fmtmsg 3C getdate 3C getnetpath 3NSL gettext 3C gettxt 3C localeconv 3C mblen 3C mktime 3C print 3C setlocale 3C st rco11 3C strftime 3C strtod 3C strxfrm 3C TIMEZONE 4 netcon ig 4 passwd 4 profile 4 Standards Environments and Macros 41 eqnchar 5 NAME eqnchar special character definitions for eqn SYNOPSIS eqn usr share lib pub eqnchar filename troff options neqn usr share lib pub eqnchar filename troff options DESCRIPTION The eqnchar command contains nrof 1 and trof 1 character definitions for constructing characters that are not available on the Graphic Systems typesetter These definitions are primarily intended for use with eqn 1 and neqn 1 It contains definitions for the following characters ciplus e I square citimes Q langle circle O wig rangle P blot o wig hbar it bullet gt wig gt ppd L prop ox wig lt lt gt o empty wig lt gt lt member star nomem g bigstar gt cup U dot ang tes cap N orsign Y rang L incl L andsign X 3dot subset c del A thf 2 supset 2 oppA Y quarter Isubset c oppE dl 3quarter A Isupset 5 angstrom A degree FILES usr share lib pub eqnchar ATTRIBUTES See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Availability SUNWdoc SEE
112. xfn pass Requests Kerberos V5 authentication with a mapped password that has been stored under XEN If Kerberos V5 authentication fails or if no password has been entered it quits and does not prompt the user for a password This option should only be used if the authentication service is designated as optional in the pam con configuration file try xfn Pass Requests Kerberos V5 authentication with a mapped password that has been stored under XFN If Kerberos V5 authentication fails or if no password has been stored the user is prompted for a password with the prompt Kerberos Password The Kerberos account management component provides a function to perform account management pam sm acct mgmt This function checks to see if the pam krb5 authentication module has noted that the user s password has not expired The following options may be passed in to the Kerberos V5 service module debug Provides syslog 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages The Kerberos V5 session management component provides functions to initiate pam sm open session and terminate pam sm close session Kerberos V5 sessions For Kerberos V5 pam sm open session is a null function pam close session destroys a principal s credential cache as well as the kernel Kerberos credentials if the session being closed is the last open session on this server for the calling principal The Kerberos V5 password management c
113. 11 236 217 207 214 40 240 207 215 212 241 210 216 40 242 216 217 200 243 205 220 202 244 215 221 214 246 220 225 201 247 221 230 206 usr lib iconv so usr lib iconv t usr lib iconv iconv data iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 conversion modules conversion tables list of conversions supported by conversion tables 178 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 NAME DESCRIPTION CONVERSIONS PC Cyrillic to ISO 8859 5 iconv pc cyr 5 iconv pc cyr code set conversion tables for Alternative PC Cyrillic The following code set conversions are supported The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal Code Set Conversions Supported Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Output PC Cyrillic alt ISO 8859 5 iso5 ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic PC Cyrillic alt KOI8 R koi8 KOI8 R PC Cyrillic alt MS 1251 win5 Windows Cyrillic PC Cyrillic alt Mac Cyrillic mac Macintosh Cyrillic For the conversion of PC Cyrillic to ISO 8859 5 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed PC Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 PC Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 24 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 214 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272 273 274 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 240 241 242
114. 11 VT 12 NP 13 CR 14 SO 15 SI 16 DLE 17 DC1 18 DC2 19 DC3 20 DCA 21 NAK 22 SYN 23 ETB 24 CAN 25 EM 26 SUB 27 ESC 28 FS 29 GS 30 RS 31 US 32 SP 33 34 35 d 36 37 38 amp 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 0 49 1 50 2 5I 3 52 4 53 5 54 6 55 7 56 8 57 9 58 59 60 61 62 gt 63 64 65 A 66 B 67 C 68 D 69 E 70 F 71 G 72 H 73 I 74 J 75 K 76 G 77 M 78 N 79 0 16 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 19 Apr 2002 FILES 80 P 81 Q 82 88 X 89 Y 90 96 97 a 98 104 h 105i 106 112p 113q 114 120x 121 y 122 usr pub ascii N KOU ON DW 83 91 99 107 115 123 mwarcu 84 92 100 108 116 124 trara 85 93 101 109 les lg 125 U e m u 86 94 102 110 118 126 gt lt Br 87 95 103 LIL 119 127 otl DEL ascii 5 On line chart of octal and hexadecimal values for the ASCII character set Standards Environments and Macros 17 attributes 5 NAME DESCRIPTION Architecture Availability Code Set Independence CSI attributes architecture availability CSI stability MT Level attributes of interfaces The ATTRIBUTES section of a manual page contains a table see below defining attribute types and their corresponding values ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Architecture SPARC Availability SUNWcsu CSI Enabled Interface Stability Unstable MT Level Safe
115. 230 312 220 215 216 40 313 320 40 217 240 321 245 220 233 40 322 40 234 236 323 243 235 236 40 324 325 40 237 246 326 231 240 377 327 333 40 241 242 40 334 232 243 234 335 336 40 244 40 337 341 245 217 340 341 40 246 252 40 342 203 253 256 343 40 254 252 344 204 255 256 40 345 40 257 241 346 215 260 370 347 207 261 361 350 40 262 40 351 202 263 222 352 221 264 40 353 211 265 346 354 355 40 266 40 356 214 267 372 357 360 40 270 40 361 244 271 206 362 40 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 MS 1250 to DHN iconv_1250 5 Conversions Performed MS 1250 Mazovia MS 1250 Mazovia 272 40 363 242 273 257 364 223 274 276 40 365 40 277 247 366 224 300 303 40 367 366 304 216 370 373 40 305 40 374 201 306 225 375 376 40 307 200 For the conversion of MS 1250 to DHN all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed MS 1250 DHN MS 1250 DHN 200 213 40 306 201 214 206 307 311 40 215 216 40 312 202 217 207 313 320 40 220 233 40 321 204 234 217 322 40 235 236 40 323 205 237 220 324 325 40 240 377 326 231 241 242 40 327 333 40 243 203 334 232 244 40 335 336 40 245 200 337 341 246 252 40 340 40 Standards Environments and Macros 111 iconv_1250 5 FILES SEE ALSO Conversions Performed MS 1250 DHN MS 1250 DHN 253 256 341 240 254 252 342 345 40 255 256 40
116. 25 365 40 307 200 366 224 310 311 40 367 366 312 220 370 373 40 313 320 40 374 201 144 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 ISO 8859 2 to DHN iconv 8859 2 5 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 2 Mazovia ISO 8859 2 Mazovia 321 322 245 40 375 376 40 For the conversion of ISO 8859 2 to DHN all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 2 DHN ISO 8859 2 DHN 24 4 322 40 177 237 40 323 205 240 377 324 325 40 241 200 326 231 242 40 327 333 40 243 203 334 232 244 245 40 335 336 40 246 206 337 341 247 253 40 340 40 254 207 341 240 255 256 40 342 345 40 257 210 346 212 260 370 347 351 40 261 211 352 213 262 40 353 354 40 263 214 355 241 264 265 40 356 360 40 266 217 361 215 267 273 40 362 40 274 220 363 216 275 276 40 364 223 Standards Environments and Macros 145 iconv_8859 2 5 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 2 DHN ISO 8859 2 DHN 277 221 365 40 300 305 40 366 224 306 201 367 366 307 311 40 370 371 40 312 202 372 243 313 320 40 373 376 40 321 204 FILES usr lib iconv so conversion modules usr lib iconv t conversion tables usr lib iconv iconv data list of conversions supported by conversion tables SEE ALSO iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 146 manpages section 5 Standards Envi
117. 25 5425 4425 fk 5425 fk 4425 n1 5425 nl 4425 w 5425 w 4425 w fk 5425 w fk 4425 nl w 5425 nl w 4426 450 450 12 500 att500 510 510a 513bct att513 5320 5420_2 5420_2 w 5620 dmd 5620 24 dmd 24 5620 34 dmd 34 AT amp T 4415 5420 80 columns in reverse video AT amp T 4415 5420 reverse video without changing labels AT amp T 4415 5420 in 132 column mode AT amp T 4415 5420 in 132 column mode without changing labels AT amp T 4415 5420 132 columns in reverse video AT amp T 5418 in 80 column mode AT amp T 5418 in 132 column mode AT amp T Teletype Model 4420 AT amp T Teletype Model 4424 AT amp T Teletype Model 4424 in display function group ii AT amp T 4425 5425 AT amp T 4425 5425 without function keys AT amp T 4425 5425 without changing labels in 80 column mode AT amp T 4425 5425 in 132 column mode AT amp T 4425 5425 without function keys in 132 column mode AT amp T 4425 5425 without changing labels in 132 column mode AT amp T Teletype Model 44265 DASI 450 same as Diablo 1620 DASI 450 in 12 pitch mode AT amp T IS 500 terminal AT amp T 510 510a in 80 column mode AT amp T 513 bct terminal AT amp T 5320 hardcopy terminal AT amp T 5420 model 2 in 80 column mode AT amp T 5420 model 2 in 132 column mode AT amp T 5620 terminal 88 columns AT amp T Teletype Model DMD 5620 in a 24x80 layer AT amp T Teletype Model DMD 5620 in a 34x80 layer 336 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and M
118. 251 Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 PC Cyrillic MS 1251 Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R MS 1251 Supported Symbol 8859 8859 8859 8859 8859 8859 8859 8859 646 646de 646da 646en 646es 646fr 646it 646sv iso2 isol6 ibm850 ibm870 win2 dos2 maz isol6 isol6 dhn So2 in2 Target Output US ASCII German Danish English ASCII Spanish French Italian Swedish 7 bit ASCII German Danish English ASCII Spanish French Italian Swedis ISO La ISO La h tin 2 tin 10 IBM 850 code page IBM 870 code page Windows Latin 2 MS DOS Latin 2 Mazovia ISO Latin 10 ISO Latin 10 Dom Handlowy Nauki ISO Latin 2 Windows Latin 2 Mazovia Dom Handlowy Nauki ISO Latin 2 Windows Latin 2 MS DOS Latin 2 Dom Handlowy Nauki ISO Latin 2 Windows Latin 2 MS DOS Latin 2 Mazovia KOI8 R Alternative PC Cyrillic Windows Cyrillic Macintosh Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic Alternative PC Cyrillic Windows Cyrillic Macintosh Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic KOI8 R Windows Cyrillic man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 5 Dec 2001 CONVERSIONS PC Cyrillic MS 1251 MS 1251 MS 1251 MS 1251 Mac Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic alt wind wind wind wind mac mac mac mac Mac Cyrillic mac ISO 8859 5 iso5 KOI8 R koi8 PC Cyrillic alt Mac Cyrillic mac ISO 8859 5 iso5 KOI8 R koi8 PC Cyrillic alt MS 1251 wind iconv 5 Macintos
119. 273 274 275 276 277 271 317 264 273 300 275 277 40 316 40 331 333 334 253 256 335 270 301 247 272 267 274 276 40 315 40 330 332 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 363 346 342 374 373 347 370 375 371 367 372 236 200 201 226 204 205 224 203 225 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 Standards Environments and Macros 165 iconv_koi8 r 5 Conversions Performed KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic 300 376 361 237 301 340 362 220 302 341 363 221 303 366 364 222 304 344 365 223 305 345 366 206 306 364 367 202 307 343 370 234 310 365 371 233 311 350 372 207 312 351 373 230 313 352 374 235 314 353 375 231 315 354 376 227 316 355 FILES usr lib iconv so usr lib iconv t usr lib iconv iconv data SEE ALSO iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 conversion modules conversion tables list of conversions supported by conversion tables 166 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 NAME DESCRIPTION CONVERSIONS Mac Cyrillic to ISO 8859 5 iconv mac cyr 5 iconv mac cyr code set conversion tables for Macintosh Cyrillic The following code set conversions are supported Code Set Conversions Supported Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Outp
120. 277 274 232 234 236 235 210 242 237 271 200 201 250 252 275 262 257 243 212 214 216 215 210 241 323 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 361 362 363 346 342 374 373 347 370 375 371 367 372 336 300 301 326 304 305 324 303 325 310 311 312 313 314 315 Standards Environments and Macros 163 iconv_koi8 r 5 Conversions Performed KOI8 R MS 1251 KOI8 R MS 1251 277 217 357 316 300 376 360 317 301 340 361 337 302 341 362 320 303 366 363 321 304 344 364 322 305 345 365 323 306 364 366 306 307 343 367 302 310 365 370 334 311 350 371 333 312 351 372 307 313 352 373 330 314 353 374 335 315 354 375 331 316 355 376 327 376 227 KOIS8 R to Mac For the conversion of KOI8 R to Mac Cyrillic all characters not in the following table Cyrillic are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic 24 4 317 356 200 237 40 320 357 240 312 321 337 241 254 322 360 242 257 323 361 243 336 324 362 164 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 iconv_koi8 r 5 Conversions Performed KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic 244 245 246 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272
121. 305 175 345 For the conversion of ISO 646en to ISO 8859 1 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 646en ISO 8859 1 043 243 For the conversion of ISO 646es to ISO 8859 1 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 646es ISO 8859 1 ISO 646es ISO 8859 1 100 247 173 260 133 241 174 361 134 321 175 347 135 277 For the conversion of ISO 646fr to ISO 8859 1 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 646fr ISO 8859 1 ISO 646fr ISO 8859 1 043 243 173 351 100 340 174 371 133 260 175 350 134 347 176 250 135 247 Standards Environments and Macros 127 iconv_646 5 ISO 646it ITALIAN to ISO 8859 1 ISO 646sv SWEDISH to ISO 8859 1 FILES SEE ALSO For the conversion of ISO 646it to ISO 8859 1 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 646it ISO 8859 1 ISO 646it ISO 8859 1 043 243 140 371 100 247 173 340 133 260 174 362 134 347 175 350 135 351 176 354 For the conversion of ISO 646sv to ISO 8859 1 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 646sv ISO 8859 1 ISO 646sv ISO 8859 1 100 311 140 351 133 304 173 344 134 326 174 366 135 305 1
122. 334 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 Mac Cyrillic to KOIS R iconv mac cyr 5 Conversions Performed Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 264 366 366 346 265 266 40 367 347 267 250 370 350 270 244 371 351 271 364 372 352 272 247 373 353 273 367 374 354 274 251 375 355 275 371 376 356 375 370 For the conversion of Mac Cyrillic to KOI8 R all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed Mac Cyrillic KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic KOI8 R 24 4 276 272 200 341 277 252 201 342 300 250 202 367 301 265 203 347 302 311 40 204 344 312 240 205 345 313 261 206 366 314 241 207 372 315 274 210 351 316 254 211 352 317 245 212 353 320 327 40 213 354 330 276 Standards Environments and Macros 169 iconv mac cyr 5 170 Conversions Performed Mac Cyrillic KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic KOI8 R 214 215 216 217 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 240 246 247 250 252 253 254 255 256 257 355 356 357 360 362 363 364 365 346 350 343 376 373 375 377 371 370 374 340 361 40 266 40 261 241 40 262 242 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 256
123. 370 174 Converted to Underscore 137 133 134 135 173 174 175 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 304 307 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 28 Apr 1997 ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646en ENGLISH ASCII ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646fr FRENCH 310 320 340 350 360 371 31lT 312 321 322 331 332 341 342 351 352 361 362 372 373 313 323 333 343 353 363 374 314 324 334 344 354 364 315 325 335 355 365 316 326 336 356 366 376 317 327 337 347 357 367 377 iconv_8859 1 5 For the conversion of ISO 8859 1 to ISO 646en all characters not in the following tables are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 1 ISO 646en 243 043 Converted to Underscore 201 211 221 231 241 251 261 271 301 311 321 331 341 35 361 371 202 212 222 232 242 252 262 272 302 312 322 332 342 352 362 372 203 213 223 233 253 263 273 303 313 323 333 343 353 363 373 204 214 224 234 244 254 264 274 304 314 324 334 344 354 364 374 205 2 15 225 235 245 255 265 275 305 315 325 335 345 355 365 375 206 216 226 236 246 256 266 276
124. 3C function returns a file descriptor for the named attribute attrpath of the file indicated by path The oflag and mode arguments are identical to the open 2 arguments and are applied to the open operation on the attribute file for example using the O_CREAT flag creates a new attribute Once opened all normal file system operations can be used on the attribute file descriptor The attropen function is a convenience function and is equivalent to the following sequence of operations fd open path O RDONLY attrfd openat fd attrpath oflag O XATTR mode close fd The set of existing attributes can be browsed by calling attropen with as the attribute name The list of attributes is obtained by calling getdents 2 or dopendir 3C followed by readdir 3C see below on the returned file descriptor Convert an open file descriptor for a directory into a directory descriptor DIR fdopendir const int fd The dopendir 3C function promotes a file descriptor for a directory to a directory pointer suitable for use with the readdir 3C function The originating file descriptor should not be used again following the call to fdopendir The directory pointer should be closed with a call to closedir 3C If the provided file descriptor does not reference a directory the function returns ENOTDIR This function is useful in circumstances where the only available handle on a directory is a file descriptor See attropen 3C and o
125. 4 207 40 315 275 210 255 316 276 211 40 317 277 212 251 320 300 213 40 321 301 214 252 322 302 215 254 323 303 216 253 324 304 217 257 325 305 Standards Environments and Macros 113 iconv_1251 5 114 Conversions Performed MS 1251 ISO 8859 5 MS 1251 ISO 8859 5 220 221 227 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 241 242 243 244 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 260 261 262 263 264 267 270 271 272 362 40 255 40 371 40 372 374 373 377 256 376 250 40 241 40 244 40 55 40 247 40 246 366 40 361 360 364 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 306 307 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 340 341 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 MS 1251 to KOI8 R iconv_1251 5 Conversions Performed MS 1251 ISO 8859 5 MS 1251 ISO 8859 5 273 274 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 40 370 245 365 367 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 362 363 364 365 366 367 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 For the conversion of MS 1251 to KOI8 R all characters not in the following table are
126. 4 40 304 224 375 260 305 225 376 40 306 226 365 40 ISO 8859 5 to MS For the conversion of ISO 8859 5 to MS 1251 all characters not in the following table 1251 are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 5 MS 1251 ISO 8859 5 MS 1251 24 4 317 337 200 237 40 320 340 241 250 321 341 242 200 322 342 243 201 323 343 244 252 324 344 245 275 325 345 246 262 326 346 247 257 327 347 250 243 330 350 251 212 331 351 252 214 332 352 150 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 iconv 8859 5 5 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 5 MS 1251 ISO 8859 5 MS 1251 253 216 333 353 254 215 334 354 255 210 335 355 256 241 336 356 257 217 337 357 260 300 340 360 261 301 341 361 262 302 342 362 263 303 343 363 264 304 344 364 265 305 345 365 266 306 346 366 267 307 347 367 270 310 350 370 271 311 351 371 272 312 352 372 273 313 353 373 274 314 354 374 275 315 355 375 276 316 356 376 277 317 357 377 300 320 360 271 301 321 361 270 302 322 362 220 303 323 363 203 304 324 364 272 305 325 365 276 306 326 366 263 Standards Environments and Macros 151 iconv_8859 5 5 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 5 MS 1251 ISO 8859 5 MS 1251 307 327 367 277 310 330 370 274 311 331 371 232 312 332 372 234 313 333 373 236 314 334 374 235 315 335 375 210 316 336 376 242 376 331 ISO 8859 5 to
127. 40 315 235 376 331 316 236 FILES usr lib iconv so usr lib iconv t usr lib iconv iconv data SEE ALSO iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 conversion modules conversion tables list of conversions supported by conversion tables 154 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 NAME DESCRIPTION CONVERSIONS DHN to ISO 8859 2 The following code set conversions are supported iconv_dhn 5 iconv_dhn code set conversion tables for DHN Dom Handlowy Nauki Code Set Conversions Supported The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Output DHN dhn ISO 8859 2 iso2 ISO Latin 2 DHN dhn MS 1250 win2 Windows Latin 2 DHN dhn MS 852 dos2 MS DOS Latin 2 DHN dhn Mazovia maz Mazovia For the conversion of DHN to ISO 8859 2 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed DHN ISO 8859 2 DHN ISO 8859 2 24 177 40 222 40 200 241 223 364 201 306 224 366 202 312 225 230 40 203 243 231 326 204 321 232 334 205 323 233 237 40 206 246 240 341 207 254 241 355 210 257 242 363 211 261 243 372 212 346 244 340 40 213 352 341 337 214 263 342 365 40 Standards Environments and Macros 155 iconv_dhn 5 DHN to MS 1250 156 man pages section 5 Standards Environme
128. 43 244 254 255 256 262 263 264 274 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 40 361 40 260 40 360 40 260 40 356 240 241 346 244 245 344 243 333 334 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 350 355 351 347 352 236 200 201 226 204 205 224 203 225 210 211 212 213 Standards Environments and Macros 161 iconv_koi8 r 5 162 Conversions Performed KOI8 R PC Cyrillic KOI8 R PC Cyrillic 310 345 355 214 311 250 356 215 312 251 357 216 313 252 360 217 314 253 361 237 315 254 362 220 316 255 363 221 317 256 364 222 320 257 365 223 321 357 366 206 322 340 367 202 323 341 370 234 324 342 371 233 325 343 372 207 326 246 373 230 327 242 374 235 330 354 375 231 331 353 376 227 332 247 KOI8 R to MS For the conversion of KOI8 R to MS 1251 all characters not in the following table are 1251 mapped unchanged Conversions Performed KOI8 R MS 1251 KOI8 R MS 1251 24 4 317 356 200 237 40 320 357 241 220 321 377 242 203 322 360 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 iconv_koi8 r 5 Conversions Performed KOI8 R MS 1251 KOI8 R MS 1251 243 244 245 246 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 270 272 276 263
129. 5 Standards Environments and Macros 237 man 5 NAME man macros to format Reference Manual pages SYNOPSIS nroff man filename troff man filename DESCRIPTION These macros are used to lay out the reference pages in this manual Note if filename contains format input for a preprocessor the commands shown above must be piped through the appropriate preprocessor This is handled automatically by the man 1 command See the Conventions section Any text argument t may be zero to six words Quotes may be used to include SPACE characters in a word If text is empty the special treatment is applied to the next input line with text to be printed In this way I may be used to italicize a whole line or SB may be used to make small bold letters A prevailing indent distance is remembered between successive indented paragraphs and is reset to default value upon reaching a non indented paragraph Default units for indents i are ens Type font and size are reset to default values before each paragraph and after processing font and size setting macros These strings are predefined by man R amp Reg in nroff NS Change to default type size Requests n t l next text line p i prevailing indent Request Cause If no Explanation Break Argument B t no t n t L Text is in bold font BI f no t n t Join words alternating bold and italic BR f no t n t l Join words alternating bol
130. 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Aug 2001 Shell level API fsattr 5 The entire available name space has been allocated to general use to bring the implementation in line with the NFSv4 draft standard NFSv4 That standard defines named attributes equivalent to Solaris Extended Attributes with no naming restrictions All Sun applications making use of opaque extended attributes will use the prefix SUNW The command interface for extended attributes is the set of applications provided by Solaris for the manipulation of attributes from the command line This interface consists of a set of existing utilities that have been extended to be attribute aware plus the runat utility designed to expose the extended attribute space so that extended attributes can be manipulated as regular files The option enable utilities to manipulate extended attributes As a rule this option enables the utility to enter into attribute space when the utility is performing a recursive traversal of file system space This is a fully recursive concept If the underlying file system supports recursive attributes and directory structures the e option opens these spaces to the file tree walking algorithms The following utilities accommodate extended attributes see the individual manual pages for details cp By default cp ignores attributes and copies only file data This is intended to maintain the semantics implied by cp
131. 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 296 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 9 Aug 2002 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION ERRORS ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES pam unix auth 5 pam unix auth PAM authentication module for UNIX pam unix auth so 1 The pam unix auth module implements pam sm authenticate which provides functionality to the PAM authentication stack It provides functions to verify that the password contained in the PAM item PAM AUTHTOK is the correct password for the user specified in the item PAM USER If PAM REPOSITORY is specified then user s passwd is fetched from that repository Otherwise the default nsswitch conf 4 repository is searched for that user The following options can be passed to the module server policy Ifthe account authority for the user as specified by PAM USER is a server do not apply the Unix policy from the passwd entry in the name service switch Th
132. 54 355 356 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 337 335 Standards Environments and Macros 183 iconv pc cyr 5 Conversions Performed PC Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic PC Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic 257 357 361 336 260 337 40 362 376 40 340 360 FILES usr lib iconv so usr lib iconv t usr lib iconv iconv data SEE ALSO iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 conversion modules conversion tables list of conversions supported by conversion tables 184 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 NAME DESCRIPTION iconv_unicode code set conversion tables for Unicode The following code set conversions are supported CODE SET CONVERSIONS SUPPORTED FROM Code Set Code SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO 8859 1 8859 2 8859 3 8859 4 8859 5 8859 6 8859 7 8859 8 8859 9 8859 10 SO 2022 Korean EUC S0 2022 KR Latin 1 2 3 4 Latin Latin Latin Hebrew Latin 5 Latin 6 Japanese EUC Chinese PRC EUC GB 2312 1980 Korean Johap KS C 5601 1987 Korean Johap KS C 5601 1992 Korean UTF 8 Korean UTF 8 Korean UTF 8 KOI8 R Cyrillic KOI8 R Cyrillic PC Kanji SJIS PC Kanji SJIS UCS 2 UCS 2 CODE SET CONVERSIONS S FROM Filename Element 8859 1 8859 2 8
133. 60 362 363 364 365 346 350 343 376 373 375 377 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 370 371 372 320 322 323 324 325 306 310 303 336 333 335 337 331 330 334 300 321 260 243 241 242 244 245 246 247 250 251 252 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 ISO 8859 5 to PC Cyrillic iconv 8859 5 5 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R 313 314 315 316 317 371 370 374 340 361 373 374 375 376 253 254 255 256 For the conversion of ISO 8859 5 to PC Cyrillic all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 5 PC Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 PC Cyrillic 24 4 307 227 200 240 40 310 230 241 360 311 231 242 254 40 312 232 255 260 313 233 256 257 40 314 234 260 200 315 235 261 201 316 236 262 202 317 237 263 203 320 240 264 204 321 241 265 205 322 242 266 206 323 243 267 207 324 244 270 210 325 245 271 211 326 246 272 212 327 247 273 213 330 250 Standards Environments and Macros 149 iconv_8859 5 5 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 5 PC Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 PC Cyrillic 274 214 331 251 275 215 332 252 276 216 333 253 277 217 334 254 300 220 335 255 301 221 336 256 302 222 337 257 303 223 360 37
134. 7 202 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 ISO 8859 2 to Mazovia iconv 8859 2 5 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 2 MS 852 ISO 8859 2 MS 852 272 273 274 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 310 311 312 313 314 315 366 255 234 253 361 247 276 350 265 266 306 216 221 217 200 254 220 250 323 267 326 367 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 370 371 372 374 375 376 251 211 330 241 214 324 320 344 345 242 223 213 224 366 375 205 243 201 354 356 For the conversion of ISO 8859 2 to Mazovia all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 2 Mazovia ISO 8859 2 Mazovia 24 177 237 40 323 324 325 243 40 Standards Environments and Macros 143 iconv_8859 2 5 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 2 Mazovia ISO 8859 2 Mazovia 240 377 326 231 241 217 327 333 40 242 40 334 232 243 234 335 336 40 244 245 40 337 341 246 230 340 341 40 247 253 40 342 203 254 240 343 40 255 256 40 344 204 257 241 345 40 260 370 346 215 261 206 347 207 262 40 350 40 263 222 351 202 264 265 40 352 221 266 236 353 211 267 273 40 354 355 40 274 246 356 214 275 276 40 357 360 40 277 247 361 244 300 303 40 362 40 304 216 363 242 305 40 364 223 306 2
135. 75 345 136 334 176 374 usr lib iconv so usr lib iconv t usr lib iconv iconv data iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 conversion modules conversion tables list of conversions supported by conversion tables 128 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 28 Apr 1997 NAME DESCRIPTION CONVERSIONS MS 852 to ISO 8859 2 iconv_852 5 iconv_852 code set conversion tables for MS 852 MS DOS Latin 2 The following code set conversions are supported The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal Code Set Conversions Supported Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Output MS 852 dos2 ISO 8859 2 iso2 ISO Latin 2 MS 852 dos2 MS 1250 win2 Windows Latin 2 MS 852 dos2 Mazovia maz Mazovia MS 852 dos2 DHN dhn Dom Handlowy Nauki For the conversion of MS 852 to ISO 8859 2 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed MS 852 ISO 8859 2 MS 852 ISO 8859 2 24 177 40 271 274 40 200 307 275 257 201 374 276 277 202 351 277 305 40 203 342 306 303 204 344 307 343 205 371 310 316 40 206 346 317 244 207 347 320 360 210 263 321 320 211 353 322 317 212 325 323 313 213 365 324 357 214 356 325 322 Standards Environments and Macros 129 iconv_852 5 130 Conversions Performed MS 852 ISO 8
136. 76 300 For the conversion of MS 1251 to PC Cyrillic all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed MS 1251 PC Cyrillic MS 1251 PC Cyrillic 24 4 332 232 200 207 40 333 233 210 260 334 234 211 227 40 335 235 230 260 336 236 231 247 40 337 237 Standards Environments and Macros 117 iconv_1251 5 118 Conversions Performed MS 1251 PC Cyrillic MS 1251 PC Cyrillic 250 251 254 255 256 267 270 271 277 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 321 322 323 324 325 360 40 55 40 361 40 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 220 221 222 223 224 225 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 370 371 372 373 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 MS 1251 to Mac Cyrillic iconv_1251 5 Conversions Performed MS 1251 PC Cyrillic MS 1251 PC Cyrillic 326 327 330 331 226 227 230 231 374 375 376 354 355 356 For the conversion of MS 1251 to Mac Cyrillic all characters not in the following table are mappe
137. 859 2 MS 852 ISO 8859 2 215 254 326 315 216 304 327 316 217 306 330 354 220 311 331 334 40 221 305 335 336 222 345 336 331 223 364 337 40 224 366 340 323 225 245 341 337 226 265 342 324 227 246 343 321 230 266 344 361 231 326 345 362 232 334 346 251 233 253 347 271 234 273 350 300 235 243 351 332 236 327 352 340 237 350 353 333 240 341 354 375 241 355 355 335 242 363 356 376 243 372 357 264 244 241 360 255 245 261 361 275 246 256 362 262 247 276 363 267 250 312 364 242 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 iconv_852 5 Conversions Performed MS 852 ISO 8859 2 MS 852 ISO 8859 2 251 352 365 247 252 40 366 367 253 274 367 270 254 310 370 260 255 272 371 250 256 264 40 372 377 265 301 374 330 266 302 375 370 267 314 376 40 270 252 MS 852 to MS 1250 For the conversion of MS 852 to MS 1250 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed MS 852 MS 1250 MS 852 MS 1250 200 307 270 252 201 374 271 274 40 202 351 275 257 203 342 276 277 204 344 277 305 40 205 371 306 303 206 346 307 343 207 347 310 316 40 210 263 317 244 211 353 320 360 212 325 321 320 213 365 322 317 214 356 323 313 Standards Environments and Macros 131 iconv_852 5 132 Conversions Performed MS 852 MS 1250 MS 852 MS 1250 215 217 324 357 216 304 325 322 217 306 326
138. 859 3 8859 4 8859 5 8859 6 8859 7 8859 8 8859 9 8859 10 eucJP gb2312 iso2022 ko KR euc ko KR iso20 ko KR johap ko KR johap ko KR UTF 8 ko KR UTF 8 ko KR UTF 8 KOI8 R KOI8 R PCK SJIS UCS 2 UCS 2 TO Code 1j 1j 1j 1j 1j 1j 1j 1j 1j 1j c 4 i 1j 1 0 OO OO TF 8 T UTF 8 Korean 22 7 Korean Korean 92 Korean Korean Korean KS C5 Korean KS C 5 UCS 2 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 KOI8 R UCS 4 UPPORTE Code Set UT UT UT UT EUC Johap 601 1987 Johap 601 1992 Cyrillic D FROM Code Set Code UCS 2 UCS 2 UCS 4 UCS 4 UCS 4 UCS 4 UTF 16 UCS 2 UCS 2 UCS 4 UCS 4 UCS 4 UCS 4 UTF 1 FROM Filename Element 6 TO Target Code UTF 7 UTF 8 UCS 2 UTF 16 UTF 7 UTF 8 UCS 4 Standards Environments and Macros Code Set UTF UTF iconv_unicode 5 TO Fi El lename ement UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 ko_KR UTF 8 ko KR UTF 8 ko KR UTF 8 ko KR UTF 8 ko KR euc ko KR johap ko KR johap92 UCS 2 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 KOI8 R UCS 4 TO Filename Element 185 iconv_unicode 5 186 UTF 16 UT UTF 7 UT UTF 7 UT DEOS UT UTEE UT UTF 8 UT UTF 8 UT UTF 8 UT UTECS on UTE 8 oT UTF 8 UT UTF 8 UT UTF 8 UT UTF 8 UT UTF 8 UT UTF 8 UT UTF 8 UT UTF 8 UT UTF 8 UT UTF 8 Ut UTF 8 UT UTF 8 UT UTESS D
139. ALSO lt informaltable gt lt example gt lt informalexample gt sgml 5 This tag is the same as the table tag except the title is not required This tag contains examples of source code or usage of commands It contains a required titles This tag is the same as the example tag except the title is not required The inline elements are used for tagging text command function literal parameter lt inlineequation gt lt link gt lt olink gt lt xref gt man 1 nroff 1 man 5 An executable program or the entry a user makes to execute a command A subroutine in a program or external library Contains any literal string An argument passed to a computer program by a function or routine An untitled mathematical equation occurring in line A hypertext link to text within a book in the case of the reference manual it is used to cross reference to another reference page A hypertext link used to create cross references to books other than the reference manual A cross reference to another part of the same reference page Standards Environments and Macros 325 smartcard 5 326 NAME DESCRIPTION smartcard overview of smart card features on Solaris The smart card framework provides a mechanism to abstract the details of interacting with smart cards and smart cardreaders called card terminals The framework is based on the OpenCar
140. ALSO eqn 1 nroff 1 troff 1 attributes 5 42 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 12 Jul 2002 extensions 5 NAME extensions localedef extensions description file DESCRIPTION A localedef extensions description file or extensions file defines various extensions for the localedef 1 command The localedef extensions description file provides m EUC code set width information via the cswidth keyword cswidth bel swl bc2 sw2 bc3 sw3where bc1 bc2 and bc3 indicate the number of bytes byte count per character for EUC codesets 1 2 and 3 respectively sw1 sw2 and sw3 indicate screen width for EUC codesets 1 2 and 3 respectively m Other extensions which will be documented in a future release SEE ALSO locale 1 localedef 1 environ 5 locale 5 Standards Environments and Macros 43 filesystem 5 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION Root File System filesystem file system organization usr The file system tree is organized for administrative convenience Distinct areas within the file system tree are provided for files that are private to one machine files that can be shared by multiple machines of a common platform files that can be shared by all machines and home directories This organization allows sharable files to be stored on one machine but accessed by many machines using a remote file access mechanism such as NFS Grouping together similar files m
141. AM REINITIALIZE CRED and PAM REFRESH CRED are not supported and return PAM IGNORE The pam sm chauthtok implementation checks whether the old login password decrypts the users secret keys If it doesn t this module prompts the user for an old Secure RPC password and stores it in a pam data item called SUNW OLDRPCPASS This data item can be used by the store module to effectively update the users secret keys The authentication service returns the following error codes PAM SUCCESS Credentials set successfully PAM IGNORE Credentials not needed to access the password repository PAM USER UNKNOWN PAM USER is not set or the user is unknown PAM AUTH ERR No secret keys were set PAM AUTHTOK is not set no credentials are present or there is a wrong password PAM BUF ERR Module ran out of memory PAM SYSTEM ERR NIS subsystem failed 270 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 21 Jan 2003 ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES pam dhkeys 5 The authentication token management returns the following error codes PAM SUCCESS Old rpc password is set in SUNW_OLDRPCPASS PAM USER UNKNOWN User in PAM USER is unknown PAM AUTHTOK ERR User did not provide a password that decrypts the secret keys PAM BUF ERR Module ran out of memory See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Interface Stability Evolving MT Level MT Safe with except
142. AME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO crypt_sunmd5 5 crypt_sunmd5 password hashing module using MD5 message hash algorithm usr lib security ISA crypt sunmd5 so The crypt_sunmd5 module is a one way password hashing module for use with crypt 3C that uses the MD5 message hash algorithm The algorithm identifier for crypt conf 4 and policy conf 4 is md5 This module is designed to make it difficult to crack passwords that use brute force attacks based on high speed MD5 implementations that use code inlining unrolled loops and table lookup See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE MT Level Safe passwd 1 crypt 3C crypt_genhash_imp1 3C crypt gensalt 3C crypt_gensalt_imp1 3C getpassphrase 3C crypt conf 4 passwd 4 policy conf 4 attributes 5 Standards Environments and Macros 31 crypt unix 5 NAME DESCRIPTION USAGE ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO crypt unix traditional UNIX crypt algorithm The crypt unix algorithm is the traditional UNIX crypt algorithm It is not considered sufficiently secure for current systems and is provided for backwards compatibility The crypt_sunmd5 5 crypt bsdmd5 5 or crypt_bsdbf 5 algorithm should be used instead The algorithm identifier for policy conf 4 is unix Thereis no entry in crypt conf 4 for this algorithm The crypt_unix algorithm is internal to 1ibc and provides
143. AS amp SUN microsystems man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Sun Microsystems Inc 4150 Network Circle Santa Clara CA 95054 Part No 817 3946 10 September 2004 Copyright 2004 Sun Microsystems Inc 4150 Network Circle Santa Clara CA 95054 U S A All rights reserved This product or document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use copying distribution and decompilation No part of this product or document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Sun and its licensors if any Third party software including font technology is copyrighted and licensed from Sun suppliers Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems licensed from the University of California UNIX is a registered trademark in the U S and other countries exclusively licensed through X Open Company Ltd Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo docs sun com AnswerBook AnswerBook2 and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and other countries All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International Inc in the U S and other countries Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems Inc The OPEN LOOK and Sun Graphical User Interface was developed by Sun Microsystems Inc for its users and license
144. C Integrity When Sun WorkShop Compiler C 5 0 is installed Solaris releases 2 5 1 through 9 support ISO IEC 14882 1998 Programming Languages C Unsupported features of that standard are described in the compiler README file The features of the C standard adopted from ISO IEC 9899 Amendement 1 are not supported on Solaris 2 5 1 and are only partially supported on Solaris 2 6 If the behavior required by POSIX 2 POSIX 2a XPG4 SUS or SUSv2 conflicts with historical Solaris utility behavior the original Solaris version of the utility is unchanged a new version that is standard conforming has been provided in usr xpg4 bin For applications wishing to take advantage of POSIX 2 POSIX 2a XPG4 SUS or SUSv2 features the PATH sh or ksh or path csh environment variables should be set with usr xpg4 bin preceding any other directories in which utilities specified by those specifications are found such as bin usr bin usr ucb and usr ccs bin Feature test macros are used by applications to indicate additional sets of features that are desired beyond those specified by the C standard If an application uses only those interfaces and headers defined by a particular standard such as POSIX or X Open CAE then it need only define the appropriate feature test macro specified by that standard If the application is using interfaces and headers not defined by that standard then in addition to defining the appropriate standard feature te
145. D UTEOS orn UTF 8 UT FROM Code Set Code UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 UTF 8 Chinese PRC EUC GB 2312 1980 ISO 2022 CN Chinese Taiwan Big5 Chinese Taiwan EUC CNS 11643 1992 ISO 2022 TW F 16 UTF 8 F 7 UCS 2 F 7 UCS 4 F 7 UTF 8 F 8 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 F 8 SO 8859 2 Latin 2 F 8 SO 8859 3 Latin 3 F 8 ISO 8859 4 Latin 4 F 8 SO 8859 5 Cyrillic F 8 SO 8859 6 Arabic F 8 SO 8859 7 Greek F 8 SO 8859 8 Hebrew F 8 SO 8859 9 Latin 5 F 8 SO 8859 10 Latin 6 F 8 Japanese EUC F 8 Chinese PRC EUC GB 2312 1980 F 8 50 2022 F 8 KOI8 R Cyrillic F 8 PC Kanji SJIS F 8 PC Kanji SJIS F 8 UCS 2 F 8 UCS 4 F 8 UTF 16 F 8 UTF 7 F 8 Chinese PRC EUC UT UT UT zh zh zh zh GB 2312 1980 CODE SET CONVERSIONS SUPPORTED TO Code Set FROM Target Code Filename Element 8 ISO 2022 CN F 8 Chinese Taiwan Big5 8 Chinese Taiwan EUC CNS 11643 1992 F 8 ISO 2022 TW CN euc UTF 8 CN i1so2022 7 UTF 8 _ TW big5 UTF 8 TW euc UTF 8 TW iso2022 7 UTF 8 EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 1 The library module filename man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 UTF 8 UCS 2 UCS 4 UTF 8 8859 1 8859 2 8859 3 8859 4 8859 5 8859 6 8859 7 8859 8 8859 9 8859 10 eucJP gb2312 iso2022 KOI8 R PCK SJIS UCS 2 UCS 4 UTF 16 UTF 7 zh CN euc TO Filename Element zh CN iso2022 7 zh TW big5 zh TW euc zh TW iso2022 7 UTF
146. ETB 030 CAN 031 EM 032 SUB 033 ESC 034 FS 035 GS 036 RS 037 US 040 SP 041 042 043 044 045 5 046 amp 047 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 060 0 061 1 062 2 063 3 064 4 065 5 066 6 067 7 070 8 071 9 072 073 074 075 076 gt 077 100 101 A 102 B 103 C 104 D 105 E 106 F 107 G 110 H 111 I 112 J ILS K 114 L 115 M 116 N 117 O 120 P 121 Q 122 R 123 S 124 T 125 U 126 V 127 W 130 X 13i Y 132 Z 133 134 N 135 136 137 140 141 a 142 b 143 c 144 d 145 e 146 f 147 g 150 h 151 i 152 j 153 k 154 1 155 m 156 n 157 o 160 p 161 q 162 r 163 s 164 t 165 u 166 v 167 w 170 x 171 y 172 z 173 174 175 176 177 DEL Hexadecimal Character 00 NUL 01 SOH 02 STX 03 ETX 04 EOT 05 ENQ 06 ACK 07 BEL 08 BS 09 HT 0A NL OB VT oc NP OD CR OE SO OF SI 10 DLE 11 DCL 12 DC2 13 DC3 14 DC4 15 NAK 16 SYN 17 ETB 18 CAN 19 EM 1A SUB 1B ESC 1C FS 1D GS 1E RS 1F US 20 SP 21 22 23 4 24 25 26 amp 2 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 0 31 1 32 2 33 3 34 4 35 5 36 6 37 7 38 8 39 9 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E gt 3F 40 41 A 42 B 43 C 44 D 45 E 46 F 47 G 48 H 49 I 4A J 4B K 4C L 4D M 4EN 4F O 50 P 51 Q 52R 53 S 54 T 55 UJ 56 V 57 W 58 X 59 Y 5A Z 5B 5c 5D 5E DEL 60 61a 62 b 63 c 64 d 65 e 66 f 67 g 68 h 69 i 6A j 6B k 6c 1 6D m 6E n 6F o 70 p 71 q 72 r 73 8 74 t 75 u 76 v 77 w 78 x 79 y 7A z 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F DEL Decimal Character 0 NUL 1 SOH 2 STX 3 ETX 4 EOT 5 ENQ 6 ACK 7 BEL 8 BS 9 HT 10 NL
147. HN Mazovia DHN Mazovia 200 217 212 215 201 225 213 221 Standards Environments and Macros 157 iconv_dhn 5 Conversions Performed DHN Mazovia DHN Mazovia 202 220 214 222 203 234 215 244 204 245 216 242 205 243 217 236 206 230 220 246 207 240 221 247 210 241 222 247 40 211 206 FILES usr lib iconv so usr lib iconv t usr lib iconv iconv data SEE ALSO iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 conversion modules conversion tables list of conversions supported by conversion tables 158 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 NAME DESCRIPTION CONVERSIONS KOIS R to ISO 8859 5 iconv_koi8 r 5 iconv_koi8 r code set conversion tables for KOI8 R The following code set conversions are supported Code Set Conversions Supported Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Output KOI8 R koi8 ISO 8859 5 iso5 ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic KOI8 R koi8 PC Cyrillic alt Alternative PC Cyrillic KOI8 R koi8 MS 1251 wind Windows Cyrillic KOI8 R koi8 Mac Cyrillic mac Macintosh Cyrillic The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal For the conversion of KOI8 R to ISO 8859 5 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed KOI8 R ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R ISO 8859 5 24 4 320 337 241 362 321 357 242
148. ION EXTENDED DESCRIPTION WBEM Tools and Services Solaris WBEM Services 2 5 wbem 5 wbem Web Based Enterprise Management Web Based Enterprise Management WBEM is a set of management and Internet related technologies intended to unify the management of enterprise computing environments Developed by the Distributed Management Task Force DMTF WBEM enables organizations to deliver an integrated set of standards based management tools that support and promote World Wide Web technology The DMTF has developed a set of standards that make up WBEM This set of standards includes Common Information Model CIM an object oriented data model that describes the overall management of information in an enterprise network environment CIM consists of a CIM specification and a CIM schema CIM Specification Consists of the language and methodology that describes management data CIM Schema Provides actual model descriptions of systems applications large area networks and devices The CIM Schema enables applications from different developers on different platforms to describe management data in a standard format As a result a variety of management applications can share this information CIM Operations Over HyperText Transport Protocol HTTP 1 1 is a transport mechanism that maps CIM operations to HTTP to allow implementations of CIM to interoperate in an open standardized manner CIM Operations Over HTTP 1 1 uses eXtensi
149. Instruction Set Architecture or processor type such as is returned by uname i Platform amp hyphen dependent refers to a file that is installed on all platforms and whose contents vary depending on the platform Like a platform amp hyphen dependent file a platform amp hyphen independent file is installed on all platforms However the contents of the latter type remains the same on all platforms An example of a platform amp hyphen dependent file is compiled executable program An example of a platform amp hyphen independent file is a standard configuration file such as etc hosts Unlike a platform amp hyphen dependent or a platform amp hyphen independent file the platform amp hyphen specific file is installed only on a subset of supported platforms Most platform specific files are gathered under platformand usr platform The root file system contains files that are unique to each machine It contains the following directories 44 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Nov 2001 filesystem 5 Root of the overall file system name space dev Primary location for special files Typically device files are built to match the kernel and hardware configuration of the machine dev cfg Symbolic links to physical ap ids dev cua Device files for uucp dev dsk Block disk devices dev fbs Frame buffer device files dev fd File descriptors dev md Logical volume management meta
150. MON x The abbreviated weekday names for example Sun where x is a number from 1 to 7 The full weekday names for example Sunday where x is a number from 1 to 7 The abbreviated month names for example Jan where xis a number from 1 to 12 The full month names for example January where x is a number from 1 to 12 Standards Environments and Macros 233 locale 5 D T FMT D FMT T FMT AM STR PM STR T FMT AMPM ERA The appropriate date and time representation The appropriate date representation The appropriate time representation The appropriate ante meridiem affix The appropriate post meridiem affix The appropriate time representation in the 12 hour clock format with AM STR and PM STR The era description segments which describe how years are counted and displayed for each era in a locale Each era description segment has the format direction offset start date end date era name era_format according to the definitions below There will be as many era description segments as are necessary to describe the different eras Era description segments are separated by semicolons The start of an era might not be the earliest point For example the Christian era B C starts on the day before January 1 A D 1 and increases with earlier time direction Either a or a character The character indicates that years closer to the start date have lower numbers than those closer to the end
151. Mac For the conversion of ISO 8859 5 to Mac Cyrillic all characters not in the following Cyrillic table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 5 Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 Mac Cyrillic 24 4 317 237 200 237 40 320 340 240 312 321 341 241 335 322 342 242 253 323 343 243 256 324 344 244 270 325 345 245 301 326 346 246 247 327 347 247 272 330 350 250 267 331 351 251 274 332 352 252 276 333 353 253 40 334 354 152 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 iconv 8859 5 5 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 5 Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 Mac Cyrillic 254 255 256 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 315 40 330 332 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 370 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 337 334 336 254 257 271 317 264 273 300 Standards Environments and Macros 153 iconv_8859 5 5 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 5 Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 Mac Cyrillic 310 230 371 275 311 231 372 277 312 232 373 40 313 233 374 316 314 234 375
152. NVERSIONS Mazovia to ISO 8859 2 iconv maz code set conversion tables for Mazovia The following code set conversions are supported iconv maz 5 The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal Code Set Conversions Supported Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Output Mazovia maz ISO 8859 2 iso2 ISO Latin 2 Mazovia maz MS 1250 win2 Windows Latin 2 Mazovia maz MS 852 dos2 MS DOS Latin 2 Mazovia maz DHN dhn Dom Hanlowy Nauki For the conversion of Mazovia to ISO 8859 2 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed Mazovia ISO 8859 2 Mazovia ISO 8859 2 24 177 40 230 246 200 307 231 326 201 374 232 334 202 351 233 40 203 342 234 243 204 344 235 40 205 40 236 266 206 261 237 40 207 347 240 254 210 40 241 257 211 353 242 363 212 213 40 243 323 214 356 244 361 215 346 245 321 Standards Environments and Macros 175 iconv maz 5 Mazovia to MS 1250 Conversions Performed Mazovia ISO 8859 2 Mazovia ISO 8859 2 216 304 246 274 217 241 247 277 220 312 250 340 40 221 352 341 337 222 263 342 365 40 223 364 366 367 224 366 367 40 225 306 370 260 226 227 40 371 376 40 256 201 For the conversion of Mazovia to MS 1250 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Mazovia MS 1250 Mazovia MS 1250
153. RE Bracket Expression above A vertical line appearing first or last in an ERE or immediately following a vertical line or a left parenthesis or immediately preceding a right parenthesis produces undefined results The circumflex is special when used m as an anchor see ERE Expression Anchoring below m as the first character of a bracket expression see RE Bracket Expression above The dollar sign is special when used as an anchor A period when used outside a bracket expression is an ERE that matches any character in the supported character set except NUL The rules for ERE Bracket Expressions are the same as for Basic Regular Expressions see RE Bracket Expression above The following rules will be used to construct EREs matching multiple characters from EREs matching a single character 1 A concatenation of EREs matches the concatenation of the character sequences matched by each component of the ERE A concatenation of EREs enclosed in parentheses matches whatever the concatenation without the parentheses matches For example both the ERE cd and the ERE cd are matched by the third and fourth character of the string abcdefabcdef 310 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 12 Jul 1999 ERE Alternation ERE Precedence regex 5 When an ERE matching a single character or an ERE enclosed in parentheses is followed by the special character plus sign together with th
154. RIPTION OPTIONS PARAMETERS SEE ALSO and others The contents of the title may be a text entity reference This tag is equivalent to the SS nroff macro It contains a title element that contains the text of the sub section heading lt refsect2 gt tags may also be used within a lt refsynopsisdiv gt as a sub section heading for the SYNOPSIS section There are a number of block elements that are used for grouping text This is a list of some of these elements para This tag is used to contain a paragraph of text lt variablelist gt This tag is used to create two column lists For example descriptions for command options where the first column lists the option and the second column describes the option lt orderedlist gt An list of items in a specific order lt itemizedlist gt A list of items that are marked with a character such as a bullet or a dash lt literallayout gt Formatted program output as produced by a program or command This tag is a container for lines set off from the main text in which line breaks tabs and leading white space are significant lt programlisting gt A segment of program code Line breaks and leading white space are significant lt table gt This tag contains the layout and content for tabular formatting of information lt table gt has a required lt title gt 324 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 7 Jan 1997 Inline Elements SEE
155. ROG ERROR you must be super user to run this script exit 1 fi should be changed to WHO usr xpg4 bin id n u if 4 WHO root then echo PROG ERROR you are not authorized to run this script exit 1 fi Authorizations can be explicitly checked in shell scripts by checking the output of the auths 1 utility For example for auth in auths tr NOTFOUND do auth solaris date amp amp break authorization found done if Sauth solaris date then echo gt amp 2 SPROG ERROR you are not authorized to set the date exit 1 fi ld so 1 1 chkauthattr 3SECDB auth attr 4 policy conf 4 prof attr 4 user attr 4 System Administration Guide Security Services Standards Environments and Macros 303 regex 5 NAME DESCRIPTION BASIC REGULAR EXPRESSIONS BREs Matching a Single Character BRE Ordinary Characters BRE Special Characters regex internationalized basic and extended regular expression matching Regular Expressions REs provide a mechanism to select specific strings from a set of character strings The Internationalized Regular Expressions described below differ from the Simple Regular Expressions described on the regexp 5 manual page in the following ways both Basic and Extended Regular Expressions are supported m the Internationalization features character class equivalence class and multi character collation are supported The Basi
156. September 2004
157. a b c a Mo c a No c a c a c The following will not a c aN c aN b c m Calling a utility or function without going through a shell as described for find 1 and the function nmatch 3C m Calling utilities such as find cpio tar or pax through the shell command line In this case shell quote removal is performed before the utility sees the argument For example in find bin name e c h o print after quote removal the backslashes are presented to ind and it treats them as escape characters Both precede ordinary characters so the c and h represent themselves and echo would be found on many historical systems that have it in bin To find a file name that contained shell special characters or pattern characters both quoting and escaping are required such as pax r aX to extract a filename ending with a Conforming applications are required to quote or escape the shell special characters sometimes called metacharacters If used without this protection syntax errors can result or implementation extensions can be triggered For example the KornShell supports a series of extensions based on parentheses in patterns see ksh 1 The following rules are used to construct patterns matching multiple characters from patterns matching a single character m The asterisk is a pattern that will match any string including the null string The concatenation of patterns matching a single character is a valid
158. a single digit identifier This does not imply that only nine subexpressions are allowed in REs The following is a valid BRE with ten subexpressions ab e d N e N GBN N 2NJN GJ N OgEN N Gn N op N qr When a BRE matching a single character a subexpression or a back reference is followed by the special character asterisk together with that asterisk it matches what zero or more consecutive occurrences of the BRE would match For example ab and ab ab are equivalent when matching the string ab When a BRE matching a single character a subexpression or a back reference is followed by an interval expression of the format m m or m n together with that interval expression it matches what repeated consecutive occurrences of the BRE would match The values of m and n will be decimal integers in the range Oxmznz RE DUP MAX where m specifies the exact or minimum number of occurrences and n specifies the maximum number of occurrences The expression m matches exactly m occurrences of the preceding BRE m matches at least m occurrences and m n matches any number of occurrences between m and n inclusive For example in the string abababccccccd the BRE c 3 is matched by characters seven to nine the BRE ab 4 is not matched at all and the BRE c 1 3 d is matched by characters ten to thirteen The behavior of multiple adjacent duplication symbols a
159. acros Last Revised 3 Jul 1990 FILES SEE ALSO term 5 610 610bct 610 w 610bct w 630 630MTG 7300 pc7300 unix pc 735 ti 745 dumb hp Ip pt505 pt505 24 sync AT amp T 610 bct terminal in 80 column mode AT amp T 610 bct terminal in 132 column mode AT amp T 630 Multi Tasking Graphics terminal AT amp T UNIX PC Model 7300 Texas Instruments TI735 and TI725 Texas Instruments TI745 generic name for terminals that lack reverse line feed and other special escape sequences Hewlett Packard same as 2645 generic name for a line printer AT amp T Personal Terminal 505 22 lines AT amp T Personal Terminal 505 24 line mode generic name for synchronous Teletype Model 4540 compatible terminals Commands whose behavior depends on the type of terminal should accept arguments of the form Tterm where term is one of the names given above if no such argument is present such commands should obtain the terminal type from the environment variable TERM which in turn should contain term usr share lib terminfo compiled terminal description database sh 1 stty 1 tabs 1 tput 1 vi 1 infocmp 1M curses 3CURSES profile 4 terminfo 4 environ 5 Standards Environments and Macros 337 vgrindefs 5 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION Capabilities vgrindefs vgrind s language definition data base usr lib vgrindefs vgrindefs contains all language definitions for vgrind 1 Capabiliti
160. acters FNS The POSIX IEEE Standards and the X Open Specifications are described on the standards page The user environment environ the subset of the user environment that depends on language and cultural conventions locale the large file compilation environment 1 compile and the transitional compilation environment 1 compile64 are described The macros to format Reference Manual pages man and mansun as well as other text format macros me mm and ms are described Tables of character sets ascii charmap eqnchar and iconv file format notation formats file name pattern matching nmatch and regular expressions regex and regexp are presented Topics concerning the Federated Naming Service ns fns initial context fns policies and fns references are discussed man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 12 May 1999 Standards Environments and Macros ascii 5 NAME ascii map of ASCII character set SYNOPSIS cat usr pub ascii DESCRIPTION usr pub ascii is a map of the ASCII character set to be printed as needed It contains octal and hexadecimal values for each character While not included in that file a chart of decimal values is also shown here Octal Character 000 NUL 001 SOH 002 STX 003 ETX 004 EOT 005 ENQ 006 ACK 007 BEL 010 BS 011 HT 012 NL 013 VT 014 NP 015 CR 016 SO 017 SI 020 DLE 021 DECL 022 DC2 023 DC3 024 DC4 025 NAK 026 SYN 027
161. ains that RE to match an initial segment of a line A dollar sign at the end of an entire RE constrains that RE to match a final segment of a line The construction entire RE constrains the entire RE to match the entire line The null RE for example is equivalent to the last RE encountered Addresses are constructed as follows 1 2 3 4 on The character addresses the current line The character addresses the last line of the buffer A decimal number n addresses the n th line of the buffer x addresses the line marked with the mark name character x which must be an ASCII lower case letter a z Lines are marked with the k command described below A RE enclosed by slashes addresses the first line found by searching forward from the line following the current line toward the end of the buffer and stopping at the first line containing a string matching the RE If necessary the search wraps around to the beginning of the buffer and continues up to and including the current line so that the entire buffer is searched A RE enclosed in question marks addresses the first line found by searching backward from the line preceding the current line toward the beginning of the buffer and stopping at the first line containing a string matching the RE If necessary the Standards Environments and Macros 315 regexp 5 Characters With Special Meaning 316 Macros search wraps around
162. akes the file system tree easier to upgrade and manage The file system tree consists of a root file system and a collection of mountable file systems The mount 2 program attaches mountable file systems to the file system tree at mount points directory entries in the root file system or other previously mounted file systems Two file systems the root and usr must be mounted in order to have a completely functional system The root file system is mounted automatically by the kernel at boot time the usr file system is mounted by the system start up script which is run as part of the booting process Certain locations noted below are approved installation locations for bundled Foundation Solaris software In some cases the approved locations for bundled software are also approved locations for add on system software or for applications The following descriptions make clear where the two locations differ For example etc is the installation location for platform amp hyphen dependent configuration files that are bundled with Solaris software The analogous location for applications is etc opt packagename In the following descriptions subsystem is a category of application or system software such as a window system dt or a language java1 2 The following descriptions make use of the terms platform platform amp hyphen dependent platform amp hyphen independent and platform amp hyphen specific Platform refers to a machines
163. ale only 0123456789 are included In a locale definition file only the digits 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 can be specified and in contiguous ascending sequence by numerical value The digits 0 to 9 of the portable character set are automatically included in this class The definition of character class digit requires that only ten characters the ones defining digits can be specified alternative digits for example Hindi or Kanji cannot be specified here space Define characters to be classified as white space characters In the POSIX locale at a minimum the characters SPACE FORMFEED NEWLINE CARRIAGE RETURN TAB and VERTICAL TAB are included In a locale definition file no character specified for the keywords upper lower alpha digit graph or xdigit can be specified The characters SPACE FORMFEED NEWLINE CARRIAGE RETURN TAB and VERTICAL TAB of the portable character set and any characters included in the class blank are automatically included in this class cntrl Define characters to be classified as control characters 216 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 punct graph print xdigit locale 5 In the POSIX locale no characters in classes alpha or print are included In a locale definition file no character specified for the keywords upper lower alpha digit punct graph print or xdigit can be specified Define character
164. an pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 4 Nov 1994 NAME DESCRIPTION Reference Types Address Types fns references 5 fns references overview of FNS References Every composite name in ENS is bound to a reference A reference consists of a type and a list of addresses The reference type is used to identify the type of object An address is something that can be used with some communication mechanism to invoke operations on an object or service Multiple addresses are intended to identify multiple communication endpoints for a single conceptual object or service Each address in a reference consists of an address type and an opaque buffer The address type determines the format and interpretation of the address data Together the address s type and data specify how to reach the object Many communication mechanisms are possible FNS does not place any restrictions on them The following summarizes the reference and address types that are currently defined New types should be registered with the Federated Naming Group at SunSoft All reference types use the FN ID STRING identifier format unless otherwise qualified onc fn enterprise Enterprise root context onc fn organization A context for naming objects related to an organizational unit onc fn hostname A context for naming hosts onc fn username A context for naming users onc fn user A context for naming objects related to a user o
165. analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename 1ib ia64 usr lib iconv Conversion tables for iconv 1 usr lib libp Profiled libraries usr lib locale Localization databases usr lib lp Line printer subsystem databases and back end executables usr lib mail Auxiliary programs for the mail 1 subsystem usr lib netsvc Internet network services usr lib nfs Auxiliary NFS related programs and daemons 56 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Nov 2001 filesystem 5 usr lib pics Position Independent Code PIC archives needed to rebuild the run time linker usr lib refer Auxiliary programs for refer 1 usr lib sa Scripts and commands for the system activity report package See sar 1 usr lib saf Auxiliary programs and daemons related to the service access facility usr lib sparcv9 SPARC 64 bit platform amp hyphen dependent libraries various databases commands and daemons not invoked directly by a human user An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename 1lib sparcv9 usr lib spell Auxiliary programs and databases for spe11 1 This directory is only present when the Binary Compatibility Package is installed usr lib uucp Auxiliary programs and daemons for uucp 1C usr 1lib subsystem Platform amp hyphen
166. ands are strings For some keywords the strings only can contain integers Keywords that are not provided string values set to the empty string or integer keywords set to 1 will be used to indicate that the value is not available in the locale The following keywords are recognized decimal point thousands sep grouping Item The operand is a string containing the symbol that is used as the decimal delimiter radix character in numeric non monetary formatted quantities This keyword cannot be omitted and cannot be set to the empty string In contexts where standards limit the decimal point to a single byte the result of specifying a multi byte operand is unspecified The operand is a string containing the symbol that is used as a separator for groups of digits to the left of the decimal delimiter in numeric non monetary formatted monetary quantities In contexts where standards limit the thousands sep to a single byte the result of specifying a multi byte operand is unspecified Define the size of each group of digits in formatted non monetary quantities The operand is a sequence of integers separated by semicolons Each integer specifies the number of digits in each group with the initial integer defining the size of the group immediately preceding the decimal delimiter and the following integers defining the preceding groups If the last integer is not 1 then the size of the previous group if any will be rep
167. ar news directory usr oasys Commands and files related to the Form and Menu Language Interpreter FMLI execution environment See face 1 usr old Programs that are being phased out usr openwin Installation or mount point for the OpenWindows software usr perl5 Perl 5 programs and documentation usr platform Subtree of platform amp hyphen specific objects which does not need to reside on the root filesystem It contains a series of directories one per supported platform The 58 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Nov 2001 filesystem 5 semantics of the series of directories is equivalent to platform except for subdirectories which do not provide utility under one or the other for example platform include is not needed usr platform uname i include Symbolic link to uname i include Platform amp hyphen specific system sys vm header files with semantics equivalent to usr include An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software usr platform uname i kernel Platform amp hyphen specific modules with semantics equivalent to usr kernel An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software usr platform uname i lib Platform amp hyphen specific daemon and shared objects with semantics equivalent to usr 1ib An approved installation location for bundled Solaris softwa
168. aracter classes need not exist If a class name is defined by a charclass keyword but no characters are subsequently assigned to it this is not an error it represents a class without any characters belonging to it The charclass name can be used as the property argument to the wctype 3C function in regular expression and shell pattern matching bracket expressions and by the tr 1 command Define the mapping of lower case letters to upper case letters In the POSIX locale at a minimum the 26 lower case characters 218 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 LC COLLATE locale 5 abcdefghijkimnopqrstuvwxwyz are mapped to the corresponding 26 upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ In a locale definition file the operand consists of character pairs separated by semicolons The characters in each character pair are separated by a comma and the pair enclosed by parentheses The first character in each pair is the lower case letter the second the corresponding upper case letter Only characters specified for the keywords lower and upper can be specified The lower case letters a to z and their corresponding upper case letters A to Z of the portable character set are automatically included in this mapping but only when the toupper keyword is omitted from the locale definition tolower Define the mapping of upper case letters to lower case letters In the POSIX
169. ard The pam smartcard so module is a shared object that can be dynamically loaded to provide the necessary functionality upon demand Its path is specified in the PAM configuration file pam conf See pam conf 4 The Smart Card authentication component provides the pam sm authenticate 3PAM function to verify the identity of a smart card user The pam sm authenticate function collects as user input the PIN number It passes this data back to its underlying layer OCF to perform PIN verification If verification is successful the module returns PAM SUCCESS and passes the username and password from the smart card to PAM modules stacked below pam smartcard The following options can be passed to the Smart Card service module debug sysolg 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages verbose Turn on verbose authentication failure reporting to the user The PAM smart card module pam smartcard can be configured in the PAM configuration file etc pam conf For example the following configuration on on the desktop Common Desktop Environment forces a user to use a smart card for logging in The following are typical values set by smartcard c enable if the command is applied to the default configuration dtlogin auth requisite pam smartcard so 1 dtlogin auth required pam authtok get so 1 dtlogin auth required pam dhkeys so 1 dtlogin auth required pam unix auth so dtsession auth requis
170. are brackets The character denotes a range c c unless it is just after the open bracket or before the closing bracket c or c in which case it has no special meaning When used within brackets the character has the meaning complement of if it immediately follows the open bracket example c elsewhere between brackets example c itstands for the ordinary character The special meaning of the X operator can be escaped only by preceding it with another for example VN Programs must have the following five macros declared before the include lt regexp h gt statement These macros are used by the compile routine The macros GETC PEEKC and UNGETC operate on the regular expression given as input to compile GETC This macro returns the value of the next character byte in the regular expression pattern Successive calls to GETC should return successive characters of the regular expression PEEKC This macro returns the next character byte in the regular expression Immediately successive calls to PEEKC should return the same character which should also be the next character returned by GETC man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 2 Apr 1996 compile step advance regexp 5 UNGETC This macro causes the argument c to be returned by the next call to GETC and PEEKC No more than one character of pushback is ever needed and this character is guaranteed to b
171. argument is ignored If it is a relative path it is interpreted relative to the directory indicated by the dirfd argument If dirfd does not refer to a valid directory the function returns ENOTDIR If the special value AT FDCWD is specified for dirfd a relative path argument is resolved relative to the current working directory If the flag argument is 0 all other semantics of this function are equivalent to unlink 2 If flag is set to AT REMOVEDIR all other semantics of this function are equivalent to rmdir 2 Rename a file relative to directories int renameat int fromfd const char old int tofd const char new The renameat 2 function renames an entry in a directory possibly moving the entry into a different directory The old argument indicates the name of the entry to rename If this argument is a relative path it is interpreted relative to the directory indicated by the fd argument If it is an absolute path the fromfd argument is ignored The new argument indicates the new name for the entry If this argument is a relative path it is interpreted relative to the directory indicated by the tofd argument If it is an absolute path the tofd argument is ignored In the relative path cases if the directory file descriptor arguments do not refer to a valid directory the function returns ENOTDIR All other semantics of this function are equivalent to rename 2 If a special value AT FDCWD is specified for either the fromfd or tofd a
172. aries usr snadm Files related to system and network administration usr spool Symbolic link to the var spool directory usr src Symbolic link to the usr share src directory usr tmp Symbolic link to the var tmp directory usr ucb Berkeley compatibility package binaries usr ucbinclude Berkeley compatibility package headers usr ucblib Berkeley compatibility package libraries Standards Environments and Macros 61 filesystem 5 usr vmsys Commands and files related to the Framed Access Command Environment FACE programs See face 1 usr xpg4 Directory for POSIX compliant utilities SEE ALSO at 1 ex 1 ace 1 fm1i 1 iconv 1 1p 1 isainfo 1 mail 1 mailx 1 nroff 1 priocnt1 1 refer 1 sar 1 sh 1 spe11 1 trof 1 uname 1 uucp 1C vi 1 acct 1M cron 1M dispadmin 1M sck 1M init 1M kernel 1M mknod 1M mount 1M useradd 1M ypbind 1M mount 2 intro 4 terminfo 4 62 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Nov 2001 NAME DESCRIPTION Patterns Matching a Single Character fnmatch 5 fnmatch file name pattern matching The pattern matching notation described below is used to specify patterns for matching strings in the shell Historically pattern matching notation is related to but slightly different from the regular expression notation For this reason the description of the rules for this pattern ma
173. asier for developers to write management applications that can communicate with any WBEM enabled management device The Solaris WBEM Software Development Kit includes examples documentation and CIM Workshop a graphical user interface through which developers can view and create classes and instances through the remote method invocation RMI or the XML HTTP protocol Developers can also use this kit to write providers which are programs that communicate with managed elements to access data All management applications that developers create with the Solaris WBEM Software Development Kit run on the Java platform The Solaris 9 WBEM Software Development Kit installs and runs in version 1 4 of the Java environment Developers can use the kit to write standalone applications or applications that run in conjunction with Solaris WBEM Services 342 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 5 Nov 2001 Compatibility of Solaris WBEM Services with Existing Protocols ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO wbem 5 The Solaris WBEM Software Development Kit is described in the Solaris WBEM SDK Development Guide Javadoc for the WBEM application programming interface is located at usr sadm lib wbem doc index html Adapters and converters enable Solaris WBEM Services of Solaris to work compatibly with existing protocols by mapping WBEM information to these protocols One such protocol is Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP
174. at describes the acceptable negative response to a question expecting an affirmative or negative response yesstr The operand consists of a fixed string not a regular expression that can be used by an application for composition of a message that lists an acceptable affirmative response such as in a prompt nostr The operand consists of a fixed string that can be used by an application for composition of a message that lists an acceptable negative response The format and values for affirmative and negative responses of the POSIX locale follow the code listing depicting the localedef input the table representing the same information with the addition of n1 1anginfo constants LC MESSAGES This is the POSIX locale definition for the LC MESSAGES category yesexpr lt circumflex gt lt left square bracket gt lt y gt lt Y gt lt right square bracket gt noexpr lt circumflex gt lt left square bracket gt lt n gt lt N gt lt right square bracket gt yesstr yes nostr no END LC_MESSAGES localedef Keyword langinfo Constant POSIX Locale Value yesexpr YESEXPR yy noexpr NOEXPR nN yesstr YESSTR yes nostr NOSTR no date 1 Locale 1 Localedef 1 sort 1 tr 1 unia 1 Localeconv 3C nl langinfo 3C setlocale 3C strcol1 3C strftime 3C strptime 3C strxfrm 3C wcscoll 3C wcsftime 3C wcsxfrm 3C wctype 3C attributes 5 charmap 5 ext ensions 5 regex
175. at 2 The function call stat path buf is identical to fstatat AT_FDCWD path buf 0 The function call 1stat path buf is identical to fstatat AT_FDCWD path buf AT SYMLINK NOFOLLOW The function call fstat fildes buf is identical to fstatat fildes NULL buf 0 Set owner and group ID int fchownat int fd const char path uid t owner gid t group int flag The chownat 2 function sets the owner ID and group ID for a file If the path argument is relative it is resolved relative to the fd argument file descriptor otherwise the fd argument is ignored If the fd argument is a special value AT FDCWD the path is resolved relative to the current working directory If the path argument is a null pointer the function sets the owner and group ID of the file referenced by the fd argument In all other relative path cases if the fd argument does not refer to a valid directory the function returns ENOTDIR If the flag argument is set to AT SYMLINK NOFOLLOW the function will not automatically traverse a symbolic link at the position of the path The chownat function is a multi purpose function that can be used in place of chown 1chown or chown See chown 2 The function call chown path owner group is equivalent to chownat AT FDCWD path owner group O The function call 1chown path owner group is equivalent to chownat AT FDCWD path owner group AT SYMLINK NOFOLLOW Set file ac
176. at plus sign it matches what one or more consecutive occurrences of the ERE would match For example the ERE b bc matches the fourth to seventh characters in the string acabbbcde ab and ab ab are equivalent When an ERE matching a single character or an ERE enclosed in parentheses is followed by the special character asterisk together with that asterisk it matches what zero or more consecutive occurrences of the ERE would match For example the ERE b c matches the first character in the string cabbbcde and the ERE b cd matches the third to seventh characters in the string cabbbedebbbbbbcdbc And ab and ab ab are equivalent when matching the string ab When an ERE matching a single character or an ERE enclosed in parentheses is followed by the special character question mark together with that question mark it matches what zero or one consecutive occurrences of the ERE would match For example the ERE b c matches the second character in the string acabbbcde When an ERE matching a single character or an ERE enclosed in parentheses is followed by an interval expression of the format m m or m n together with that interval expression it matches what repeated consecutive occurrences of the ERE would match The values of m and n will be decimal integers in the range 0 lt m lt n RE DUP MAX where m specifies the exact or minimum number of occurrences and n specifies the maximum number of oc
177. atabase The following options may be passed to the LDAP service module debug syslog 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages These options are case sensitive and the options must be used exactly as presented here The authentication service returns the following error codes PAM SUCCESS Authentication successful PAM MAXTRIES Maximum number of authentication attempts exceeded PAM AUTH ERR Authentication failure PAM USER UNKNOWN No account present for user Standards Environments and Macros 279 pam ldap 5 280 EXAMPLES PAM BUF ERR Memory buffer error PAM SYSTEM ERR System error The account management service returns the following error codes PAM SUCCESS User allowed access to account PAM NEW AUTHTOK REQD New authentication token required PAM ACCT EXPIRED User account has expired PAM PERM DENIED User denied access to account at this time PAM USER UNKNOWN No account present for user PAM BUF ERROR Memory buffer error PAM SYSTEM ERR System error The password management service returns the following values PAM SUCCESS Successfully updates authentication token PAM PERM DENIED No permission to update authentication token PAM AUTHTOK ERR Authentication token manipulation error PAM USER UNKNOWN No account present for user PAM BUF ERR Memory buffer error PAM SYSTEM ERR System error EXAMPLE 1 Using pam 1dap With Authentication The following is a configu
178. ate calendar bindings in the user s own context as in this example fnbind r thisuser service calendar onc calendar onc cal str jsmith beatrix The files object name that corresponds to an FNS composite name can be obtained using nlookup 1 and fnlist 1 The files used for storing FNS information are placed in the directory var fn The machine on which var n is located has access to the FNS file The FNS information can be made accessible to other machines by exporting var fn Client machines that NFS mount the var n directory would then be able to access the FNS information Standards Environments and Macros 71 fns files 5 SEE ALSO fnbind 1 fnlist 1 fnlookup 1 fnunbind 1 fncreate 1M fncreate fs 1M fndestroy 1M x n 3XEN ns 5 fns initial context 5 fns nis 5 fns nis 5 fns policies 5 fns references 5 72 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 13 Dec 1996 NAME DESCRIPTION fns initial context 5 fns initial context overview of the FNS Initial Context Every FNS name is interpreted relative to some context and every FNS naming operation is performed on a context object The FNS programming interface XFN provides a function that allows the client to obtain an Initial Context object The Initial Context provides the initial pathway to other FNS contexts FNS defines a set of bindings that the client can expect to find in this context ENS assumes
179. ating multiple naming services under a single simple interface for the basic naming operations One of the naming services supported by FNS is the X 500 Directory Service see ITU T X 500 or ISO IEC 9594 X 500 is a global directory service Its components cooperate to manage information about a hierarchy of objects on a worldwide scope Such objects include countries organizations people services and machines FNS uses X 500 to name entities globally FNS provides the XFN interface for retrieval and modification of information stored in X 500 In addition enterprise namespaces such as those served by NIS and NIS can be federated with X 500 by adding reference information to X 500 describing how to reach the desired next naming service To federate a NIS or NIS namespace under X 500 perform the following steps 1 Obtain the root reference for the NIS hierarchy or NIS domain 2 Enhance the X 500 schema to support the addition of XFN references 3 Create an X 500 entry to store the XFN reference 4 Add the XFN reference The root reference is referred to as the next naming system reference because it refers to the next naming system beneath X 500 This reference contains information about how to communicate with the NIS or NIS servers and has the following format domainname server name server address gt where domainname is the fully qualified domain name Notice that NIS and NIS have slightly different syntaxes
180. ation for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename bin ia64 usr subsystem bin sparcv9 SPARC 64 bit plattorm amp hyphen dependent user invoked executables This directory should not be part of a user s PATH A wrapper in usr bin should invoke the executable in this directory See isaexec 3C An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename bin sparcv9 54 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Nov 2001 filesystem 5 usr ccs C compilation system usr ccs bin C compilation commands and system utilities usr ccs lib Symbolic link to usr 1ib usr demo Demo programs and data usr dict Symbolic link to the usr share 1lib dict directory which contains the dictionary file used by the UNIX spell program usr dt root of a subtree for CDE software usr dt bin Primary location for CDE system utilities usr dt include Header files for CDE software usr dt lib Libraries for CDE software usr dt share man On line reference manual pages for CDE software usr games An empty directory a remnant of the SunOS 4 0 4 1 software usr include Include headers for C programs usr iplanet Directory server executables loadable modules and documentation usr j2se Java 2 SDK executables loadable modules and documentation usr java
181. ble Markup Language XML which is a markup language that represents management information in textual form In addition to the XML representation CIM information is also represented textually by the managed object format MOF These MOF representations are typically stored as text files that developers compile into a CIM Object Manager Tools and services that enable developers to create and Services management applications and instrumentation that manage heterogeneous computer environments include m Solaris WBEM Services 2 5 Solaris WBEM Software Development Kit 2 5 These services consist of a set of value added Services 2 5 components These services make it easier for developers to create management applications that run in the Solaris operating environment They also make the Solaris operating environment easier to manage Solaris WBEM Services 2 5 consists of m CIM Object Manager CIM Repository and MOF Compiler Standards Environments and Macros 341 wbem 5 Solaris WBEM Software Development Kit 2 5 m CIM and Solaris Schema which is an extension schema of CIM CIM and Solaris Schema is a collection of CIM classes that describe managed elements in the Solaris operating environment These classes are available from the CIM Object Manager at start up wm Solaris Providers which are programs that communicate information between the Solaris operating environment and the CIM Object Manager providers get and set dy
182. c Regular Expression BRE notation and construction rules described in the BASIC REGULAR EXPRESSIONS section apply to most utilities supporting regular expressions Some utilities instead support the Extended Regular Expressions ERE described in the EXTENDED REGULAR EXPRESSIONS section any exceptions for both cases are noted in the descriptions of the specific utilities using regular expressions Both BREs and EREs are supported by the Regular Expression Matching interfaces regcomp 3C and regexec 3C A BRE ordinary character a special character preceded by a backslash or a period matches a single character A bracket expression matches a single character or a single collating element See RE Bracket Expression below An ordinary character is a BRE that matches itself any character in the supported character set except for the BRE special characters listed in BRE Special Characters below The interpretation of an ordinary character preceded by a backslash is undefined except for 1 the characters and 2 the digits 1 to 9 inclusive see BREs Matching Multiple Characters below 3 acharacter inside a bracket expression A BRE special character has special properties in certain contexts Outside those contexts or when preceded by a backslash such a character will be a BRE that matches the special character itself The BRE special characters and the contexts in which they have their special meaning are LIA The pe
183. ce Stability 19 MT Level 22 authentication account session and password management PAM modules for Kerberos V5 pam krb5 273 authentication and password management module pam authtok check 265 authentication and password management module pam authtok get 267 authentication module for password pam passwd auth 283 availability attributes of interfaces 18 C C standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 C standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 character set description file charmap 26 charmap character set description file 26 Decimal Constants 28 Declarations 26 Format 27 Ranges of Symbolic Names 28 Symbolic Names 26 code set conversion tables iconv 122 code set conversion tables iconv 1250 107 code set conversion tables iconv 1251 113 code set conversion tables iconv 646 126 code set conversion tables iconv 852 129 code set conversion tables iconv 8859 1 135 code set conversion tables iconv 8859 2 141 code set conversion tables iconv 8859 5 147 code set conversion tables iconv_dhn 155 code set conversion tables iconv_koi8 r 159 code set conversion tables iconv mac cyr 167 code set conversion tables iconv_maz 175 code set conversion tables iconv pc cyr 179 code set conversion tables iconv_unicode 185 code set conversion tables iconv_1250 107 iconv_1251 113
184. ced first after the if any and the last within the bracket expression Note Latin 1 characters such as or are not printable in some locales for example the ja locale The following rules can be used to construct BREs matching multiple characters from BREs matching a single character 1 2 The concatenation of BREs matches the concatenation of the strings matched by each component of the BRE A subexpression can be defined within a BRE by enclosing it between the character pairs and Such a subexpression matches whatever it would have matched without the and V except that anchoring within subexpressions is optional behavior see BRE Expression Anchoring below Subexpressions can be arbitrarily nested Standards Environments and Macros 307 regex 5 308 BRE Precedence 3 The back reference expression n matches the same possibly empty string of characters as was matched by a subexpression enclosed between and preceding the n The character n must be a digit from 1 to 9 inclusive nth subexpression the one that begins with the nth and ends with the corresponding paired The expression is invalid if less than n subexpressions precede the Vr For example the expression 1 matches a line consisting of two adjacent appearances of the same string and the expression a 1 fails to match a The limit of nine back references to subexpressions in the RE is based on the use of
185. cess and modification times int futimesat int fd const char path const struct timeval times 2 The futimesat 2 function sets the access and modification times for a file If the path argument is relative it is resolved relative to the fd argument file descriptor otherwise the fd argument is ignored If the fd argument is the special value AT FDCWD the path is resolved relative to the current working directory If the path argument is a null pointer the function sets the access and modification times of the file referenced by the fd argument In all other relative path cases if the fd argument does not refer to a valid directory the function returns ENOTDIR The futimesat function can be used in place of utimes 2 The function call utimes path times is equivalent to futimesat AT FDCWD path times Standards Environments and Macros 101 fsattr 5 New pathconf functionality long int pathconf const char path int name Two variables have been added to pathcon 2 to provide enhanced support for extended attribute manipulation The XATTR ENABLED variable allows an application to determine if attribute support is currently enabled for the file in question The XATTR EXISTS variable allows an application to determine whether there are any extended attributes associated with the supplied path Open Create an attribute file int attropen const char path const char attrpath int oflag mode t model The attropen
186. ch procedure definitions occur as subexpressions of defuns sb str Regular expression for the start of a string se str Regular expression for the end of a string te str Use the named entry as a continuation of this one tl bool Present means procedures are only defined at the top lexical level 338 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 10 Aug 1994 Regular Expressions Keyword List EXAMPLES vgrindefs 5 vgrindefs uses regular expressions similar to those of ex 1 and 1ex 1 The characters and V are reserved characters and must be quoted with a preceding if they are to be included as normal characters The metasymbols and their meanings are The end of a line The beginning of a line d A delimiter space tab newline start of line a Matches any string of symbols like in lex p Matches any identifier In a procedure definition the pb capability the string that matches this symbol is used as the procedure name 0 Grouping Alternation Last item is optional Ve Preceding any string means that the string will not match an input string if the input string is preceded by an escape character This is typically used for languages like C that can include the string delimiter in a string by escaping it Unlike other regular expressions in the system these match words and not characters Hence something like tramp
187. cluded in a pattern bracket expression used for filename expansion For example the pattern a b c d will not match such pathnames as abd or a d It will only match a pathname of literally a b c d 2 Ifa filename begins with a period the period must be explicitly matched by using a period as the first character of the pattern or immediately following a slash character The leading period will not be matched by the asterisk or question mark special characters a bracket expression containing a non matching list such as 1a a range expression such as 0 or a character class expression such as punct It is unspecified whether an explicit period in a bracket expression matching list such as abc can match a leading period in a filename 3 Specified patterns are matched against existing filenames and pathnames as appropriate Each component that contains a pattern character requires read permission in the directory containing that component Any component except the last that does not contain a pattern character requires search permission For example given the pattern 00 bar x bamsearch permission is needed for directories and foo search and read permissions are needed for directory bar and search permission is Standards Environments and Macros 65 fnmatch 5 needed for each x directory If the pattern matches any existing filenames or pathnames the pattern will be replaced with t
188. cter The comment character defaults to the number sign 4t Blank lines and lines containing the comment character in the first position are ignored The first category header in the file can be preceded by a line modifying the escape character to be used in the file It has the following format starting in column 1 escape char c n escape character The escape character defaults to backslash A line can be continued by placing an escape character as the last character on the line this continuation character will be discarded from the input Although the implementation need not accept any one portion of a continued line with a length exceeding LINE MAX bytes it places no limits on the accumulated length of the continued line Comment lines cannot be continued on a subsequent line using an escaped newline character Individual characters characters in strings and collating elements must be represented using symbolic names as defined below In addition characters can be represented using the characters themselves or as octal hexadecimal or decimal constants When non symbolic notation is used the resultant locale definitions will in many cases not be portable between systems The left angle bracket is a reserved symbol denoting the start of a symbolic name when used to represent itself it must be preceded by the escape character The following rules apply to character representation 1 A character can be represen
189. ction 3 describes functions found in various libraries other than those functions that directly invoke UNIX system primitives which are described in Section 2 Section 4 outlines the formats of various files The C structure declarations for the file formats are given where applicable Section 5 contains miscellaneous documentation such as character set tables Section 6 contains available games and demos Section 7 describes various special files that refer to specific hardware peripherals and device drivers STREAMS software drivers modules and the STREAMS generic set of system calls are also described m Section 9 provides reference information needed to write device drivers in the kernel environment It describes two device driver interface specifications the Device Driver Interface DDI and the DriverKernel Interface DKI m Section 9E describes the DDI DKI DDI only and DKI only entry point routines a developer can include in a device driver m Section 9F describes the kernel functions available for use by device drivers m Section 9S describes the data structures used by drivers to share information between the driver and the kernel Below is a generic format for man pages The man pages of each manual section generally follow this order but include only needed headings For example if there are no bugs to report there is no BUGS section See the intro pages for more information and detail about each section and man 1 fo
190. cur 1 The option try first pass is specified and the password entered for the first module in the stack fails for the UNIX module Standards Environments and Macros 293 pam unix 5 UNIX Account Management Module UNIX Session Management Module UNIX Password Management Module 2 The option try first pass is not specified and the earlier authentication modules listed in the pam conf file have prompted the user for the password In these two cases the UNIX authentication module will use the prompt SYSTEM password The pam sm setcred function sets user specific credentials If the user had secure RPC credentials but the secure RPC password was not the same as the UNIX password then a warning message is printed If the user wants to get secure RPC credentials then keylogin 1 needs to be run The UNIX account management component provides a function to perform account management pam sm acct mgmt The function retrieves the user s password entry from the UNIX password database and verifies that the user s account and password have not expired The following options may be passed in to the UNIX service module debug syslog 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages The UNIX session management component provides functions to initiate pam sm open session and terminate pam sm close session UNIX sessions For UNIX pam open session updates the var adm lastlog file
191. currences The expression m matches exactly m occurrences of the preceding ERE m matches at least m occurrences and m n matches any number of occurrences between m and n inclusive For example in the string abababccccccd the ERE c 3 is matched by characters seven to nine and the ERE ab 2 is matched by characters one to six The behavior of multiple adjacent duplication symbols and intervals produces undefined results Two EREs separated by the special character vertical line 1 match a string that is matched by either For example the ERE a bc d matches the string abc and the string ad Single characters or expressions matching single characters separated by the vertical bar and enclosed in parentheses will be treated as an ERE matching a single character The order of precedence will be as shown in the following table ERE Precedence from high to low escaped characters bracket expression collation related bracket symbols 2 3 E dL lt special character Standards Environments and Macros 311 regex 5 312 ERE Expression Anchoring SEE ALSO grouping single character ERE duplication 2 m n concatenation anchoring A alternation For example the ERE abba cde matches either the string abba or the string cde rather than the string abbade or abbcde because concatenation has a higher order of precedence than alternation
192. d Framework V1 1 OCF with Sun extensions to allow OCF to operate in a multi user environment The core OCF software protocol stack is implemented as a system service daemon This implementation allows smart cards and card terminals to be shared cooperatively among many different clients on the system while providing access control to the smart card and card terminal resources on a per UID basis An event dispatcher is provided to inform clients of events occuring on the card and at the card terminal such as card insertion and card removal A high level authentication mechanism is provided to allow clients to perform smart card based authentications without requiring knowledge of specific card or reader authentication features A set of applet administration tools is provided for JavaCards that support downloading Java applets although applet build tools are not provided Administration of the smart card framework is provided with the smart card 1M command line administration utility and the smartcardguiadmin 1 GUI administration tool Support for several card terminals is provided m Sun External Smart Card Reader I see oc escr1 7D Sun Internal Smart Card Reader I see oc iscr1 7D Dallas iButton Serial Reader see oc ibutton 7D Additional card terminals can be supported by implementing smart card terminal interfaces in a shared library Support for several smart cards is provided m Schlumberger Cyberflex Acc
193. d and roman DT no Oi 1i Restore default tabs HP i yes i p i Begin paragraph with hanging indent Set prevailing indent to i rd no t n t l Text is italic IB t no t n t l Join words alternating italic and bold IPxi yes x Same as TP with tag x IR t no t n t l Join words alternating italic and roman 238 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 30 Jan 1995 Conventions Request IX t LP RB t RI t RS i SB t SH t SM t SS t THnsdfm TP i TXfp Cause Break no yes yes no yes yes no no yes no yes no yes yes yes no If no Argument t n t l t n t l i p i t n t l t n t l i p i man 5 Explanation Index macro for SunSoft internal use Begin left aligned paragraph Set prevailing indent to 5i Same as LP Set vertical distance between paragraphs Same as LP End of relative indent Restores prevailing indent Join words alternating roman and bold Join words alternating roman and italic Start relative indent increase indent by i Sets prevailing indent to 5i for nested indents Reduce size of text by 1 point make text bold Section Heading Reduce size of text by 1 point Section Subheading Begin reference page n of of section s d is the date of the most recent change If present f is the left page footer m is the main page cen
194. d file attributes 96 l iconv code set conversion tables 122 iconv_1250 code set conversion tables for MS 1250 Windows Latin 2 107 iconv_1251 code set conversion tables for MS 1251 Windows Cyrillic 113 iconv_646 code set conversion tables for ISO 646 126 iconv_852 code set conversion tables for MS 852 MS DOS Latin 2 129 iconv_8859 1 code set conversion tables for ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 135 iconv_8859 2 code set conversion tables for ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 141 iconv_8859 5 code set conversion tables for ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic 147 iconv_dhn code set conversion tables for DHN Dom Handlowy Nauki 155 iconv_koi8 r code set conversion tables for KOI8 R 159 iconv_mac_cyr code set conversion tables for Macintosh Cyrillic 167 iconv maz code set conversion tables for Mazovia 175 iconv pc cyr code set conversion tables for Alternative PC Cyrillic 179 iconv unicode code set conversion tables for Unicode 185 internationalized basic and extended regular expression matching regex 304 isalist the native instruction sets known to Solaris 190 ISO standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 L large file status of utilities largefile 192 largefile large file status of utilities 192 Large file aware utilities 192 Large file safe utilities 194 1f64 transitional interfaces for 64 bit file offsets 196 Data Types 196 Syst
195. d for network services for which it is entitled for example a user with a valid SEAM ticket may rlogin into another machine running SEAM without having to identify itself Because each client has a unique ticket its identity is guaranteed To obtain tickets a client must first initialize the SEAM session either by using the kinit 1 command or a PAM module See pam krb5 5 kinit prompts for a password and then communicates with a Key Distribution Center KDC The KDC returns a Ticket Granting Ticket TGT and prompts for a confirmation password If the client confirms the password it can use the Ticket Granting Ticket to obtain tickets for specific network services Because tickets are granted transparently the user need not worry about their management Current tickets may be viewed by using the klist 1 command Tickets are valid according to the system policy set up at installation time For example tickets have a default lifetime for which they are valid A policy may further dictate that privileged tickets such as those belonging to root have very short lifetimes Policies may allow some defaults to be overruled for example a client may request a ticket with a lifetime greater or less than the default Tickets can be renewed using kinit Tickets are also forwardable allowing you to use a ticket granted on one machine on a different host Tickets can be destroyed by using kdestroy 1 It is a good idea to include a call to kdestr
196. d in detail in the following sections Define a collating element symbol representing a multi character collating element This keyword is optional Define a collating symbol for use in collation order statements This keyword is optional Define collation rules This statement is followed by one or more collation order statements assigning character collation values and collation weights to collating elements 10 Specify the end of the collation order statements In addition to the collating elements in the character set the collating element keyword is used to define multi character collating elements The syntax is collating element s from s n collating symbol lt string gt 220 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 collating symbol keyword order start keyword locale 5 The lt collating symbol gt operand is a symbolic name enclosed between angle brackets lt and gt and must not duplicate any symbolic name in the current charmap file if any or any other symbolic name defined in this collation definition The string operand is a string of two or more characters that collates as an entity A lt collating element gt defined via this keyword is only recognized with the LC COLLATE category For example collating element ch from c h collating element e acute from lt acute gt lt e gt collating element 11 from 11 This
197. d unchanged Conversions Performed MS 1251 Mac Cyrillic MS 1251 Mac Cyrillic 24 4 260 241 200 253 262 247 201 256 263 264 202 40 264 266 203 257 266 246 204 327 267 245 205 311 270 336 206 240 271 334 207 211 40 272 271 212 274 273 310 213 40 274 300 214 276 275 301 215 315 276 317 216 40 277 273 217 332 300 200 220 254 301 201 221 324 302 202 222 325 303 203 223 322 304 204 Standards Environments and Macros 119 iconv_1251 5 120 Conversions Performed MS 1251 Mac Cyrillic MS 1251 Mac Cyrillic 224 225 226 227 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 250 252 253 254 255 256 257 355 323 40 320 321 40 252 275 40 277 316 40 333 312 330 331 267 377 242 40 244 335 270 307 302 55 250 272 316 305 306 307 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 FILES SEE ALSO usr lib iconv so usr lib iconv t usr lib iconv iconv data iconv 1 iconv 3C iconv 5 iconv_1251 5 conversion modules conversion tables list of conversions supported by conversion tables Sta
198. date The character indicates that years closer to the start date have higher numbers than those closer to the end date offset The number of the year closest to the start date in the era start date A date in the form yyyy mm dd where yyyy mm and dd are the year month and day numbers respectively of the start of the era Years prior to AD 1 are represented as negative numbers end_date The ending date of the era in the same format as the start_date or one of the two special values or The value indicates that the ending date is the beginning of 234 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 ERA D FMT ERA T FMT ERA D T FMT locale 5 time The value indicates that the ending date is the end of time era name The era corresponding to the EC conversion specification era format The format of the year in the era corresponding to the EY and EY conversion specifications The era date format The locale s appropriate alternative time format corresponding to the EX field descriptor The locale s appropriate alternative date and time format corresponding to the Ec field descriptor ALT DIGITS The alternative symbols for digits corresponding to the O conversion specification modifier The value consists of semicolon separated symbols The first is the alternative symbol corresponding to zero the second is the symbol corre
199. des functions to verify the identity of a user pam sm authenticate and to set user specific credentials pam sm setcred pam sm authenticate compares the user entered password with the password from the UNIX password database If the passwords match the user is authenticated If the user also has secure RPC credentials and the secure RPC password is the same as the UNIX password then the secure RPC credentials are also obtained The following options may be passed to the UNIX service module debug syslog 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages use first pass It compares the password in the password database with the user s initial password entered when the user authenticated to the first authentication module in the stack If the passwords do not match or if no password has been entered it quits and does not prompt the user for a password This option should only be used if the authentication service is designated as optional in the pam conf configuration file try first pass It compares the password in the password database with the user s initial password entered when the user authenticated to the first authentication module in the stack If the passwords do not match or if no password has been entered prompt the user for a password When prompting for the current password the UNIX authentication module will use the prompt password unless one of the following scenarios oc
200. dial auth 5 272 4 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros September 2004 pam krb5 5 273 pam ldap 5 278 pam passwd auth 5 283 pam projects 5 285 pam rhosts auth 5 286 pam roles 5 287 pam sample 5 289 pam smartcard 5 291 pam unix 5 293 pam unix account 5 296 pam unix auth 5 297 pam unix session b 299 prof 5 300 rbac 5 301 regex 5 304 regexp 5 313 SEAM 5 320 sgml 5 322 smartcard 5 326 standards 5 328 sticky 5 333 term 5 334 vgrindefs 5 338 wbem 5 341 Index 345 6 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros September 2004 Preface Both novice users and those familar with the SunOS operating system can use online man pages to obtain information about the system and its features A man page is intended to answer concisely the question What does it do The man pages in general comprise a reference manual They are not intended to be a tutorial Overview The following contains a brief description of each man page section and the information it references Section 1 describes in alphabetical order commands available with the operating system Section 1M describes in alphabetical order commands that are used chiefly for system maintenance and administration purposes Section 2 describes all of the system calls Most of these calls have one or more error returns An error condition is indicated by an otherwise impossible returned value Se
201. diff diff3 diffmk ed lp mail mailcompat mailstats mailx pack pcat red rmail sdiff unpack vi view The following usr xpg4 bin utilities are large file safe ed vi view The following usr sbin utilities are large file safe Ipfilter Ipforms The following usr ucb utilities are large file safe 194 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 16 Jul 2003 largefile 5 Mail lpr The following usr lib utility is large file safe sendmail SEE ALSO 1 64 5 1 compile 5 l1 compile64 5 Standards Environments and Macros 195 1f64 5 NAME DESCRIPTION Data Types 1f64 transitional interfaces for 64 bit file offsets The data types interfaces and macros described on this page provide explicit access to 64 bit file offsets They are accessible through the transitional compilation environment described on the 1 compile64 5 manual page The function prototype and semantics of a transitional interface are equivalent to those of the standard version of the call except that relevant data types are 64 bit entities The following tables list the standard data or struct types in the left hand column and their corresponding explicit 64 bit file offset types in the right hand column grouped by header The absence of an entry in the left hand column indicates that there is no existing explicit 32 bit type that corresponds to the 64 bit type listed in the right hand column Note that
202. digit lower upper and space have a set of automatically included characters These only need to be specified if the character values that is encoding differ from the implementation default values cswidth Moved to extensions file see extensions 5 upper Define characters to be classified as upper case letters In the POSIX locale the 26 upper case letters are included ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ In a locale definition file no character specified for the keywords cntrl digit punct or space can be specified The upper case letters A to Z are automatically included in this class lower Define characters to be classified as lower case letters In the POSIX locale the 26 lower case letters are included abcdefghijkimnopqrstuvwxwyz Standards Environments and Macros 215 locale 5 In a locale definition file no character specified for the keywords cntr1 digit punct or space can be specified The lower case letters a to z of the portable character set are automatically included in this class alpha Define characters to be classified as letters In the POSIX locale all characters in the classes upper and lower are included In a locale definition file no character specified for the keywords cntrl digit punct or space can be specified Characters classified as either upper or lower are automatically included in this class digit Define the characters to be classified as numeric digits In the POSIX loc
203. disk devices dev printers USB printer device files dev pts Pseudo terminal devices dev rdsk Raw disk devices dev rmt Raw tape devices dev sad Entry points for the STREAMS Administrative driver dev sound Audio device and audio device control files dev swap Default swap device dev term Terminal devices devices Physical device files etc Platform amp hyphen dependent administrative and configuration files and databases that are not shared among systems etc may be viewed as the directory that Standards Environments and Macros 45 filesystem 5 46 man pages section 5 e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e defines the machine s identity An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is etc opt packagename tc acct Accounting system configuration information tc apache Apache configuration files tc cron d Configuration information for cron 1M tc default Defaults information for various programs tc dfs Configuration information for shared file systems tc dhcp Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP configuration files tc dmi Solstice Enterprise Agents configuration files tc fn Federated Naming Service and X 500 support files tc fs Binaries organized by file system types for operations required before
204. dule for UNIX pam unix session so 1 pam unix session provides functions to initiate pam sm open session 3PAM and to terminate pam sm close session 3PAM pam open session updates the var adm lastlog file The account management module reads this file to determine the previous time the user logged in pam sm close session is a null function The following options can be passed to the module debug syslog 3C debugging information at the LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages The following values are returned PAM SUCCESS Successful completiton PAM SESSION ERR Can not make or remove the entry for the specified session PAM USER UNKNOWN No account is present for user See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Interface Stability Evolving MT Level MT Safe with exceptions pam 3PAM pam authenticate 3PAM syslog 3C 1ibpam 3LIB pam con 4 nsswitch conf 4 attributes 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5
205. e c beta char May A character can be represented as an octal constant An octal constant is specified as the escape character followed by two or more octal digits Each constant represents a byte value Multi byte values can be represented by concatenated constants specified in byte order with the last constant specifying the least significant byte of the character For example 143 347 143 150 115 141 171 A character can be represented as a hexadecimal constant A hexadecimal constant is specified as the escape character followed by an x followed by two or more hexadecimal digits Each constant represents a byte value Multi byte values can be represented by concatenated constants specified in byte order with the last constant specifying the least significant byte of the character For example x63 xe7 x63 x68 x4d x61 x79 A character can be represented as a decimal constant A decimal constant is specified as the escape character followed by a d followed by two or more decimal digits Each constant represents a byte value Multi byte values can be represented by concatenated constants specified in byte order with the last constant specifying the least significant byte of the character For example d99 d231 d99 d104 d77 d97 d121 214 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 LC CTYPE locale 5 Only characters existing in the character set for which the local
206. e SPACE characters in a word If text is empty the special treatment is applied to the next input line with text to be printed In this way I may be used to italicize a whole line or SB may be used to make small bold letters A prevailing indent distance is remembered between successive indented paragraphs and is reset to default value upon reaching a non indented paragraph Default units for indents i are ens Type font and size are reset to default values before each paragraph and after processing font and size setting macros These strings are predefined by mansun VER amp Reg in nroff NS Change to default type size Requests n t l next text line p i prevailing indent Request Cause If no Explanation Break Argument B t no t n t L Text is in bold font BI f no t n t Join words alternating bold and italic BR f no t n t l Join words alternating bold and Roman DT no Oi 1i Restore default tabs HP i yes i p i Begin paragraph with hanging indent Set prevailing indent to i rd no t n t l Text is italic IB t no t n t l Join words alternating italic and bold IPxi yes x Same as TP with tag x IR t no t n t l Join words alternating italic and Roman 242 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 11 Jun 1992 Conventions Request IX t LP RB t RI t RS i SB t SH t SM t SS t THnsdfm TP i
207. e a BE other than the current BE as the source for a new BE Also you can create an empty BE onto which you can later install a flash archive 2 Using luupgrade 1M you upgrade the OS version on your new BE or on yet another BE you created with lucreate The luupgrade enables you to upgrade an OS from any valid Solaris installation medium including a flash archive add or remove packages OS or application and add or remove patches 3 You use luactivate 1M to make the new BE bootable The next time you reboot your system you will come up in the new BE Standards Environments and Macros 209 live upgrade 5 4 Using lucompare 1M you compare the system files on two different BEs This utility gives you a comprehensive list of the files that have differences 5 Using lumount 1M you mount the filesystems of a BE that is not active enabling you to make changes When you are finished with the changes use 1uumount 1M to unmount the BE s file systems 6 Upon booting a new BE you discover a failure or some other undesirable behavior Using the procedure specified in luactivate you can fall back to the previous BE 7 Using ludelete then lucreate you reassign file systems on the now deleted BE to different disk slices You separate opt and var from on the new BE Also you specify that swap be spread over slices on multiple disks The following is a summary of Live Upgrade commands All commands require root pri
208. e definition is created can be specified whether using symbolic names the characters themselves or octal decimal or hexadecimal constants If a charmap file is present only characters defined in the charmap can be specified using octal decimal or hexadecimal constants Symbolic names not present in the charmap file can be specified and will be ignored as specified under item 1 above The LC CTYPE category defines character classification case conversion and other character attributes In addition a series of characters can be represented by three adjacent periods representing an ellipsis symbol The ellipsis specification is interpreted as meaning that all values between the values preceding and following it represent valid characters The ellipsis specification is valid only within a single encoded character set that is within a group of characters of the same size An ellipsis is interpreted as including in the list all characters with an encoded value higher than the encoded value of the character preceding the ellipsis and lower than the encoded value of the character following the ellipsis For example NX30 x39 includes in the character class all characters with encoded values between the endpoints The following keywords are recognized In the descriptions the term automatically included means that it is not an error either to include or omit any of the referenced characters The character classes digit x
209. e file Coded character set character values are defined using symbolic character names followed by character encoding values The character set description file provides The capability to describe character set attributes such as collation order or character classes independent of character set encoding and using only the characters in the portable character set This makes it possible to create generic localedef 1 source files for all codesets that share the portable character set m Standardized symbolic names for all characters in the portable character set making it possible to refer to any such character regardless of encoding Each symbolic name is included in the file and is mapped to a unique encoding value except for those symbolic names that are shown with identical glyphs If the control characters commonly associated with the symbolic names in the following table are supported by the implementation the symbolic names and their corresponding encoding values are included in the file Some of the encodings associated with the symbolic names in this table may be the same as characters in the portable character set table lt ACK gt lt DC2 gt lt ENQ gt lt FS gt lt IS4 gt lt SOH gt lt BEL gt lt DC3 gt lt EOT gt lt GS gt lt LF gt lt STX gt lt BS gt lt DC4 gt lt ESC gt lt HT gt lt NAK gt lt SUB gt lt CAN gt lt DEL gt lt ETB gt lt IS1 gt lt RS gt lt SYN gt lt CR gt lt DLE gt l
210. e following values are returned PAM AUTH ERR Authentication failure PAM BUF ERR Memory buffer error PAM IGNORE Ignore module not participating in result PAM PERM DENIED Permission denied PAM SUCCESS Successfully obtains authentication token PAM SYSTEM ERR System error PAM USER UNKNOWN No account present for user See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Interface Stability Evolving MT Level MT Safe with exceptions pam 3PAM pam authenticate 3PAM syslog 3C 1ibpam 3LIB pam con 4 nsswitch conf 4 attributes 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix session 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle Standards Environments and Macros 297 pam unix auth 5 The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 298 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 21 Jan 2003 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION ERRORS ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES pam unix session 5 pam unix session session management PAM mo
211. e initial substring of string matches the regular expression in expbuf If there is a match an external character pointer 10c2 is set as a side effect The variable 1oc2 points to the next character in string after the last character that matched When advance encounters a or sequence in the regular expression it will advance its pointer to the string to be matched as far as possible and will recursively call itself trying to match the rest of the string to the rest of the regular expression As long as there is no match advance will back up along the string until it finds a match or reaches the point in the string that initially matched the or V It is sometimes desirable to stop this backing up before the initial point in the string is reached If the external character pointer locs is equal to the point in the string at sometime during the backing up process advance will break out of the loop that backs up and will return zero The external variables circf sed and nbra are reserved EXAMPLE 1 The following is an example of how the regular expression macros and calls might be defined by an application program define INIT register char sp instring define GETC sp define PEEKC sp define UNGETC c sp define RETURN c return define ERROR c regerr include lt regexp h gt void compile argv expbuf amp expbuf ESIZE 0 if step linebuf expbuf succeed The func
212. e is an extended version written at Berkeley and is a superset of the standard ms macro packages as supplied by Bell Labs Some of the Bell Labs macros have been removed for instance it is assumed that the user has little interest in producing headers stating that the memo was generated at Whippany Labs Many nroff and troff requests are unsafe in conjunction with this package However the first four requests below may be used with impunity after initialization and the last two may be used even before initialization bp begin new page br break output line Spn insert n spacing lines cen center next n lines lsn line spacing 1 1 single n 2 double space na no alignment of right margin Font and point size changes with f and Vs are also allowed for example Iword fR will italicize word Output of the tb1 1 eqn 1 and refer 1 preprocessors for equations tables and references is acceptable as input Break Macro Name Initial Value Reset Explanation ABX y begin abstract if x no do not label abstract AE y end abstract AI y author s institution AM n better accent mark definitions AU y author s name Bx n embolden x if no x switch to boldface B1 y begin text to be enclosed in a box B2 y end boxed text and print it man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 25 Feb 1992 ms 5
213. e the last character read by GETC The return value of the macro UNGETC c is always ignored RETURN ptr This macro is used on normal exit of the compile routine The value of the argument ptr is a pointer to the character after the last character of the compiled regular expression This is useful to programs which have memory allocation to manage ERROR val This macro is the abnormal return from the compile routine The argument val is an error number see ERRORS below for meanings This call should never return The syntax of the compile routine is as follows compile instring expbuf endbuf eof The first parameter instring is never used explicitly by the compile routine but is useful for programs that pass down different pointers to input characters It is sometimes used in the INIT declaration see below Programs which call functions to input characters or have characters in an external array can pass down a value of char 0 for this parameter The next parameter expbuf is a character pointer It points to the place where the compiled regular expression will be placed The parameter endbuf is one more than the highest address where the compiled regular expression may be placed If the compiled expression cannot fit in endbuf expbuf bytes a call to ERROR 50 is made The parameter eof is the character which marks the end of the regular expression This character is usually a Each program that i
214. e the meeting schedules of the organizational unit EXAMPLE 2 The types of objects that may be named relative to a site name are services and files Here are some examples of names that name objects relative to sites Site b5 mtv service printer speedy names a printer speedy in the b5 mtv site site admin fs usr dist names a file directory usr dist available in the site admin EXAMPLE 3 The types of objects that may be named relative to a user name are services and files Here are some examples of names that name objects relative to users user jsmith service calendar names the calendar service of the user j smith Standards Environments and Macros 83 fns policies 5 84 SEE ALSO EXAMPLE 3 The types of objects that may be named relative to a user name are services and files Here are some examples of names that name objects relative to users Continued user jsmith fs bin games riddles names the file bin games riddles of the user j smith EXAMPLE 4 The types of objects that may be named relative to a host name are services and files Here are some examples of names that name objects relative to hosts host mailhop service mailbox names the mailbox service associated with the machine mailhop host mailhop fs pub saf archives 91 names the directory pub saf archives 91 found under the root directory of the machine mailhop ncreate 1M nis 1 x n 3XEN ns 5 ns initial context 5 fns references 5 m
215. e user ID of root Typically this means that the file modes for the file would be rwsr xr x with root ownership man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Jul 2003 SEE ALSO rbac 5 Use caution though when making programs setuid to root For example the effective UID should be set to the real UID as early as possible in the program s initialization function The effective UID can then be set back to root after the authorization check is performed and before the system call is made On return from the system call the effective UID should be set back to the real UID again to adhere to the principle of least privilege Another consideration is that LD LIBRARY path is ignored for setuid programs see SECURITY section in 1d so 1 1 and that shell scripts must be modified to work properly when the effective and real UIDs are different For example the p flag in Bourne shell is required to avoid resetting the effective UID back to the real UID Using an effective UID of root instead of the real UID requires extra care when writing shell scripts For example many shell scripts check to see if the user is root before executing their functionality With RBAC these shell scripts may be running with the effective UID of root and with a real UID of a user or role Thus the shell script should check euid instead of uid For example WHO id cut f1 d if WHO uid 0 root then echo P
216. e with them as soon as possible Unfortunately new technologies are prone to changes and standardization often results in interface incompatibility from previous versions To make reasonable risk assessments developers need to know how likely an interface is to change in future releases To aid developers in making these assessments interface stability information is included on some manual pages for commands entry points and file formats The more stable interfaces can safely be used by nearly all applications because Sun will endeavor to ensure that these continue to work in future minor releases Applications that depend only on Standard and Stable interfaces should reliably continue to function correctly on future minor releases but not necessarily on earlier major releases The less stable interfaces allow experimentation and prototyping but should be used only with the understanding that they might change incompatibly or even be dropped or replaced with alternatives in future minor releases Interfaces that Sun does not document for example most kernel data structures and some symbols in system header files may be implementation artifacts Such internal interfaces are not only subject to incompatible change or removal but we are unlikely to mention such a change in release notes Products are given release levels as well as names to aid compatibility discussions Each release level may also include changes suitable for lowe
217. e64 5 202 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Aug 2001 Ifcompile 5 NAME lfcompile large file compilation environment for 32 bit applications DESCRIPTION All 64 bit applications can manipulate large files by default The methods described on this page allow 32 bit applications to manipulate large files In the large file compilation environment source interfaces are bound to appropriate 64 bit functions structures and types Compiling in this environment allows 32 bit applications to access files whose size is greater than or equal to 2 Gbyte 2 bytes Each interface named xxx that needs to access 64 bit entities to access large files maps to a xxx64 call in the resulting binary All relevant data types are defined to be of correct size for example off t has a typedef definition for a 64 bit entity An application compiled in this environment is able to use the xxx source interfaces to access both large and small files rather than having to explicitly utilize the transitional xxx64 interface calls to access large files See the 1 compile64 5 manual page for information regarding the transitional compilation environment Applications can be compiled in the large file compilation environment by using the following methods m Use the getconf 1 utility with one or more of the arguments listed in the table below This method is recommended for portable applications
218. eatedly used for the remainder of the digits If the last integer is 1 then no further grouping will be performed The non monetary numeric formatting definitions for the POSIX locale follow the code listing depicting the 1ocaledef input the table representing the same information with the addition of localeconv values and n1 langinfo constants LC NUMERIC This is the POSIX locale definition for the LC NUMERIC category decimal_point lt period gt thousands sep mai grouping 1 END LC_NUMERIC POSIX locale langinfo localeconv localedef Constant Value Value 230 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 LC TIME locale 5 decimal point mM RADIXCHAR mun thousands sep n a THOUSEP rn TM grouping n a wi 1 The entry n a indicates that the value is not available in the POSIX locale The LC TIME category defines the interpretation of the field descriptors supported by date 1 and affects the behavior of the strftime 3C wcsftime 3C strptime 3C and nl langinfo 3C functions Because the interfaces for C language access and locale definition differ significantly they are described separately For locale definition the following mandatory keywords are recognized abday Define the abbreviated weekday names corresponding to the a field descriptor conversion specification in the strftime wcsftime and strptime functions The operand consists of seve
219. ect with an Internet address The address contains an internet IP address in dotted string form for example 192 144 2 3 x500 For an X 500 object The address contains an X 500 Distinguished Name in the syntax specified in the X Open DCE Directory Services osi paddr For an object with an OSI presentation address The address contains the string encoding of an OSI Presentation Address as defined in A string encoding of Presentation Address RFC 1278 onc printers bsaddr For a printer that understands the BSD print protocol The address contains the machine name and printer name used by the protocol onc printers use For a printer alias The address contains a printer name onc printers all For a list of printers that are enumerated using the all option The address contains a list of printer names onc printers location For a printer s location The address format is unspecified onc printers type For a printer s type The address format is unspecified onc printers speed For a printer s speed The address format is unspecified mount 1M fn ctx handle from ref 3XEN xfn 3XEN ns 5 fns policies 5 Hardcastle Kille S E A string encoding of Presentation Address RFC 1278 University College London November 1991 Standards Environments and Macros 87 fns x500 5 NAME DESCRIPTION fns x500 overview of ENS over X 500 implementation Federated Naming Service FNS provides a method for feder
220. ed as part of the shell environment in the environment variable TERM See sh 1 profile 4 and environ 5 These names are used by certain commands for example tabs tput and vi and certain functions for example see curses 3CURSES Files under usr share lib terminfo are used to name terminals and describe their capabilities These files are in the format described in terminfo 4 Entries in terminfo source files consist of a number of comma separated fields To print a description of a terminal term use the command in ocmp I term See infocmp 1M White space after each comma is ignored The first line of each terminal description in the terminfo database gives the names by which terminfo knows the terminal separated by bar characters The first name given is the most common abbreviation for the terminal this is the one to use to set the environment variable TERMINFO in HOME profile see profile 4 the last name given should be a long name fully identifying the terminal and all others are understood as synonyms for the terminal name All names but the last should contain no blanks and must be unique in the first 14 characters the last name may contain blanks for readability Terminal names except for the last verbose entry should be chosen using the following conventions The particular piece of hardware making up the terminal should have a root name chosen for example for the AT amp T 4425 terminal att4425 This name sho
221. ed to construct a package of configuration information to send to each DHCP client There exists only one dheptab for the DHCP service The dheptab 4 can be viewed and modified using the dhtadm 1M command or dhcpmgr 1M graphical utility See dhcptab 4 for more information about the syntax of dhcptab records See dhcp inittab 4 for more information about the DHCP options and symbols DHCP network tables DHCP network tables which contain mappings of client IDs to IP addresses and parameters associated with those addresses Network tables are named with the IP address of the network and can be created viewed and modified using the pntadm command or dhepmgr graphical utility See dhcp network 4 for more information about network tables Standards Environments and Macros 33 dhep 5 SEE ALSO dhepinfo 1 dhcpagent 1M dhcpconfig 1M dhcpmgr 1M dhtadm 1M ifconfig 1M in dhcpa 1M netstat 1M pntadm 1M syslog 3C dhcp network 4 dhcptab 4 dhcpsvc conf 4 dhcp inittab 4 dhcp modules 5 Solaris DHCP Service Developer s Guide Alexander S and R Droms RFC 2132 DHCP Options and BOOTP Vendor Extensions Silicon Graphics Inc Bucknell University March 1997 Droms R RFC 1534 Interoperation Between DHCP and BOOTP Bucknell University October 1993 Droms R RFC 2131 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Bucknell University March 1997 Wimer W RFC 1542 Clarifications and Extensions for the Bootst
222. efining a locale They are also similar to the member names of the 1conv structure defined in lt locale h gt The localeconv function returns CHAR MAX for unspecified integer items and the empty string for unspecified or size zero string items Standards Environments and Macros 225 locale 5 available in the locale int curr symbol currency symbol mon decimal point mon thousands sep mon grouping In a locale definition file the operands are strings For some keywords the strings can contain only integers Keywords that are not provided string values set to the empty string or integer keywords set to 1 are used to indicate that the value is not The international currency symbol The operand is a four character string with the first three characters containing the alphabetic international currency symbol in accordance with those specified in the ISO 4217 1987 standard The fourth character is the character used to separate the international currency symbol from the monetary quantity The string used as the local currency symbol The operand is a string containing the symbol that is used as the decimal delimiter radix character in monetary formatted quantities In contexts where standards such as the ISO C standard limit the mon decimal point to a single byte the result of specifying a multi byte operand is unspecified The operand is a string containing the symbol that is used as a separator
223. em Interfaces 198 Ifcompile large file compilation environment Access to Additional Large File Interfaces 203 Ifcompile64 transitional compilation environment 206 Access to Additional Large File Interfaces 206 live upgrade 208 locale subset of a user s environment that depends on language and cultural conventions 212 collating element keyword 220 collating symbol keyword 221 Collation Order 222 LC COLLATE 219 LC CTYPE 215 LC MESSAGES 236 LC MONETARY 225 LC NUMERIC 229 LC TIME 231 LC TIME C language Access 233 LC TIME General Information 236 347 locale subset of a user s environment that depends on language and cultural conventions Continued Locale Definition 212 order end keyword 225 order start keyword 221 localedef extensions description file extensions 43 M macros to format articles theses and books mm 251 to format articles theses and books ms 258 to format Manual pages man 238 to format Manual pages mansun 242 to format technical papers me 246 man macros to format manual pages 238 mansun macros to format manual pages 242 manual pages macros to format manual pages man 238 Sun macros to format manual pages mansun 242 mark files for special treatment sticky 333 me macros to format technical papers 246 mm macros to format articles theses and books 251 ms macros to format articles theses and books 258 MT
224. ember body 2 ansi 840 sun 113536 30 nNSReferenceString ATTRIBUTE WITH SYNTAX OCTET STRING EQUALITY MATCHING RULE octetStringMatch SINGLE VALUE TRUE ID id at nNSReferenceString id at nNSReferenceString OBJECT IDENTIFIER so member body 2 ansi 840 sun 113536 31 The procedures for altering the X 500 schema will vary from implementation to implementation Consult Solstice X 500 or the schema administration guide for your X 500 product Once X 500 supports XFN references the next naming system reference can be added by first creating an X 500 object and then adding the new reference to it For example the following commands create entries for the Wiz and Woz organizations in the U S A and add the reference information shown in the examples above to them For NIS example fnattr c us o wiz a objectclass top organization xfnsupplement example fnbind r c us o wiz onc fn enterprise onc fn nisplus root wiz com wiz nisplus server For NIS example fnattr c us o woz a objectclass top organization xfnsupplement examples fnbind r c us o woz onc fn enterprise onc fn nis root Woz COM woz nis server Notice the mandatory trailing slash in the name argument to nbina 1 Standards Environments and Macros 89 fns x500 5 90 SEE ALSO NOTES This modification effectively adds the next naming system reference to X 500 The reference may be retrieved
225. en locales Not every object in Solaris 2 and Solaris 7can have names composed of arbitrary characters The names of the following objects must be composed of ASCII characters User names group name and passwords System name Names of printers and special devices 18 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Aug 2001 Interface Stability Release Levels attributes 5 Names of terminals dev tty Process ID numbers Message queues semaphores and shared memory labels The following may be composed of ISO Latin 1 or EUC characters File names Directory names Command names Shell variables and environmental variable names Mount points for file systems NIS key names and domain names m The names of NFS shared files should be composed of ASCII characters Although files and directories may have names and contents composed of characters from non ASCII code sets using only the ASCII codeset allows NFS mounting across any machine regardless of localization For the commands and utilities that are CSI enabled all can handle single byte and multi byte locales released in 2 6 For applications to get full support of internationalization services dynamic binding has to be applied Statically bound programs will only get support for C and POSIX locales Sun often provides developers with early access to new technologies which allows developers to evaluat
226. en resetting these values make sure to specify the appropriate units Setting the line length to 7 for example will result in output with one character per line Setting FF to 1 suppresses footnote superscripting setting it to 2 also suppresses indentation of the first line and setting it to 3 produces an 1P like footnote paragraph Standards Environments and Macros 261 ms 5 262 Here is a list of string registers available in ms they may be used anywhere in the text Name String s Function Q quote innroff introff U unquote innroff introff dash innroff introff MO month month of the year DY day current date xx automatically numbered footnote Nord acute accent before letter yes grave accent before letter circumflex before letter cedilla before letter umlaut before letter tilde before letter When using the extended accent mark definitions available with AM these strings should come after rather than before the letter to be accented FILES usr share lib tmac s usr share lib tmac ms SEE ALSO co1 1 eqn 1 nro 1 refer 1 tb1 1 trof 1 BUGS Floating keeps and regular keeps are diverted to the same space so they cannot be mixed together with predictable results man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 25 Feb 1992 NAME DESCRIPTION
227. ent authentication token in the PAM OLDAUTHTOK item the new to be checked password in the PAM AUTHTOK item and the login name in the PAM USER item The checks performed by this module are length The password length should not be less that the minimum specified in etc default passwd circular shift The password should not be a circular shift of the login name complexity The password should contain at least two alpha characters and one numeric or special character variation The old and new passwords must differ by at least three positions The following option may be passed to the module debug syslog 3C debugging information at the LOG DEBUG level If the password in PAM AUTHTOK passes all tests PAM_SUCCESS is returned If any of the tests fail PAM AUTHTOK ERR is returned etc default passwd Contains the value for PASSLENGTH the default minimal password length See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Interface Stability Evolving MT Level MT Safe with exceptions passwd 1 pam 3PAM pam chauthtok 3PAM syslog 3C 1ibpam 3LIB pam conf 4 attributes 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle Standards Env
228. enterprise myens user hdiffie names the user hdiffie in U s enterprise myens service teletax names the teletax service of U s enterprise EXAMPLE 2 Names beginning with organizational unit names The types of objects that may be named relative to an organizational unit name are user host service file and site Here are some examples of names that begin with organizational unit names either explicitly via org or implicitly via thisorgunit or myorgunit and name objects relative to organizational unit names when resolved in the Initial Context org accounts payable finance site videoconference northwing names a conference room videoconference located in the north wing of the site associated with the organizational unit accounts payable finance 74 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Nov 1994 fns initial context 5 EXAMPLE 2 Names beginning with organizational unit names Continued org finance user mjones names a user mjones in the organizational unit finance org finance host inmail names a machine inmail belonging to the organizational unit finance org accounts payable finance fs pub blue and whites FY92 124 names a file pub blue and whites FY92 124 belonging to the organizational unit accounts payable finance org accounts payable finance service calendar names the calendar service of the organizational unit accounts payable finance This might manage the meeting sched
229. entions The set locale 3C function checks the LANG environment variable when it is called with as the locale argument LANG is used as the default locale if the corresponding environment variable for a particular category is unset or null If however LC_ALL is set to a valid non empty value its contents are used to override both the LANG and the other LC variables For example when invoked as setlocale LC_CTYPE setlocale will query the LC CTYPE environment variable first to see if it is set and non null If LC CTYPE is not set or null then set1ocale will check the LANG environment variable to see if it is set and non null If both LANG and LC CTYPE are unset or NULL the default C locale will be used to set the LC CTYPE category Most commands will invoke set1ocale LC ALL prior to any other processing This allows the command to be used with different national conventions by setting the appropriate environment variables The following environment variables correspond to each category of setlocale 3C LC ALL If set to a valid non empty string value override the values of LANG and all the other LC variables LC COLLATE This category specifies the character collation sequence being used The information corresponding to this category is stored in a database created by the localedef 1 command This environment variable affects strcol1 3C and strxfrm 3C Standards Environments and Macros 37 environ 5
230. er a plus or minus sign where there is one digit before the radix character shown here as a decimal point and the number of digits after it is equal to the precision The LC NUMERIC locale category determines the radix character to use in this format When the precision is missing six digits are written after the radix character if the precision is 0 no radix character appears The E conversion character produces a number with E instead of e introducing the exponent The exponent always contains at least two digits However if the value to be written requires an exponent greater than two digits additional exponent digits are written as necessary The floating point number argument is written in style f or e or in style E in the case of a G conversion character with the precision specifying the number of significant digits The style used depends on the value converted style g is used only if the exponent resulting from the conversion is less than 4 or greater than or equal to the precision Trailing zeros are removed from the result A radix character appears only if it is followed by a digit The integer argument is converted to an unsigned char and the resulting byte is written The argument is taken to be a string and bytes from the string are written until the end of the string or the number of bytes indicated by the precision specification of the argument is reached If the precision is omitted from the argument it is taken t
231. er describing the content The following table describes the format of this data file Standards Environments and Macros 105 fsattr 5 SEE ALSO Field Name Length in Octets Description h version 7 Name file version h size 10 Length of data file h component len 10 Total length of all path segments h link comp len 10 Total length of all link segments path h component len Complex path link path h link comp len Complex link path As demonstrated above the header is followed by a record describing the path to the attribute file This path is composed of two or more path segments separated by a null character Each segment describes a path rooted at the hidden extended attribute directory of the leaf file of the previous segment making it possible to name attributes on attributes The first segment is always the path to the parent file that roots the entire sequence in the normal name space The following table describes the format of each segment Field Name Length in Octets Description h namesz 7 Length of segment path h typeflag 1 Actual file type of attribute file h names h namesz Parent path segment path If the attribute file is linked to another file the path record is followed by a second record describing the location of the referencing file The structure of this record is identical to the record described above cp 1 cpio 1 ina 1 1s 1 mv 1 pax 1 runat 1 tar 1 du 1 sck 1M
232. ers must check the corresponding standards for other macros that can be queried to determine if desired options are supported by the implementation POSIX Standard Feature Test Macros POSIX 1 1990 _ POSIX SOURCE POSIX 1 1990 and POSIX 2 1992 C Language POSIX SOURCE and POSIX C SOURCE 2 Bindings Option POSIX 1b 1993 POSIX C SOURCE 199309L POSIX 1c 1996 POSIX C SOURCE 1995061L SVID3 The SVID3 specification does not specify any feature test macros to indicate that an application is written to meet SVID3 requirements The SVID3 specification was written before the C standard was completed X Open CAE 330 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 29 Aug 2001 Compilation standards 5 To build or compile an application that conforms to one of the X Open CAE specifications use the following guidelines Applications need not set the POSIX feature test macros if they require both CAE and POSIX functionality XPG3 The application must define XOPEN SOURCE with a value other than 500 preferably 1 XPG4 The application must define XOPEN SOURCE with a value other than 500 preferably 1 and set XOPEN VERSION 4 SUS XPG4v2 The application must define XOPEN SOURCE with a value other than 500 preferably 1 and set XOPEN SOURCE EXTENDED 1 SUSv2 The application must define XOPEN SOURCE 500 A POSIX 2 XPG4 SUS or SUSv2 conforming implementation must include
233. erted can be represented in fewer digits than the specified minimum it is expanded with leading zeros The default precision is 1 The result of converting a zero value with a precision of 0 is no characters If both the field width and precision are omitted the implementation may precede follow or precede and follow numeric arguments of types d i and u with blank characters arguments of type o octal may be preceded with leading zeros The treatment of integers and spaces is different from the print 3C function in that they can be surrounded with blank characters This was done so that given a format such as SdNn foo the implementation could use a printf call such as Standards Environments and Macros 93 formats 5 94 e E gG 76 printf 6d n foo and still conform This notation is thus somewhat like scanf in addition to printf The floating point number argument is written in decimal notation in the style ddd ddd where the number of digits after the radix character shown here as a decimal point is equal to the precision specification The LC NUMERZIC locale category determines the radix character to use in this format If the precision is omitted from the argument six digits are written after the radix character if the precision is explicitly 0 no radix character appears The floating point number argument is written in the style 1d dddexdd the symbol indicates eith
234. es Authentication Token Management ERRORS pam dhkeys authentication Diffie Hellman keys management module pam dhkeys so 1 The pam dhkeys so 1 service module provides functionality to two PAM services Secure RPC authentication and Secure RPC authentication token management Secure RPC authentication differs from regular unix authentication because NIS and other ONC RPCs use Secure RPC as the underlying security mechanism The following options may be passed to the module debug syslog 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages If the user has Diffie Hellman keys pam sm authenticate establishes secret keys for the user specified by the PAM USER equivalent to running keylogin 1 using the authentication token found in the PAM AUTHTOK item Not being able to establish the secret keys results in an authentication error if the NIS repository is used to authenticate the user and the NIS table permissions require secure RPC credentials to access the password field If pam sm setcred is called with PAM ESTABLISH CRED and the user s secure RPC credentials need to be established these credentials are set This is equivalent to running keylogin l If the credentials could not be set and PAM SILENT is not specified a diagnostic message is displayed If pam setcred is called with PAM DELETE CRED the user s secure RPC credentials are unset This is equivalent to running keylogout 1 P
235. es Sun acknowledges the pioneering efforts of Xerox in researching and developing the concept of visual or graphical user interfaces for the computer industry Sun holds a non exclusive license from Xerox to the Xerox Graphical User Interface which license also covers Sun s licensees who implement OPEN LOOK GUIs and otherwise comply with Sun s written license agreements U S Government Rights Commercial software Government users are subject to the Sun Microsystems Inc standard license agreement and applicable provisions of the FAR and its supplements DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID Copyright 2004 Sun Microsystems Inc 4150 Network Circle Santa Clara CA 95054 U S A Tous droits r serv s Ce produit ou document est prot g par un copyright et distribu avec des licences qui en restreignent l utilisation la copie la distribution et la d compilation Aucune partie de ce produit ou document ne peut tre reproduite sous aucune forme par quelque moyen que ce soit sans l autorisation pr alable et crite de Sun et de ses bailleurs de licence s il y en a Le logiciel d tenu par des tiers et qui comprend la technologie relative aux polices de caract res est prot
236. es are user principals In the first two cases it is assumed that the user joe is in the same realm as the client so no realm is specified Note that joeand joe admin are different principals even if the same user uses them joe admin has different privileges from joe The fifth case is a service principal while the final case is a host principal The word host is required for host principals With host principals the instance is the fully qualified hostname Note that the words admin and host are reserved keywords kdestroy 1 kinit 1 klist 1 kpasswa 1 krb5 cont 5 Sun Enterprise Authentication Mechanism Guide If you enter your username and kinit responds with this message Principal unknown kerberos yOu haven t been registered as a SEAM user See your system administrator or the Sun Enterprise Authentication Mechanism Guide Standards Environments and Macros 321 sgml 5 NAME DESCRIPTION SolBook Elements DOCTYPE RefEntry RefMeta sgml solbook Standard Generalized Markup Language Standard Generalized Markup Language SGML is the ISO standard 8879 1986 that describes a syntax for marking up documents with tags that describe the purpose of the text rather than the appearance on the page This form of markup facilitates document interchange between different platforms and applications SGML allows the management of information as data objects rather than text on a page In an SGML document the main struc
237. es in vgrindefs are of two types Boolean capabilities which indicate that the language has some particular feature and string capabilities which give a regular expression or keyword list Entries may continue onto multiple lines by giving a as the last character of a line Lines starting with are comments The following table names and describes each capability Name Type Description ab str Regular expression for the start of an alternate form comment ae str Regular expression for the end of an alternate form comment bb str Regular expression for the start of a block be str Regular expression for the end of a lexical block cb str Regular expression for the start of a comment ce str Regular expression for the end of a comment id str String giving characters other than letters and digits that may legally occur in identifiers default _ kw str A list of keywords separated by spaces 1b str Regular expression for the start of a character constant le str Regular expression for the end of a character constant oc bool Present means upper and lower case are equivalent pb str Regular expression for start of a procedure pl bool Procedure definitions are constrained to the lexical level matched by the px capability px str A match for this regular expression indicates that procedure definitions may occur at the next lexical level Useful for lisp like languages in whi
238. ess JavaCard m Schlumberger MicroPayflex m Dallas Semiconductor Java iButton JavaCard Each of the supported cards has a complete set of OCF card services that implement the necessary functionality for authentication and secure storage of data For the two supported JavaCards an authentication and secure data storage applet is provided that can be loaded into these cards with the supplied applet administration tools See smartcard 1M A PAM smart card module is provided to allow PAM clients to use smart card based authentication See pam smartcard 5 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 16 Oct 2002 SEE ALSO smartcard 5 CDE is able to use the PAM smart card module for dt login and dtsession authentication CDE also uses the smart card framework event dispatcher to listen for events on the card terminal and provide corresponding visual feedback to the user ocfserv 1M smartcard 1M libsmartcard 3LIB pam_start 3PAM pam_smartcard 5 ocf_escri 7D ocf_ibutton 7D ocf iscri 7D scmi2c 7D Standards Environments and Macros 327 standards 5 328 NAME DESCRIPTION standards ANSI C C ISO POSIX POSIX 1 POSIX 2 SUS SUSv2 SVID SVID3 XNS XNS4 XNS5 XPG XPG3 XPG4 XPG4v2 standards and specifications supported by Solaris Solaris 9supports IEEE Std 1003 1 and IEEE Std 1008 2 commonly known as POSIX 1 and POSIX 2 respectively The following table lists each ver
239. for groups of digits to the left of the decimal delimiter in formatted monetary quantities In contexts where standards limit the mon thousands sep toa single byte the result of specifying a multi byte operand is unspecified Define the size of each group of digits in formatted monetary quantities The operand is a sequence of integers separated by semicolons Each integer specifies the number of digits in each group with the initial integer defining the size of the group immediately preceding the decimal delimiter and the following integers defining the preceding groups If the last integer is not 1 then the size of the previous group if any will be repeatedly used for the remainder of the digits If the last integer is 1 then no further grouping will be performed The following is an example of the interpretation of the mon grouping keyword Assuming that the value to be formatted is 123456789 and the mon thousands sepis then the following table shows the result The third column shows the equivalent string in the ISO C standard that would be used by the 1ocaleconv function to accommodate this grouping 226 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 positive sign negative sign int frac digits frac digits p cs precedes p sep by space n cs precedes n sep by space locale 5 mon grouping Formatted ISO C String Value 3 1 123456 789 3 177 3 123456789
240. formation Technology Standardization Technical Committee CITS Institute for Information Industry III University of Washington March 1996 ISO 8859 character sets using Latin alphabetic characters are distinguished as follows ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 For most West European languages including Albanian Finnish Italian Catalan French Norwegian Danish German Portuguese Dutch Galician Spanish English Irish Swedish Faeroese Icelandic ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 For most Latin written Slavic and Central European languages Czech Polish Slovak German Rumanian Slovene Hungarian Croatian ISO 8859 3 Latin 3 Popularly used for Esperanto Galician Maltese and Turkish ISO 8859 4 Latin 4 Introduces letters for Estonian Latvian and Lithuanian It is an incomplete predecessor of ISO 8859 10 Latin 6 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 iconv_unicode 5 ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 Replaces the rarely needed Icelandic letters in ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 with the Turkish ones ISO 8859 10 Latin 6 Adds the last Inuit Greenlandic and Sami Lappish letters that were not included in ISO 8859 4 Latin 4 to complete coverage of the Nordic area Standards Environments and Macros 189 isalist 5 SPARC Platforms 190 NAME isalist the native instruction sets known to Solaris software DESCRIPTION The possible instruction set names returned by isalist 1 and the SI ISALIST la
241. ftware or for applications is opt packagename bin usr bin ia64 x86 64 bit platform amp hyphen dependent user invoked executables Note that ia64 is an example name the actual name might be different This directory should not be part of a user s PATH A wrapper in usr bin should invoke the executable in this directory See isaexec 3C An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename bin ia64 Standards Environments and Macros 53 filesystem 5 usr bin sparcv9 SPARC 64 bit plattorm amp hyphen dependent user invoked executables This directory should not be part of a user s PATH A wrapper in usr bin should invoke the executable in this directory See isaexec 3C An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename bin sparcv9 usr bin subsystem Platform amp hyphen dependent user invoked executables that are associated with subsystem These are commands users expect to be run as part of their normal PATH An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename bin usr bin subsystem ia64 x86 64 bit platform amp hyphen dependent user invoked executables Note that 1a64 is an example name the actual name mi
242. g sign 40 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 25 Oct 2001 SEE ALSO environ 5 start time end time Indicate when to change to and back from daylight savings time where start time describes when the change from standard time to daylight savings time occurs and end time describes when the change back happens Each time field describes when in current local time the change is made The formats of start and end are one of the following Jn The Julian day n 1 n x 365 Leap days are not counted That is in all years February 28 is day 59 and March 1 is day 60 It is impossible to refer to the occasional February 29 n The zero based Julian day 0 lt n x 365 Leap days are counted and it is possible to refer to February 29 Mm n d The d day 0 lt d 6 of week n of month m of the year 1 n x 5 1 m amp 12 where week 5 means the last d day in month m which may occur in either the fourth or the fifth week Week 1 is the first week in which the d day occurs Day zero is Sunday Implementation specific defaults are used for start and end if these optional fields are not given The time has the same format as offset except that no leading sign or is allowed The default if time is not given is 02 00 00 cat 1 date 1 ed 1 fmtmsg 1 1ocaledef 1 1ogin 1 1s 1 mkmsgs 1 nice 1 nohup 1 sh 1 sort 1 time 1
243. g elements that is sequences of two or more characters to be collated as an entity User defined ordering of collating elements Each collating element is assigned a collation value defining its order in the character or basic collation sequence This ordering is used by regular expressions and pattern matching and unless collation weights are explicity specified also as the collation weight to be used in sorting Multiple weights and equivalence classes Collating elements can be assigned one or more up to the limit COLL WEIGHTS MAX collating weights for use in sorting The first weight is hereafter referred to as the primary weight One to Many mapping A single character is mapped into a string of collating elements Equivalence class definition Two or more collating elements have the same collation value primary weight Ordering by weights When two strings are compared to determine their relative order the two strings are first broken up into a series of collating elements the elements in each successive pair of elements are then compared according to the relative primary weights for the elements If equal and more than one weight has been assigned then the pairs of collating elements are recompared according to the relative subsequent weights until either a pair of collating elements compare unequal or the weights are exhausted The following keywords are recognized in a collation sequence definition They are describe
244. g or following lines do not specify characters in the current coded character set The symbol UNDEFINED is interpreted as including all coded character set values not specified explicitly or via the ellipsis symbol Such characters are inserted in the character collation order at the point indicated by the symbol and in ascending order according to their coded character set values If no UNDEFINED symbol is specified and the current coded character set contains characters not specified in this section the utility will issue a warning message and place such characters at the end of the character collation order The optional operands for each collation element are used to define the primary secondary or subsequent weights for the collating element The first operand specifies the relative primary weight the second the relative secondary weight and so on Two or more collation elements can be assigned the same weight they belong to the same equivalence class if they have the same primary weight Collation behaves as if for each weight level elements subject to IGNORE are removed unless the position collation directive is specified for the corresponding level with the order start keyword Then each successive pair of elements is compared according to the relative weights for the elements If the two strings compare equal the process is repeated for the next weight level up to the limit COLL WEIGHTS MAX Weights are expressed as characters
245. g with a description of how each A list of the values the library routine will return to the A list of files associated with the command or function SH OPTIONS affects the command s operation SH RETURN VALUES calling program and the conditions that cause these values to be returned SH EXIT STATUS A list of the values the utility will return to the calling program or shell and the conditions that cause these values to be returned SH FILES SH SEE ALSO A comma separated list of related manual pages followed by references to other published materials SH DIAGNOSTICS A list of diagnostic messages and an explanation of each SH BUGS A description of limitations known defects and possible problems associated with the command or function usr share lib tmac an usr share man windex man 1 nroff 1 t ro 1 whatis 1 Dale Dougherty and Tim O Reilly Unix Text Processing Standards Environments and Macros 241 mansun 5 NAME mansun macros to format Reference Manual pages SYNOPSIS nroff mansun filename troff mansun filename DESCRIPTION These macros are used to lay out the reference pages in this manual Note if filename contains format input for a preprocessor the commands shown above must be piped through the appropriate preprocessor This is handled automatically by man 1 See the Conventions section Any text argument t may be zero to six words Quotes may be used to includ
246. generated text refpurpose The text after the dash on the NAME line is contained in this tag This is a short summary of what the object or objects described on the reference page do or are used for The dash is also auto generated and should not be typed in lt refdiscriptor gt In some cases the lt refentrytitle gt is a general topic descriptor of a group of related objects that are discussed on the same page Standards Environments and Macros 323 sgml 5 RefSynopsisDiv RefSect1 RefSect2 Block Elements In this case the first tag after the lt refnamedivs gt is a lt refdiscriptor gt The refname tags follow Only one refdiscriptor is allowed and it should match the lt refentrytitle gt s The SYNOPSTS line of the reference page is contained by this tag There is a lt title gt that usually contains an entity reference The text is the word SYNOPSIS There are several tags within lt refsynopsisdiv gt that are designed specifically for the type of synopsis that is used in the different reference page sections The three types are lt cmdsynopsis gt Used for commands and utilities pages lt funcsynopsis gt Used for programming interface pages synopsis Used for pages that do not fall into the other two categories This tag is equivalent to the SH nroff macro It contains a lt title gt element that is the title of the reference page section Section names are the standard names such as DESC
247. ght be different This directory should not be part of a user s PATH A wrapper in usr bin should invoke the executable in this directory See isaexec 3C An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename bin ia64 usr bin subsystem sparcv9 SPARC 64 bit platform amp hyphen dependent user invoked executables This directory should not be part of a user s PATH A wrapper in usr bin should invoke the executable in this directory See isaexec 3C An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename bin sparcv9 usr subsystem bin Platform amp hyphen dependent user invoked executables that are associated with subsystem These are commands users expect to be run as part of their normal PATH An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename bin usr subsystem bin ia64 x86 64 bit platform amp hyphen dependent user invoked executables Note that ia64 is an example name the actual name might be different This directory should not be part of a user s PATH A wrapper in usr bin should invoke the executable in this directory See isaexec 3C An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous loc
248. grave accent marks EXAMPLE 1 An example of compiling a program using transitional interfaces such as lseek64 and fopene4 c89 D LARGEFILE64 SOURCE N getconf LFS64 CFLAGS a c getconf LFS64 LDFLAGS N getconf LFS64 LIBS EXAMPLE 2 An example of running lint on a program using transitional interfaces lint D LARGEFILE64 SOURCE N getconf LFS64 LINTFLAGS getconf LFS64 LIBS getconf 1 lseek 2 open 3C 1 64 5 standards 5 Standards Environments and Macros 207 live upgrade 5 208 NAME DESCRIPTION live upgrade overview of Live Upgrade feature The Live Upgrade feature of the Solaris operating environment enables you to maintain multiple operating system images on a single system An image called a boot environment or BE represents a set of operating system and application software packages The BEs might contain different operating system and or application versions On a system with the Solaris Live Upgrade software your currently booted OS environment is referred to as your active or current BE You have one active or current BE all others are inactive You can perform any number of modifications to inactive BEs on the same system then boot from one of those BEs If there is a failure or some undesired behavior in the newly booted BE Live Upgrade software makes it easy for you to fall back to the previously running BE Live Upgrade software includes a full suite of com
249. gt j0104 is interpreted as the symbolic names lt j0101 gt lt j0102s lt j0103 gt and j0104 in that order A character set mapping definition line must exist for all symbolic names and must define the coded character value that corresponds to the character glyph indicated in the table or the coded character value that corresponds with the control character symbolic name If the control characters commonly associated with the symbolic Standards Environments and Macros 27 charmap 5 Decimal Constants Ranges of Symbolic Names SEE ALSO names are supported by the implementation the symbolic name and the corresponding encoding value must be included in the file Additional unique symbolic names may be included A coded character value can be represented by more than one symbolic name The encoding part is expressed as one for single byte character values or more concatenated decimal octal or hexadecimal constants in the following formats cd d escape char decimal byte value ox x escape char hexadecimal byte value c o escape char octal byte value Decimal constants must be represented by two or three decimal digits preceded by the escape character and the lower case letter d for example d05 d97 or d143 Hexadecimal constants must be represented by two hexadecimal digits preceded by the escape character and the lower case letter x for example x05 x61 or x8f Oc
250. h Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic KOI8 R Alternative PC Cyrillic Macintosh Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic KOI8 R Alternative PC Cyrillic Windows Cyrillic The conversions are performed according to the tables contained in the manual pages cross referenced in the Index of Conversion Code Tables below Index of Conversion Code Tables Code Target Code See Manual Page ISO 646 ISO 8859 1 iconv_646 5 ISO 646de ISO 8859 1 ISO 646da ISO 8859 1 ISO 646en ISO 8859 1 ISO 646es ISO 8859 1 ISO 646fr ISO 8859 1 ISO 646it ISO 8859 1 ISO 646sv ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 ISO 646 iconv_8859 1 5 ISO 8859 1 ISO 646de ISO 8859 1 ISO 646da ISO 8859 1 ISO 646en ISO 8859 1 ISO 646es ISO 8859 1 ISO 646fr ISO 8859 1 ISO 646it ISO 8859 1 ISO 646sv ISO 8859 2 MS 1250 iconv_8859 2 5 ISO 8859 2 MS 852 ISO 8859 2 Mazovia ISO 8859 2 DHN Standards Environments and Macros 123 iconv 5 124 Index of Conversion Code Tables MS 1250 ISO 8859 2 iconv 1250 5 MS 1250 MS 852 MS 1250 Mazovia MS 1250 DHN MS 852 ISO 8859 2 iconv 852 5 MS 852 MS 1250 MS 852 Mazovia MS 852 DHN Mazovia ISO 8859 2 iconv maz 5 Mazovia MS 1250 Mazovia MS 852 Mazovia DHN Index of Conversion Code Tables Code Target Code See Manual Page DHN ISO 8859 2 iconv dhn 5 DHN MS 1250 DHN MS
251. he ending date of the era in the same format as the start date or one of the two special values or The value indicates that the ending date is the beginning of time The value indicates that the ending date is the end of time era name A string representing the name of the era corresponding to the EC field descriptor era format A string for formatting the year in the era corresponding to the EG and EY field descriptors Define the format of the date in alternative era notation corresponding to the Ex field descriptor Define the locale s appropriate alternative time format corresponding to the EX field descriptor Define the locale s appropriate alternative date and time format corresponding to the Ec field descriptor Define alternative symbols for digits corresponding to the 0 field descriptor modifier The operand consists of semicolon separated strings each surrounded by double quotes The first string is the alternative symbol corresponding with zero the second string the symbol corresponding with one and so on Up to 100 alternative symbol strings can be specified The 0 modifier indicates that the string corresponding to the value specified by means of the field descriptor will be used instead of the value The following information can be accessed These correspond to constants defined in lt langinfo h gt and used as arguments to the n1 1anginfo 3C function ABDAY x DAY x ABMON x
252. hose filenames and pathnames sorted according to the collating sequence in effect in the current locale If the pattern contains an invalid bracket expression or does not match any existing filenames or pathnames the pattern string is left unchanged SEE ALSO find 1 ksh 1 nmatch 3C regex 5 66 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 28 Mar 1995 NAME DESCRIPTION XFN Composite Names Why FNS fns 5 fns overview of FNS Federated Naming Service FNS provides a method for federating multiple naming services under a single simple interface for the basic naming operations The service supports resolution of composite names names that span multiple naming systems through the naming interface In addition to the naming interface FNS also specifies policies for composing names in the enterprise namespace See fns_policies 5 and fns_initial_context 5 Fundamental to the FNS model are the notions of composite names and contexts A context provides operations for m associating binding names to objects m resolving names to objects m removing bindings listing names renaming and so on A context contains a set of names to reference bindings A reference contains a list of communication end points Every naming operation in the FNS interface is performed on a context object The federated naming system is formed by contexts from one naming system being bound in the contexts of
253. ilar to the way ACLs records were defined See Extended Archive Formats below for a description of the new archive records There is a class of utilities chmod chown chgrp that one might expect to be modified in a manner similar to those listed above For example one might expect that performing chmod on a file would not only affect the file itself but would also affect at least the extended attribute directory if not any existing extended attribute files This is not the case The model chosen for extended attributes implies that the attribute directory and the attributes themselves are all file objects in their own right and can therefore have independent file status attributes associated with them a given man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Aug 2001 Application level API fsattr 5 implementation cannot support this for example for intrinsic attributes The relationship is left undefined and a fine grained control mechanism runat 1 is provided to allow manipulation of extended attribute status attributes as necessary The runat utility has the following syntax runat filename command The runat utility executes the supplied command in the context of the attribute space associated with the indicated file If no command argument is supplied a shell is invoked See runat 1 for details The primary interface required to access extended attributes at the programmatic level is the
254. iles and output files when that organization is not otherwise obvious The syntax is similar to that used by the printf 3C function When used for stdin or input file descriptions this syntax describes the format that could have been used to write the text to be read not a format that could be used by the scanf 3C function to read the input file The description of an individual record is as follows lt format gt lt argl gt lt arg2 gt lt argn gt The format is a character string that contains three types of objects defined below characters Characters that are not escape sequences or conversion specifications as described below are copied to the output escape sequences Represent non graphic characters conversion specifications Specifies the output format of each argument See below The following characters have the following special meaning in the format string P An empty character position One or more blank characters Exactly one space character The notation for spaces allows some flexibility for application output Note that an empty character position in format represents one or more blank characters on the output not white space which can include newline characters Therefore another utility that reads that output as its input must be prepared to parse the data using scanf 3C awk 1 and so forth The character is used when exactly one space character is output The following table
255. ilesystem 5 usr subsystem 1ib ia64 x86 64 bit platform amp hyphen dependent libraries various databases commands and daemons that are associated with subsystem and that are not invoked directly by a human user Note that ia64 is an example name the actual name might be different An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename 1ib iae4 usr subsystem 1ib sparcv9 SPARC 64 bit platform amp hyphen dependent libraries various databases commands and daemons that are associated with subsystem and that are not invoked directly by a human user An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename 1ib sparcv9 usr local Not part of the SVR4 based Solaris distribution The usr directory is exclusively for software bundled with the Solaris operating system If needed for storing machine local add on software create the directory opt local and make usr local a symbolic link to opt local The opt directory or filesystem is for storing add on software to the system usr mail Symbolic link to the var mail directory usr man Symbolic link to the usr share man directory usr net servers Entry points for foreign name service requests relayed using the network listener See listen 1M usr news Symbolic link to the v
256. in a 64 bit application the standard definition is equivalent to the 64 bit file offset definition aio h struct aiocb struct aiocb64 off t aio offset off64 t aio offset lt sys dirent h gt struct dirent struct dirent64 ino_t d_ino ino64 td ino off td off off64 td off sys fcntl h struct flock struct 1ock64 off tl start off64 tl start off tl len off64 tl len F SETLK F SETLK64 F SETLKW F SETLKW64 F GETLK F GETLK64 F FREESP F FREESP64 O LARGEFILE lt sys stdio h gt 196 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Aug 2001 fpos t sys resource h rlim t struct rlimit rlim t rlim cur rlim t rlim max RLIM INFINITY RLIM SAVED MAX RLIM SAVED CUR sys stat h gt struct stat ino_t st_ino off tst size blkent t st blocks lt sys statvfs h gt struct statvfs fsblkcnt_t f blocks fsblkent t f bfree fsblkcent t f bavial fsfilcnt t f files fsfilcnt tf ffree fsfilcnt t f favail lt sys types h gt off t fpos64 t rlim64 t 1 64 5 struct rlimit64 rlim64 t rlim cur rlim64 t rim max RLIM64 INFINITY RLIM64 SAVED MAX RLIM64 SAVED CUR struct stat64 ino64 tst ino off64 tst size blkent64 t st blocks struct statvfs64 fsblkcnt64 fsblkcnt64 fsblkcnt64 fsfilcnt64 fsfilcnt64 fsfilcnt64 off64 t
257. ined in that network s entry etc netconfig is maintained by the system administrator The library routines described in getnetpath 3NSL access the NETPATH environment variable NLSPATH Contains a sequence of templates which catopen 3C and gettext 3C use when attempting to locate message catalogs Each template consists of an optional prefix one or more substitution fields a filename and an optional suffix For example NLSPATH system nlslib N cat defines that catopen should look for all message catalogs in the directory System nlslib where the catalog name should be constructed from the name parameter passed to catopen N with the suffix cat Substitution fields consist of a symbol followed by a single letter keyword The following keywords are currently defined YN The value of the name parameter passed to catopen L The value of LANG or LC_MESSAGES l The language element from LANG or LC_MESSAGES t The territory element from LANG or LC_MESSAGES c The codeset element from LANG or LC_MESSAGES AW A single character An empty string is substituted if the specified value is not currently defined The separators and are not included in t and c substitutions Templates defined in NLSPATH are separated by colons A leading colon or two adjacent colons is equivalent to specifying N For example NLSPATH N cat nlslib L N cat indicates to catopen that it should look f
258. ing If however the first character of the string is a circumflex the one character RE matches any character except new line and the remaining characters in the string The has this special meaning only if it occurs first in the string The minus may be used to indicate a range of consecutive characters for example 0 9 is equivalent to 0123456789 The loses this special meaning if it occurs first after an initial if any or last in the string The right square bracket 1 does not terminate such a string when it is the first character within it after an initial if any for example 1a matches either a right square bracket 1 or one of the ASCII letters a through inclusive The four characters listed in 1 2 a above stand for themselves within such a string of characters The following rules may be used to construct REs from one character REs 21 22 23 2 4 A one character RE is a RE that matches whatever the one character RE matches A one character RE followed by an asterisk is a RE that matches 0 or more occurrences of the one character RE If there is any choice the longest leftmost string that permits a match is chosen A one character RE followed by m N m or m n is a RE that matches a range of occurrences of the one character RE The values of m and n must be non negative integers less than 256 m matches exactly m occurrences m matches at least m occurrence
259. ing extended attributes This section describes the specifics of the archive format extensions Extended tar format The tar archive is made up of a series of 512 byte blocks Each archived file is represented by a header block and zero or more data blocks containing the file contents The header block is structured as shown in the following table Field Name Length in Octets Description Name 100 File name string Mode 8 12 file mode bits Standards Environments and Macros 103 fsattr 5 Field Name Length in Octets Description Uid 8 User ID of file owner Gid 8 Group ID of file owner Size 12 Size of file Mtime 12 File modification time Chksum 8 File contents checksum Typeflag 1 File type flag Linkname 100 Link target name if file linked Magic 6 ustar Version 2 00 Uname 32 User name of file owner Gname 32 Group name of file owner Devmajor 8 Major device ID if special file Devminor 8 Minor device ID if special file Prefix 155 Path prefix string for file The extended attribute project extends the above header format by defining a new header type for the Type 1ag field The type E is defined to be used for all extended attribute files Attribute files are stored in the tar archive as a sequence of two lt header data gt pairs The first file contains the data necessary to locate and name the extended attribute in the file system The second file contains the actual attribute file data Both files u
260. ion and strftime 3C the field descriptors corresponding to the optional keywords consist of a modifier followed by a traditional field descriptor for instance Ex If the optional keywords are not supported by the implementation or are unspecified for the current locale these field descriptors are treated as the traditional field descriptor For instance assume the following keywords alt digits Oth 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th H gth 9th 10th d fmt The Od day of B in Y On 7 4 1776 the x field descriptor would result in The 4th day of July in 1776 while 7 14 1789 would come out as The 14 day of July in 1789 It can be noted that the above example is for illustrative purposes only the O modifier is primarily intended to provide for Kanji or Hindi digits in date formats The LC MESSAGES category defines the format and values for affirmative and negative responses The following keywords are recognized as part of the locale definition file The nl langinfo 3C function accepts upper case versions of the first four keywords The operand consists of an extended regular expression see regex 5 that describes the acceptable affirmative response to a question expecting an affirmative or negative response yesexpr man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 SEE ALSO locale 5 noexpr The operand consists of an extended regular expression th
261. ions keylogin l keylogout 1 pam 3PAM pam authenticate 3PAM pam chauthtok 3PAM pam setcred 3PAM pam get item 3PAM pam set data 3PAM pam get data 3PAM syslog 3C libpam 3LIB pam conf 4 attributes 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 Standards Environments and Macros 271 pam dial auth 5 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES pam dial auth authentication management PAM module for dialups usr lib security pam dial auth so 1 The dialup PAM module usr lib security pam dial auth so 1 authenticates a user according to the etc dialups and etc d_passwd files Only pam sm authenticate isimplemented within this module pam sm setcred isanull function usr lib security pam dial auth so 1 is designed to be stacked immediately below the usr lib security pam unix so 1 module for the login service pam sm authenticate performs authentication only if both the etc dialups
262. ior is dependent on the collating sequence Ranges will be treated according to the current collating sequence and include such characters that fall within the range based on that collating sequence regardless of character values This however means that the interpretation will differ depending on collating sequence If for instance one collating sequence defines as a variant of a while another 306 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 12 Jul 1999 BREs Matching Multiple Characters regex 5 defines it as a letter following z then the expression z is valid in the first language and invalid in the second In the following all examples assume the collation sequence specified for the POSIX locale unless another collation sequence is specifically defined The starting range point and the ending range point must be a collating element or collating symbol An equivalence class expression used as a starting or ending point of a range expression produces unspecified results An equivalence class can be used portably within a bracket expression but only outside the range For example the unspecified expression 2e f should be given as e e f The ending range point must collate equal to or higher than the starting range point otherwise the expression will be treated as invalid The order used is the order in which the collating elements are specified in the current collation definition One
263. ironments and Macros 265 pam authtok check 5 The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 266 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros e Last Revised 21 Jan 2003 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION Authentication Service Password Management Service ERRORS pam authtok get 5 pam authtok get authentication and password management module pam authtok get so 1 The pam authtok get service module provides password prompting funtionality to the PAM stack It implements pam sm authenticate and pam sm chauthtok providing functionality to both the Authentication Stack and the Password Management Stack The implementation of pam sm authenticate 3PAM prompts the user name if not set and then tries to get the authentication token from the pam handle If the token is not set it then prompts the user for a password and stores it in the PAM item PAM AUTHTOK This module is meant to be the first module on an authentication stack where users are to authenticate using a keyboard Due to the nature of the PAM Password Management stack traversal mechanism the pam sm chauthtok 3PAM function is called twice Once with the PAM PRELIM CHECK flag and one with the PAM UPDATE AUTHTOK flag In the fi
264. is to be updated If PAM REPOSITORY is unset it follows the nsswitch conf 4 The following option can be passed to the module debug syslog 3C debugging information at the LOG DEBUG level server policy Ifthe account authority for the user as specified by PAM USER is a server do not encrypt the authentication token before updating PAM SUCCESS Successfully obtains authentication token PAM SYSTEM ERR Fails to get username service name old password or new password user name null or empty or password null See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Interface Stability Evolving MT Level MT Safe with exceptions pam 3PAM pam authenticate 3PAM pam chauthtok 3PAM syslog 3C libpam 3LIB pam conf 4 attributes 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 Standards Environments and Macros 269 pam dhkeys 5 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION Authentication Servic
265. ishost thisens the enterprise root of H Synonym thisens thisorgunit H s distinguished organizational unit context In Solaris this is H s NIS home domain Synonym thisorgunit Standards Environments and Macros 73 fns initial context 5 myself U s user context Synonyms myself thisuser myens the enterprise root of LI Synonym myens myorgunit U s distinguished organizational unit context In Solaris this is U s NIS home domain Synonym _myorgunit user the context in which users in the same organizational unit as H are named Synonym user host the context in which hosts in the same organizational unit as H are named Synonym host org the root context of the organizational unit namespace in H s enterprise In Solaris this corresponds to the NIS root domain Synonyms orgunit orgunit site the root context of the site namespace in H s enterprise if the site namespace has been configured Synonym site EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 1 Names beginning with the enterprise root The types of objects that may be named relative to the enterprise root are user host service organizational unit file and site Here are some examples of names that begin with the enterprise root thisens orgunit multimedia servers engineering names an organizational unit multimedia servers engineering in H s enterprise thisens site northwing floor3 admin names the north wing site on the third floor of the administrations building in H s
266. ite pam smartcard so dtsession auth required pam authtok get so 1 dtsession auth required pam dhkeys so 1 dtsession auth required pam unix auth so 1 smartcard 1M libpam 3LIB pam 3PAM pam authenticate 3PAM pam start 3PAM pam conf 4 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 Standards Environments and Macros 291 pam smartcard 5 NOTES The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5 292 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 17 Dec 2001 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION UNIX Authentication Module pam unix 5 pam unix authentication account session and password management PAM modules for UNIX usr lib security pam unix so 1 The UNIX service module for PAM usr lib security pam unix so 1 provides functionality for all four PAM modules authentication account management session management and password management The pam unix so 1 module is a shared object that can be dynamically loaded to provide the necessary functionality upon demand Its path is specified in the PAM configuration file The UNIX authentication component provi
267. ith Exceptions See the NOTES or USAGE sections of these pages for a description of the exceptions Forkl Safe A Fork1 Safe library releases the locks it had held whenever ork1 2 is called in a Solaris thread program or ork 2 in a POSIX see standards 5 thread program Calling fork 2 in a POSIX thread program has the same semantic as calling ork1 2 in a Solaris thread program All system calls 1ibpthread and libthread are Fork1 Safe Otherwise you should handle the locking clean up yourself see pthread_atfork 3C Cancel Safety If a multi threaded application uses pthread cancel 3THR to cancel that is kill a thread it is possible that the target thread is killed while holding a resource such as a lock or allocated memory If the thread has not installed the appropriate cancellation cleanup handlers to release the resources appropriately see pthread_cance1 3THR the application is cancel unsafe that is it is not safe with respect to cancellation This unsafety could result in deadlocks due to locks not released by a thread that gets cancelled or resource leaks for example memory not being freed on thread cancellation All applications that use pthread cancel 3THR should ensure that they operate in a Cancel Safe environment Libraries that have cancellation points and which acquire resources such as locks or allocate memory dynamically also contribute to the cancel unsafety of applications that are linked with these
268. ized network applications If the host entry is not found in the keytab file the authentication fails The following options can be passed to the Kerberos V5 authentication module acceptor Prevents the PAM module from performing the authentication service exchange used to obtain the initial ticket granting ticket This should be used on Kerberos application servers since the initial ticket is not needed debug Provides syslog 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turns off warning messages use first pass Requests Kerberos V5 authentication with the user s initial password entered when the user authenticated to the first authentication module in the stack If Kerberos V5 authentication fails or if no password has been entered it quits and does not prompt the user for a password This option should only be used if the authentication service is designated as optional in the pam conf configuration file try first pass Requests Kerberos V5 authentication with the user s initial password entered when the user authenticated to the first authentication module in the stack If Standards Environments and Macros 273 pam krb5 5 Kerberos V5 Account Management Module Kerberos V5 Session Management Module Kerberos V5 Password Management Module 274 Kerberos V5 authentication fails or if no password has been entered the user is prompted for a password with the prompt Kerberos Password use
269. keyword will be used to define symbols for use in collation sequence statements that is between the order start and the order end keywords The syntax is collating symbol s n lt collating symbol gt The lt collating symbol gt is a symbolic name enclosed between angle brackets lt and gt and must not duplicate any symbolic name in the current charmap file if any or any other symbolic name defined in this collation definition A collating symbol defined via this keyword is only recognized with the LC_COLLATE category For example collating symbol lt UPPER_CASE gt collating symbol lt HIGH gt The collating symbol keyword defines a symbolic name that can be associated with a relative position in the character order sequence While such a symbolic name does not represent any collating element it can be used as a weight The order_start keyword must precede collation order entries and also defines the number of weights for this collation sequence definition and other collation rules The syntax of the order_start keyword is order start s s s n lt sort rules gt lt sort rules gt The operands to the order_start keyword are optional If present the operands define rules to be applied when strings are compared The number of operands define how many weights each element is assigned if no operands are present one forward operand is assumed If present the first operand defines rules to be applied when
270. l characters listed in ERE Special Characters below The interpretation of an ordinary character preceded by a backslash X is undefined Standards Environments and Macros 309 regex 5 ERE Special Characters Periods in EREs ERE Bracket Expression EREs Matching Multiple Characters An ERE special character has special properties in certain contexts Outside those contexts or when preceded by a backslash such a character is an ERE that matches the special character itself The extended regular expression special characters and the contexts in which they have their special meaning are EA The period left bracket backslash and left parenthesis are special except when used in a bracket expression see RE Bracket Expression above Outside a bracket expression a left parenthesis immediately followed by a right parenthesis produces undefined results The right parenthesis is special when matched with a preceding left parenthesis both outside a bracket expression fuc The asterisk plus sign question mark and left brace are special except when used in a bracket expression see RE Bracket Expression above Any of the following uses produce undefined results m if these characters appear first in an ERE or immediately following a vertical line circumflex or left parenthesis m if a left brace is not part of a valid interval expression The vertical line is special except when used in a bracket expression see
271. ld for an attribute file are set to 0xB000 As with the tar archive format extended attributes are stored in cpio archives as two consecutive file entries The first file describes the location name for the extended attribute The second file contains the actual attribute file content The c name field in extended attribute headers is ignored though it should be set to a meaningful value for the benefit of archivers that do not process these headers Solaris archivers start the pathname with dev null to prevent archivers that do not understand the type E header from trying to restore extended attribute files in inappropriate places Attribute identification data format Both the tar and cpio archive formats can contain the special files described above always paired with the extended attribute data record for identifying the precise location of the extended attribute These special data files are necessary because there is no simple naming mechanism for extended attribute files Extended attributes are not visible in the file system name space The extended attribute name space must be tunneled into using the openat function The attribute identification data must support not only the flat naming structure for extended attributes but also the possibility of future extensions allowing for attribute directory hierarchies and recursive attributes The data file is therefore composed of a sequence of records It begins with a fixed length head
272. le definition file only the characters defined for the class digit can be specified in contiguous ascending sequence by numerical value followed by one or more sets of six characters representing the hexadecimal digits 10 to 15 inclusive with each set in ascending order for example A B C D E F b c d e The digits 0 to 9 the upper case letters A to F and the lower case letters a to of the portable character set are automatically included in this class The definition of character class xdigit requires that the characters included in character class digit be included here also Define characters to be classified as blank characters In the POSIX locale only the space and tab characters are included In a locale definition file the characters space and tab are automatically included in this class Define one or more locale specific character class names as strings separated by semi colons Each named character class can then be defined subsequently in the LC CTYPE definition A character class name consists of at least one and at most CHARCLASS NAME MAX bytes of alphanumeric characters from the portable filename character set The first character of a character class name cannot be a digit The name cannot match any of the LC CTYPE keywords defined in this document Define characters to be classified as belonging to the named locale specific character class In the POSIX locale the locale specific named ch
273. le whose size exceeds 8 Gbyte 1 byte The usr bin truss utilities has been modified to read a dump file and display information relevant to large files such as offsets The following usr bin utilities are large file aware for cachefs file systems cachefspack cachefsstat The following usr sbin utilities are large file aware for cachefs file systems cachefslog cachefswssize cfsadmin fsck mount umount The following utilities are large file aware for nfs file systems usr lib autofs automountd usr sbin mount usr lib nfs rquotad The following usr bin utility is large file aware for u s file systems df Standards Environments and Macros 193 largefile 5 The following usr lib nfs utility is large file aware for ufs file systems rquotad The following usr xpg4 bin utility is large file aware for u s file systems df The following usr sbin utilities are large file aware for u s file systems clri dcopy edquota ff fsck fsdb fsirand fstyp labelit lockfs mkfs mount ncheck newfs quot quota quotacheck quotaoff quotaon repquota tunefs ufsdump ufsrestore umount Large file safe A utility is called large file safe if it causes no data loss or corruption when it encounters utilities a large file A utility that is large file safe is unable to process properly a large file but returns an appropriate error The following usr bin utilities are large file safe audioconvert audioplay audiorecord comm
274. lib security pam sample so 1 The SAMPLE service module for PAM is divided into four components authentication account management password management and session management The sample module is a shared object that is dynamically loaded to provide the necessary functionality The SAMPLE authentication module typically usr lib security pam sample so 1 provides functions to test the PAM framework functionality using the pam sm authenticate 3PAM call The SAMPLE module implementation of the pam sm authenticate 3PAM function compares the user entered password with the password set in the pam conf A file or the string test if a default test password has not been set The following options may be passed in to the SAMPLE Authentication module debug Syslog debugging information at the LOG DEBUG level passwd newone Sets the password to be newone first pass good The first password is always good when used with the use first pass or try first pass option first pass bad The first password is always bad when used with the use first pass or try first pass option always fail Always returns PAM AUTH ERR always_succeed Always returns PAM_SUCCESS always_ignore Always returns PAM IGNORE use first pass Use the user s initial password entered when the user is authenticated to the first authentication module in the stack to authenticate with the SAMPLE module If the passwords do not match or if this is the first authenticatio
275. libraries This introduces another level of safety for libraries in a multi threaded program Cancel Safety There are two sub categories of Cancel Safety Deferred Cancel Safety and Asynchronous Cancel Safety An application is considered to be Deferred Cancel Safe when it is Cancel Safe for threads whose cancellation type is PTHREAD CANCEL DEFERRED An application is considered to be Asynchronous Cancel Safe when it is Cancel Safe for threads whose cancellation typeis PTHREAD CANCEL ASYNCHRONOUS Deferred Cancel Safety is easier to achieve than Asynchronous Cancel Safety since a thread with the deferred cancellation type can be cancelled only at well defined cancellation points whereas a thread with the asynchronous cancellation type can be cancelled anywhere Since all threads are created by default to have the deferred cancellation type it may never be necessary to worry about asynchronous cancel safety Indeed most applications and libraries are expected to always be Asynchronous Cancel Unsafe An application which is Asynchronous Cancel Safe is also by definition Deferred Cancel Safe uname 1 pkgada 1M Intro 3 standards 5 Standards Environments and Macros 25 charmap 5 NAME DESCRIPTION Symbolic Names Declarations charmap character set description file A character set description file or charmap defines characteristics for a coded character set Other information about the coded character set may also be in th
276. lists escape sequences and associated actions on display devices capable of the action Sequence Character Terminal Action NN backslash None a alert Attempts to alert the user through audible or visible notification b backspace Moves the printing position to one column before the current position unless the current position is the start of a line Standards Environments and Macros 91 formats 5 Sequence Character Terminal Action ys form feed Moves the printing position to the initial printing position of the next logical page Mn newline Moves the printing position to the start of the next line Nr carriage return Moves the printing position to the start of the current line Nt Moves the printing position to the next tab position on the current line If there are no more tab positions left on the line the behavior is undefined v Moves the printing position to the start of the next vertical tab position If there are no more vertical tab positions left on the page the behavior is undefined Conversion Each conversion specification is introduced by the percent sign character After the Specifications character the following appear in sequence flags field width precision conversion characters Zero or more flags in any order that modify the meaning of the conversion specification An optional string of decimal digits to specify a minimum field width For an output field if
277. m independent sharable files The subtree rooted at usr share contains platform independent sharable files the rest of the usr tree contains platform dependent files By mounting a common remote file system a group of machines with a common platform may share a single usr file system A single usr share file system can be shared by machines of any platform A machine acting as a file server can share many different usr file systems to support several different architectures and operating system releases Clients usually mount usr read only so that they do not accidentally change any shared files The usr file system contains the following subdirectories usr 4lib a out libraries for the Binary Compatibility Package usr 5bin Symbolic link to the usr bin directory usr X Symbolic link to the usr openwin directory usr adm Symbolic link to the var adm directory usr apache Apache executables loadable modules and documentation usr aset Directory for Automated Security Enhancement Tools ASET programs and files usr bin Platform amp hyphen dependent user invoked executables These are commands users expect to be run as part of their normal PATH For executables that are different on a 64 bit system than on a 32 bit system a wrapper that selects the appropriate executable is placed here See isaexec 3C An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system so
278. m ldap so 1 EXAMPLE 3 Using pam authtok store With Password Management For Both Local and LDAP Accounts The following is a configuration for password management when using pam authtok store instead of pam 1dap This configuration works because pam authtok store updates password in all the repositories configured by nsswitch conf 4 Lines that begin with the symbol are comments and the lines are ignored 4 Password management authentication passwd auth binding pam passwd auth so 1 server policy passwd auth required pam ldap so 1 Password management updates This is the preferred stack since it updates passwords stored both in the local etc files and in the LDAP directory The server policy option is used to tell pam authtok store to follow the LDAP server s policy when updating passwords stored in the LDAP directory other password required pam dhkeys so 1 other password requisite pam authtok get so 1 other password requisite pam authtok check so 1 other password required pam authtok store so 1 server policy EXAMPLE 4 Using pam 1dap With Password Management if There are no Local Accounts Use the following configuration for password management when using pam 1dap Lines that begin with the symbol are comments and athe comments are ignored 4 Password management authentication The control flag binding provides a local overriding remote LDAP control The server policy option is used
279. mands listed below and described in individual man pages which implement all of the Live Upgrade features and functions The software also includes a Forms and Menu Language Interpreter based user interface named 1u 1M See m1i 1 for a description of the Forms and Menu Language Interpreter The FMLI interface implements a subset of Live Upgrade functions Unlike the command line interfaces output from the FMLI interface is not internationalizable The following are some of the tasks you can perform with Live Upgrade software m You can make one or more copies of the currently running system m You can upgrade to a new OS version on a second boot environment then boot from that environment If you choose you can then fall back to your original boot environment or boot from yet another environment m You can install application or OS packages to a boot environment then boot from that environment m You can install OS patches to a boot environment then boot from that environment m From a flash archive you can install an OS to a boot environment then boot from that environment See 1ar 1M for information on administering flash archives You can split and rejoin file systems in a new BE For example you can separate usr var and opt from putting them on their own partitions Conversely you could join these file systems on a single partition under m You can mount any or all of the filesystems of a BE that is no
280. me Default root of a subtree for user directories kernel Subtree of platform amp hyphen dependent loadable kernel modules required as part of the boot process It includes the generic part of the core kernel that is platform amp hyphen independent kernel genunix See kerne1 1M An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software kernel drv 32 bit device drivers 48 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Nov 2001 filesystem 5 kernel drv sparcv9 64 bit SPARC device drivers kernel genunix Platform amp hyphen independent kernel kernel subsystem 1a64 64 bit x86 platform amp hyphen dependent modules required for boot An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software Note that 1a64 is an example name the actual name might be different kernel subsystem sparcv9 64 bit SPARC platform amp hyphen dependent modules required for boot An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software mnt Default temporary mount point for file systems This is an empty directory on which file systems can be temporarily mounted opt Root of a subtree for add on application packages platform Subtree of plattorm amp hyphen specific objects which need to reside on the root filesystem It contains a series of directories one per supported platform The semantics
281. me of the object The only intended use of this reference is that it be passed to fn ctx handle from ref 3XEN For an FNS enterprise level object implemented on top of etc files The address contains the context type and version number of the reference and the location of the object in the etc file system The only intended use of this reference is that it be passed to fn ctx handle from ref 3XEN For a user s home directory The address contains the user s name and the name of the naming service password table where the user s home directory is stored For a user s home directory The address contains the user s name and the name of the NIS password table where the user s home directory is stored For all file systems exported by a host The address contains the host s name For a single mount point The address contains the mount options the name of the servers and the exported path See mount 1M For a printer s address in the files naming service For a printer s address in the NIS naming service For a printer s address in the NIS naming service 86 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 13 Dec 1996 SEE ALSO fns references 5 fn link addr For an XEN link address The contents is the string form of the composite name inet domain For an Internet domain The address contains the fully qualified domain name for example Wiz COM inet ipaddr string For an obj
282. ms A BE is made up of a unique copy of one or more non shareable file systems and zero or more copies of shareable file systems Live Upgrade commands support an option X that enables XML output Characteristics of the XML are specified in a DTD shipped with the product XML output enables programmatic parsing of portions of the command output Live Upgrade supports the notion of a BE description an optional attribute of a BE A BE description can be of any length and format It might be a text string or a binary file See Ludesc 1M for details Below is an example set of steps that you might follow in the use of Live Upgrade software These steps specify the use of commands rather than 1u 1M the FMLI interface Many Live Upgrade functions are accessible through 1u Except where lu does not support a function the choice between 1u and Live Upgrade commands is a matter of your requirements and preferences The following example is by no means exhaustive of the possibilities of the use of the Live Upgrade software 1 You create a new BE using lucreate 1M The first time you create a BE on a given system you must designate the current Solaris operating environment as a BE give it a name You then specify a name and a set of device disk slices you want to use for the new BE The lucreate command copies the contents of the current Solaris operating environment now a BE to the new BE After you have created additional BEs you can us
283. n module in the stack quit and do not prompt the user for a password It is recommended that this option only be used if the SAMPLE authentication module is designated as optional in the pam conf configuration file try first pass Use the user s initial password entered when the user is authenticated to the first authentication module in the stack to authenticate with the SAMPLE module If the passwords do not match or if this is the first authentication module in the stack prompt the user for a password The SAMPLE module pam sm setcred 3PAM function always returns PAM SUCCESS Standards Environments and Macros 289 pam sample 5 SAMPLE Account Management Component SAMPLE Password Management SAMS RH Management Component ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES The SAMPLE Account Management Component typically pam_sample so 1 implements a simple access control scheme that limits machine access to a list of authorized users The list of authorized users is supplied as option arguments to the entry for the SAMPLE account management PAM module in the pam conf file Note that the module always permits access to the root super user The option field syntax to limit access is shown below allow name name allow name allow name The example pam conf show below permits only larry to login directly rlogin is allowed only for don and larry Once a user is logged in the user can use su if the user are sam or eric
284. n name resolution FNS uses DNS to name entities globally Names can be constructed for any enterprise that is accessible on the Internet consequently names can also be constructed for objects exported by these enterprises FNS provides the XFN interface for performing naming resolution on DNS domains and hosts In addition enterprise namespaces such as those served by NIS and NIS can be federated with DNS by adding TXT records to DNS To federate an NIS or NIS namespace under DNS you first obtain the root reference for the NIS hierarchy or NIS domain This reference is referred to as the next naming system reference because it refers to the next naming system beneath the DNS domain This reference contains information about how to communicate with the NIS or NIS servers and has the following format lt domainname gt server name server address gt where domainname is the fully qualified domain name Notice that NIS and NIS have slightly different syntaxes for domain names For NIS the fully qualified domain name is case insensitive and terminated by a dot character For NIS the fully qualified domain name is case sensitive and is not terminated by a dot character For both NIS and NIS server address gt is optional If it is not supplied a host name lookup will be performed to get the machine s address For example if the machine wiz nisplus server with address 133 33 33 33 serves the NIS domain wiz com
285. n semicolon separated strings each surrounded by double quotes The first string is the abbreviated name of the day corresponding to Sunday the second the abbreviated name of the day corresponding to Monday and so on day Define the full weekday names corresponding to the A field descriptor The operand consists of seven semicolon separated strings each surrounded by double quotes The first string is the full name of the day corresponding to Sunday the second the full name of the day corresponding to Monday and so on abmon Define the abbreviated month names corresponding to the b field descriptor The operand consists of twelve semicolon separated strings each surrounded by double quotes The first string is the abbreviated name of the first month of the year January the second the abbreviated name of the second month and so on mon Define the full month names corresponding to the 8 field descriptor The operand consists of twelve semicolon separated strings each surrounded by double quotes The first string is the full name of the first month of the year January the second the full name of the second month and so on d t fmt Define the appropriate date and time representation corresponding to the c field descriptor The operand consists of a string and can contain any combination of characters and field descriptors In addition the string can contain the escape sequences Va b f Nn Nzz NE Ny date fm
286. n set as described in The Pentium Processor User s Manual This is effectively i486 plus the CPU ID instruction and any features that the CPU ID instruction indicates are present 4 pentium mmx Like pentium with the MMX instructions guaranteed present 5 pentium pro The Intel PentiumPro instruction set as described in The PentiumPro Family Developer s Manual This is effectively pentium with the CMOVcc FCMOVcc FCOMI and RDPMC instructions guaranteed present 6 pentium pro mmx Like pentium pro with the MMX instructions guaranteed present isalist 1 sysinfo 2 Standards Environments and Macros 191 largefile 5 NAME DESCRIPTION Large file aware utilities largefile large file status of utilities A large file is a regular file whose size is greater than or equal to 2 Gbyte 2 bytes A small file is a regular file whose size is less than 2 Gbyte A utility is called large file aware if it can process large files in the same manner as it does small files A utility that is large file aware is able to handle large files as input and generate as output large files that are being processed The exception is where additional files are used as system configuration files or support files that can augment the processing For example the file utility supports the m option for an alternative magic file and the f option for a support file that can contain a list of file names It is unspecified whether a
287. n wiz com has an NIS principal name jsmith wiz com A user s NIS home domain corresponds to the user s FNS organizational unit and determines the binding for myens and myorgunit A host s NIS home domain corresponds to the host s FNS organizational unit and determines the binding for thisens thisorgunit user and host Standards Environments and Macros 77 fns_nis 5 Federating NIS with DNS or X 500 NIS Security SEE ALSO Federating NIS with the global naming systems DNS or X 500 makes NIS contexts accessible outside of an NIS hierarchy To enable the federation the administrator must first add address information in either DNS or X 500 see ns_dns 5 and fns_x500 5 After this administrative step has been taken clients outside of the NIS hierarchy can access contexts and perform operations from outside the hierarchy as an unauthenticated NIS client The command fncreate 1M creates NIS tables and directories in the NIS hierarchy associated with the domain of the host on which it executes The invoker of fncreate 1M and other FNS commands is expected to have the necessary NIS credentials See nis 1 and nisdefaults 1 The environment variable NIS GROUP of the process specifies the group owner for the NIS objects thus created In order to facilitate administration of the NIS objects NIS GROUP should be set to the name of the NIS administration group for the domain prior to executing ncreate 1M
288. namic information about managed elements acting as an intermediary between the CIM Object Manager and the managed elements Solaris software providers have been developed for a variety of areas users roles file systems and network configuration for example A remote provider is also available to distribute agents away from the CIM Object Manager when required Because of the incremental development capabilities of the WBEM instrumentation framework developers can progressively and consistently add more providers for additional Solaris software services SNMP Adapter for WBEM which enables Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP management applications to access system management information that is provided by Solaris WBEM Services Used with the Solstice Enterprise Agent SEA Master Agent snmpdx 1M the SNMP Adapter for WBEM maps SNMP requests into equivalent WBEM Common Information Model CIM properties or instances The SNMP Adapter for WBEM also remaps the response from the CIM Object Manager into an SNMP response which is returned to the management application A mapping file contains the corresponding Object Identifier OID class name property name and Abstract Syntax Notation One ASN 1 type for each object Developers can create their own mapping files m SNMP Provider which enables WBEM services to deliver SNMP information This kit consists of a set of key application Software development tools that make it e
289. nc fn host A context for naming objects related to a computer onc fn site A context for naming sites onc fn service A context for naming services onc fn nsid A context for naming namespace identifiers onc fn generic A context for naming application specific objects onc fn fs A context for naming files directories and file systems onc fn printername A context for naming printers onc printers A printer object When implemented on top of NIS this could also be a context for naming printers fn link ref An XEN link inet domain An Internet domain All address types use the FN ID STRING identifier format unless otherwise qualified The format of address contents is determined by the corresponding address type onc fn nisplus For an ENS enterprise level object implemented on top of NIS The address Standards Environments and Macros 85 fns references 5 onc fn nis onc fn files onc fn fs user onc fn fs user nisplus onc fn fs host onc fn fs mount onc fn printer files onc fn printer nis onc fn printer nisplus contains the context type context representation type either normal or merged version number of the reference and the NIS name of the object The only intended use of this reference is that it be passed to fn ctx handle from ref 3XEN For an FNS enterprise level object implemented on top of NIS The address contains the context type and version number of the reference and the NIS na
290. ncludes the lt regexp h header file must have a define statement for INIT It is used for dependent declarations and initializations Most often it is used to set a register variable to point to the beginning of the regular expression so that this register variable can be used in the declarations for GETC PEEKC and UNGETC Otherwise it can be used to declare external variables that might be used by GETC PEEKC and UNGETC See EXAMPLES below The first parameter to the step and advance functions is a pointer to a string of characters to be checked for a match This string should be null terminated The second parameter expbuf is the compiled regular expression which was obtained by a call to the function compile Standards Environments and Macros 317 regexp 5 318 EXAMPLES DIAGNOSTICS The function step returns non zero if some substring of string matches the regular expression in expbuf and 0 if there is no match If there is a match two external character pointers are set as a side effect to the call to step The variable loc1 points to the first character that matched the regular expression the variable loc2 points to the character after the last character that matches the regular expression Thus if the regular expression matches the entire input string 1oc1 will point to the first character of string and 1oc2 will point to the null at the end of string The function advance returns non zero if th
291. nd Macros 227 locale 5 p sign posn n sign posn set to 1 if a space separates the symbol from the value and set to 2 if a space separates the symbol and the sign string if adjacent An integer set to a value indicating the positioning of the positive sign fora monetary quantity with a non negative value The following integer values are recognized for both p sign posnandn sign posn 0 Parentheses enclose the quantity and the currency symbolorint curr symbol The sign string precedes the quantity and the currency symbol or int curr symbol The sign string succeeds the quantity and the currency symbol or int curr symbol The sign string precedes the currency symbol orint curr symbol The sign string succeeds the currency symbol orint curr symbol An integer set to a value indicating the positioning of the negative sign for a negative formatted monetary quantity The following table shows the result of various combinations p cs precedes 1 p sign posn 0 p sign posn 1 p sign posn 2 p sign posn 3 p sign posn 4 p cs precedes 0 p sign posn 0 p sign posn 1 p sign posn 2 p sign posn 3 p sep by space 2 1 0 1 25 1 25 1 25 1 25 1 25 1 25 1 254 1 254 1 254 1 25 1 25 1 25 41 25 41 25 41 25 1 25 1 25 1 258 41 25 41 25 1 25 1 25 1 25 1 25 1 25 1 25 1 25 228 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996
292. nd intervals produces undefined results The order of precedence is as shown in the following table BRE Precedence from high to low collation related bracket symbols escaped characters bracket expression subexpressions back references single character BRE duplication concatenation 1E 1E lt special character n mn man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 12 Jul 1999 BRE Expression Anchoring EXTENDED REGULAR EXPRESSIONS EREs Matching a Single Character ERE Ordinary Characters regex 5 anchoring A BRE can be limited to matching strings that begin or end a line this is called anchoring The circumflex and dollar sign special characters will be considered BRE anchors in the following contexts 1 Acircumflex is an anchor when used as the first character of an entire BRE The implementation may treat circumflex as an anchor when used as the first character of a subexpression The circumflex will anchor the expression to the beginning of a string only sequences starting at the first character of a string will be matched by the BRE For example the BRE ab matches ab in the string abcdef but fails to match in the string cdefab A portable BRE must escape a leading circumflex in a subexpression to match a literal circumflex 2 A dollar sign is an anchor when used as the last character of an entire BRE
293. nd pic picture Begin pic picture End table End heading section of table Begin table if x is H table has repeated heading Set up for ACM style output A is the Author s name s N is the total number of pages Must be given before the first initialization Print x in boldface if no argument switch to boldface Augments the base indent by n This indent is used to set the indent on regular text like paragraphs Begin new column Print x in bold italics nofill only Begin bulleted paragraph Print x in a box nofill only Set even footer to x y z Set even header to x y z Set footer to x y z Suppress headers and footers on next page Set header to x y z Draw a horizontal line 248 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 25 Feb 1992 Request ipxy SLP lo np LA of XYZ oh x yz pd PP on re Sc shnx Sk Smx Sz 4n th Initial Value no no yes HI HI no yes no no 10p no Cause Break no yes yes no yes no no yes yes no no no yes no no no no me 5 Explanation Italicize x if x missing italic text follows Start indented paragraph with hanging tag x Indentation is y ens default 5 Start left blocked paragraph Read in a file of local macros of the form x Must be given before initialization Start numbered paragraph Set odd f
294. nd time formats LC NUMERIC Numeric formatting LC MONETARY Monetary formatting LC MESSAGES Formats of informative and diagnostic messages and interactive responses The standard utilities base their behavior on the current locale as defined in the ENVIRONMENT section for each utility The behavior of some of the C language functions will also be modified based on the current locale as defined by the last call to setlocale 3C Locales other than those supplied by the implementation can be created by the application via the localedef 1 utility The value that is used to specify a locale when using environment variables will be the string specified as the name operand to localedef when the locale was created The strings C and POSIX are reserved as identifiers for the POSIX locale Applications can select the desired locale by invoking the set1ocale function with the appropriate value If the function is invoked with an empty string such as setlocale LC ALL the value of the corresponding environment variable is used If the environment variable is unset or is set to the empty string the set1ocale function sets the appropriate environment Locales can be described with the file format accepted by the 1ocaledef utility The locale definition file must contain one or more locale category source definitions and must not contain more than one definition for the same locale category A category source definition consi
295. ndards Environments and Macros 121 iconv 5 NAME DESCRIPTION 122 iconv code set conversion tables The following code set conversions are supported Code ISO 646 ISO 646de ISO 646da ISO 646en ISO 646es ISO 646fr ISO 646it ISO 646sv ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 SO 8859 1 SO 8859 1 8859 1 SO 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 16 ISO 8859 2 ISO 8859 16 ISO 8859 16 ISO 8859 2 SO 8859 2 8859 2 BM 850 BM 870 MS 1250 MS 852 MS 852 MS 852 MS 852 Mazovia n o n o Mazovia Mazovia Mazovia DHN DHN DHN DHN ISO 8859 5 ISO 8859 5 ISO 8859 5 ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R KOI8 R KOI8 R KOI8 R PC Cyrillic PC Cyrillic PC Cyrillic Code Set Conversions Symbol 646 646de 646da 646en 646es 646fr 646it 646sv 8859 8859 8859 8859 8859 8859 8859 8859 isol6 iso2 isol6 isol6 iso2 iso2 iso2 ibm850 ibm870 win2 dos2 dos2 dos2 dos2 maz maz maz maz dhn dhn dhn dhn iso5 iso5 iso5 iso5 koi8 koi8 koi8 koi8 alt alt alt Target Code ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 ISO 646 ISO 646de ISO 646da ISO 646en ISO 646es ISO 646fr ISO 646it ISO SO SO 646sv 8859 2 8859 16 IBM 850 IBM 870 MS 1250 MS 852 Mazovia SO 8859 16 SO 8859 16 HN SO 8859 2 S 1250 D M Mazovia DHN ISO 8859 2 MS 1250 MS 852 DHN ISO 8859 2 MS 1250 MS 852 Mazovia KOI8 R PC Cyrillic MS 1
296. ndards Environments and Macros 67 fns 5 Names can be composed in a uniform way that is FNS supports a model in which composite names are constructed in a uniform syntactic way and can have any number of components m Coherent naming is encouraged through the use of shared contexts and shared names FNS and Naming FNS has support for NIS NIS and files as enterprise level naming services This Systems means that FNS implements the enterprise level policies using NIS NIS and files FNS also supports DNS and X 500 via DAP or LDAP as global naming services as well as support for federating NIS and NIS with DNS and X 500 See the corresponding individual man page for information about the implementation for a specific naming service SEE ALSO nis 1 x n 3XEN ns dns 5 ns files 5 fns initial context 5 fns nis 5 fns nis 5 fns policies 5 fns references 5 fns x500 5 68 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 22 Nov 1996 NAME DESCRIPTION fns dns 5 fns dns overview of FNS over DNS implementation Federated Naming Service FNS provides a method for federating multiple naming services under a single simple interface for the basic naming operations One of the naming services supported by FNS is the Internet Domain Name System or DNS see in named 1M DNS is a hierarchical collection of name servers that provide the Internet community with host and domai
297. nfiguration information for clients and provide that information upon a client s request The information can include the client s IP address and information about network services available to the client This manual page provides a brief summary of the Solaris DHCP implementation The Solaris DHCP client is implemented as background daemon dhcpagent 1M This daemon is started automatically during bootup if there exists at least one dhop interface file in etc Only interfaces with a corresponding etc dhop interface file are automatically configured during boot Network parameters needed for system configuration during bootup are extracted from the information recieved by the daemon through the use of the dhcpinfo 1 command The daemon s default behavior can be altered by changing the tunables in the etc default dhcpagent file The daemon is controlled by the ifconfig 1M utility Check the status of the daemon using the netstat 1M and i config 1M commands The Solaris DHCP server is implemented as a background daemon in dhcpa 1M This daemon can deliver network configuration information to either BOOTP or DHCP clients The Solaris DHCP service can be managed using the dhcpmgr 1M GUI or the command line utilities dhcpconfig 1M dhtadm 1M and pntadm 1M The Solaris DHCP server stores client configuration information in the following two types of tables dheptab tables Contain macros and options also known as symbols us
298. nge is necessary it will be documented in the release notes for the affected release and when feasible Sun will provide migration aids for binary compatibility and continued source development External An External interface is controlled by an entity other than Sun At Sun s discretion Sun can deliver as part of any release updated and possibly incompatible versions of such interfaces subject to their availability from the controlling entity This classification is typically applied to publicly available freeware and similar objects For External interfaces Sun makes no claims regarding either source or binary compatibility between any two releases Applications based on these interfaces might not work in future releases including patches that contain External interfaces Unstable An Unstable interface is provided to give developers early access to new or rapidly changing technology or as an interim solution to a problem for which a more stable solution is anticipated in the future For Unstable interfaces Sun no claims about either source or binary compatibility from one minor release to another Applications developed based on these interfaces may not work in future minor releases Obsolete Scheduled for removal after event An Obsolete interface is supported in the current release but is scheduled to be removed in a future minor release When support of an interface is to be discontinued Sun will attempt to provide notificati
299. ns for eqn eqnchar 42 stability attributes of interfaces 18 Standard Generalized Markup Language sgml 322 solbook 322 standards standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris ANSI 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris C 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris C 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris ISO 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris POSIX 1 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris POSIX 2 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris POSIX 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris standards 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris SUS 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris SUSv2 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris SVID3 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris SVID 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris XNS4 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris XNS5 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris XNS 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris XPG3 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris XPG4 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris XPG4v2 328 standards and specifications supported by Solaris XPG 328
300. nt 1B sh 1 seek 3C te11 3C 1 64 5 lfcompile64 5 standards 5 Certain system specific or non portable interfaces are not usable in the large file compilation environment Known cases are Kernel data structures read from dev kmem Interfaces in the kernel virtual memory library 1kvm Interfaces in the ELF access library 1e1f Interfaces to proc defined in lt procfs h gt The ustat 2 system call Programs that use these interfaces should not be compiled in the large file compilation environment As a partial safeguard against making this mistake including either of the libelf h or sys procfs h header files will induce a compilation error when the large file compilation environment is enabled man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 23 Jul 2001 BUGS Ifcompile 5 In general caution should be exercised when using any separately compiled library whose interfaces include data items of type off t or the other redefined types either directly or indirectly such as with struct stat The redefined types are o t rlim t ino t blkcent t fsblkcnt t and fsfilcnt t For the large file compilation environment to work correctly with such a library the library interfaces must include the appropriate xxx64 binary entry points and must have them mapped to the corresponding primary functions when FILE OFFSET BITS is set to 64 Care should be exercised using any of the pri
301. ntf or scanf routines on variables of the types mentioned above In the large file compilation environment these variables should be printed or scanned using 1ong long formats The 1int 1B utility will generate spurious error messages when FILE OFFSET BITS is set to 64 This is because the binary 1ibc lint library usr lib llib lc 1n is compiled only for the standard interfaces not with FILE OFFSET BITS set to 64 This deficiency hampers static error checking for programs compiled in the large file compilation environment Symbolic formats analogous to those found in sys int fmtio h do not exist for printing or scanning variables of the types that are redefined in the large file compilation environment Standards Environments and Macros 205 Ifcompile64 5 NAME DESCRIPTION Access to Additional Large 206 File Interfaces Ifcompile64 transitional compilation environment All 64 bit applications can manipulate large files by default The transitional interfaces described on this page can be used by 32 bit and 64 bit applications to manipulate large files In the transitional compilation environment explicit 64 bit functions structures and types are added to the API Compiling in this environment allows both 32 bit and 64 bit applications to access files whose size is greater than or equal to 2 Gbyte 2 bytes The transitional compilation environment exports all the explicit 64 bit functions
302. nts and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 Conversions Performed DHN ISO 8859 2 DHN ISO 8859 2 215 216 217 220 221 361 363 266 274 277 366 367 370 371 376 367 40 260 40 For the conversion of DHN to MS 1250 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed DHN MS 1250 DHN MS 1250 200 245 233 237 40 201 306 240 341 202 312 241 355 203 243 242 363 204 321 243 372 205 323 244 251 40 206 214 252 254 207 217 253 255 40 210 257 256 253 211 271 257 273 212 346 260 340 40 213 352 341 337 214 263 342 345 40 215 361 346 265 216 363 347 360 40 217 234 361 261 220 237 362 365 40 221 277 366 367 DHN to MS 852 DHN to Mazovia iconv_dhn 5 Conversions Performed DHN MS 1250 DHN MS 1250 222 223 224 225 230 231 232 40 364 366 40 326 334 367 370 371 372 373 376 40 260 40 267 40 For the conversion of DHN to MS 852 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed DHN MS 852 DHN MS 852 200 244 212 206 201 217 213 251 202 250 214 210 203 235 215 344 204 343 216 242 205 340 217 230 206 227 220 253 207 215 221 276 210 275 222 375 40 211 245 For the conversion of DHN to Mazovia all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed D
303. nts outside of the NIS hierarchy or NIS domain can access and perform operations on the contexts in the NIS hierarchy or NIS domain Foreign NIS clients access the hierarchy as unauthenticated NIS clients Continuing the example above and assuming that NIS is federated underneath the DNS domain Wiz COM you can now list the root of the NIS enterprise using the command finlist Wiz COM SEE ALSO fnlist 1 fnlookup 1 nis 1 in named 1M ypserv 1M x n 3XEN ns 5 fns nis 5 fns nis 5 fns_ references 5 fns x500 5 70 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 22 Nov 1996 NAME DESCRIPTION FNS Policies and etc Files Security Considerations USAGE fns_files 5 fns files overview of FNS over files implementation The Federated Naming Service FNS provides a method for federating multiple naming services under a single simple interface for the basic naming operations One of the naming services supported by FNS is etc files FNS provides the XFN interface for performing naming and attribute operations on ENS enterprise objects organization site user host and service objects using files as the naming service ENS stores bindings for these objects in files and uses them in conjunction with existing etc files objects FNS defines policies for naming objects in the federated namespace see fns policies 5 At the enterprise level FNS policies specify naming
304. o f 1 troff 1 whatis 1 Dale Dougherty and Tim O Reilly Unix Text Processing Standards Environments and Macros 245 me 5 246 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION REQUESTS me macros for formatting papers nroff me options filename troff me options filename This package of nroff and troff macro definitions provides a canned formatting facility for technical papers in various formats When producing 2 column output on a terminal filter the output through co1 1 The macro requests are defined below Many nroff and troff requests are unsafe in conjunction with this package however these requests may be used with impunity after the first pp bp begin new page br break output line here spn insert n spacing lines ls n line spacing n 1 single 1 2 double space na no alignment of right margin cen center next n lines uln underline next n lines Sz n add n to point size Output of the eqn 1 neqn 1 refer 1 and tb1 1 preprocessors for equations and tables is acceptable as input In the following list initialization refers to the first pp lp ip np sh or uh macro This list is incomplete Request Initial Cause Explanation Value Break c yes Begin centered block d no Begin delayed text a no Begin footnote yes Begin list g yes Begin major quote xx no Begin indexed item in index x z 2 no Begin floating keep aG yes End centered block
305. o be infinite so all bytes up to the end of the string are written Write a o character no argument is converted In no case does a non existent or insufficient field width cause truncation of a field if the result of a conversion is wider than the field width the field is simply expanded to contain the conversion result The term field width should not be confused with the term precision used in the description of s man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 28 Mar 1995 EXAMPLES SEE ALSO formats 5 One difference from the C function printf is that the 1 and h conversion characters are not used There is no differentiation between decimal values for type int type long or type short The specifications d or i should be interpreted as an arbitrary length sequence of digits Also no distinction is made between single precision and double precision numbers float or double in C These are simply referred to as floating point numbers Many of the output descriptions use the term line such as Ss lt input line Since the definition of 1ine includes the trailing newline character already there is no need to include a n in the format a double newline character would otherwise result EXAMPLE 1 To represent the output of a pra that prints a date and time in the form Sunday July 3 10 02 where weekday and month are strings Ss S8 d d 2d n weekday month
306. of pam sm authenticate The following option may be passed in to this service module debug sys10og 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE MT Level MT Safe with exceptions pam 3PAM pam authenticate 3PAM ruserok 3SOCKET syslog 3C libpam 3LIB pam con 4 attributes 5 The interfaces in 1libpam are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle 286 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 28 Oct 1996 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION Role Account Management Module pam roles 5 pam roles Role Account Management PAM module for Solaris usr lib security pam roles so 1 The Role Account Management module for PAM usr lib security pam roles so 1 provides functionality for one PAM module Account management The pam_roles so 1 is a shared object that can be dynamically loaded to provide the necessary functionality upon demand Its path is specified in the PAM configuration file The Role account management component provides a function to check for authorization to assume a role It prevents direct logins to a role It uses the user attr 4 database to specify which users can assume which roles The following options may be passed to the Role Authentication service module debug syslog 3C debugging information at LOG
307. of the series of directories is equivalent to root platform uname i kernel Platform amp hyphen specific modules required for boot These modules have semantics equivalent to kerne1 It includes the file unix the core kernel See kernel 1M An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software platform uname m kernel Hardware class specific modules required for boot An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software platform uname i kernel subsystem ia64 x86 64 bit platform amp hyphen dependent modules required for boot Note that 1a64 is an example name the actual name might be different An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software platform uname i kernel subsystem sparcv9 SPARC 64 bit platform amp hyphen specific modules required for boot An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software platform uname i kernel sparcv9 unix 64 bit platform amp hyphen dependent kernel platform uname i kernel unix 32 bit platform amp hyphen dependent kernel Standards Environments and Macros 49 filesystem 5 platform uname i lib Platform amp hyphen specific shared objects required for boot Semantics are equivalent to 1ib An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software platform uname i sbin Platform amp hyphen specific
308. ombination of characters and field descriptors If the string is empty the 12 hour format is not supported in the locale Define how years are counted and displayed for each era in a locale The operand consists of semicolon separated strings Each string is an era description segment with the format direction offset start date end date era name era format according to the definitions below There can be as many era description segments as are necessary to describe the different eras The start of an era might not be the earliest point For example the Christian era B C starts on the day before January 1 A D 1 and increases with earlier time direction Either a or a character The character indicates that years closer to the start date have lower numbers than those closer to the end date The character indicates that years closer to the start date have higher numbers than those closer to the end date offset The number of the year closest to the start date in the era corresponding to the Eg and Ey field descriptors 232 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 LC TIME C language Access era d fmt era t fmt era d t fmt alt digits locale 5 start date A date in the form yyyy mm dd where yyyy mm and dd are the year month and day numbers respectively of the start of the era Years prior to A D 1 are represented as negative numbers end date T
309. omponent provides a function to change passwords pam sm chauthtok in the Key Distribution Center KDC database The following options can be passed in to the Kerberos V5 password module debug Provides syslog 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turns off warning messages use first pass Requests Kerberos V5 authentication with the user s initial password entered when the user authenticated to the first authentication module in the stack If Kerberos V5 authentication fails or if no password has been entered it quits and does not prompt the user for a password If authentication succeeds the user is prompted by New KRB5 password for a new man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 21 Jan 2003 Sample pam conf File pam krb5 5 password The user is then prompted a second time for the new password for verification and the KDC database is updated with the new password if both responses match try first pass Requests Kerberos V5 authentication with the user s initial password entered when the user authenticated to the first authentication module in the stack If Kerberos V5 authentication fails or if no password has been entered the user is prompted for a password with the prompt Old KRB5 Password If authentication succeeds the user is prompted by New KRB5 password for a new password The user is then prompted a second time for the new password for verification and
310. on and values other than zero for various error conditions This section lists all file names referred to by the man page files of interest and files created or required by commands Each is followed by a descriptive summary or explanation This section lists characteristics of commands utilities and device drivers by defining the attribute type and its corresponding value See attributes 5 for more information This section lists references to other man pages in house documentation and outside publications 10 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros September 2004 DIAGNOSTICS WARNINGS NOTES BUGS This section lists diagnostic messages with a brief explanation of the condition causing the error This section lists warnings about special conditions which could seriously affect your working conditions This is not a list of diagnostics This section lists additional information that does not belong anywhere else on the page It takes the form of an aside to the user covering points of special interest Critical information is never covered here This section describes known bugs and wherever possible suggests workarounds 11 12 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros September 2004 Introduction Intro 5 14 NAME DESCRIPTION Intro introduction to miscellany Among the topics presented in this section are Standards Environments Macros Char
311. on before discontinuing support Use of an Obsolete interface may produce warning messages MT Level Libraries are classified into four categories which define their ability to support multiple threads Manual pages containing routines that are of multiple or differing levels show this within their NOTES or USAGEsection Safe Safe is an attribute of code that can be called from a multithreaded application The effect of calling into a Safe interface or a safe code segment is that the results are valid even when called by multiple threads Often overlooked is the fact that the result of this Safe interface or safe code segment can have global consequences that affect all threads For example the action of opening or closing a file from one thread is visible by all the threads within a process A multi threaded application has the responsibility for using these interfaces in a safe manner which is different from whether or not the interface is Safe For example a multi threaded application that closes a file that is still in use by other threads within the application is not using the close 2 interface safely man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Aug 2001 attributes 5 Unsafe An Unsafe library contains global and static data that is not protected It is not safe to use unless the application arranges for only one thread at time to execute within the library Unsafe libraries may contain routines tha
312. ooter to x y z Set odd header to x y z Print delayed text Begin paragraph First line indented Roman text follows Reset tabs to default values Read in a file of special characters and diacritical marks Must be given before initialization Section head follows font automatically bold n is level of section x is title of section Leave the next page blank Only one page is remembered ahead Set x in a smaller pointsize Augment the point size by n points Produce the paper in thesis format Must be given before initialization Standards Environments and Macros 249 me 5 250 Request tp uh Xp xX Initial Value no Cause Break yes no yes no FILES usr share lib tmac e usr share lib tmac me Explanation Begin title page Underline argument even in trof f Nofill only Like sh but unnumbered Print index x SEE ALSO co1 1 eqn 1 nro 1 refer 1 tb1 1 trof 1 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 25 Feb 1992 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION REQUESTS mm 5 mm text formatting memorandum macros nroff mm options filename troff mm options filename This package of nrof 1 and trof 1 macro definitions provides a formatting facility for various styles of articles theses and books When producing 2 column output on a terminal or lineprinter or when reverse line motions are needed
313. or none y indent XE y end index entry or series of IX entries XP yy paragraph with first line indented others indented XS xy z y begin index entry x page or no for none y indent man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 25 Feb 1992 REGISTERS ms 5 Break Macro Name Initial Value Reset Explanation 1C on yy one column format on a new page i2 yy begin two column format n beginning of refer reference 0 n end of unclassifiable type of reference N n N 1journal article 2 book 3 book article 4 report Formatting distances can be controlled in ms by means of built in number registers For example this sets the line length to 6 5 inches nr LL 6 5i Here is a table of number registers and their default values Name Register Controls Takes Effect Default PS point size paragraph 10 VS vertical spacing paragraph 12 line length paragraph 6i LT title length next page same as LL FL footnote length next FS 5 5i PD paragraph distance paragraph 1v if n 3v Gif t DD display distance displays 1v if n 5v if t PI paragraph indent paragraph 5n QI quote indent next QP 5n FI footnote indent next FS 2n PO page offset next page 0 if n 1i if t HM header margin next page li FM footer margin next page li FF footnote format next FS 0 1 2 3 available Wh
314. or the requested message catalog in name name cat and nlslib LANG name cat For gettext N automatically maps to messages If NLSPATH is unset or NULL catopen and gettext call setlocale 3C which checks LANG and the LC variables to locate the message catalogs NLSPATH will normally be set up on a system wide basis in etc profile and thus makes the location and naming conventions associated with message catalogs transparent to both programs and users PATH The sequence of directory prefixes that sh 1 time 1 nice 1 nohup 1 and other utilities apply in searching for a file known by an incomplete path name The prefixes are separated by colons 1ogin 1 sets PATH usr bin For more detail see sh 1 Standards Environments and Macros 39 environ 5 SEV LEVEL Define severity levels and associate and print strings with them in standard format error messages see addseverity 3C fmtmsg 1 and ntmsg 3C TERM The kind of terminal for which output is to be prepared This information is used by commands such as vi 1 which may exploit special capabilities of that terminal TZ Timezone information The contents of this environment variable are used by the functions ctime 3C 1ocaltime 3C strftime 3C and mkt ime 3C to override the default timezone If TZ is not in the following form it designates a path to a timezone database file relative to usr share lib zoneinfo ignoring the first
315. os Last Revised 21 Jan 2003 LDAP Account Management Module LDAP Password Management Module ERRORS pam ldap 5 The following options may be passed to the LDAP service module debug syslog 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages These options are case sensitive and the options must be used exactly as presented here The LDAP account management module validates the user s account The pam sm acct mgmt 3PAM function authenticates to the LDAP server to verify that the user s password has not expired or that the user s account has not been locked The following options may be passed to the LDAP service module debug syslog 3C debugging information at LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages These options are case sensitive and the options must be used exactly as presented here The preferred way to configure password management for LDAP is by using the pam authtok store 5 module and by specify ing the server policy option Use the pam authtok store function instead of pam 1dap for password change When password management is configured this way both the local and LDAP accounts are handled pam authtok store 5 updates the passwords in all the repositories configured by nsswitch conf 4 pam 1dap updates only the password in the LDAP password database The LDAP password management module provides the pam sm chauthtok function to change passwords in the LDAP d
316. oy in your logout file Under SEAM a client is referred to as a principal A principal takes the following form primary instance REALM primary A user a host or a service instance A qualification of the primary If the primary is a host indicated by the keyword host then the instance is the fully qualified domain name of that host If the primary is a user or service then the instance is optional Some instances such as admin or root are privileged 320 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 17 Nov 1999 EXAMPLES SEE ALSO NOTES SEAM 5 realm The Kerberos equivalent of a domain in fact in most cases the realm is directly mapped to a DNS domain name SEAM realms are given in upper case only For examples of principal names see the EXAMPLES By taking advantage of the General Security Services API GSS API SEAM offers besides user authentication two other types of security service integrity which authenticates the validity of transmitted data and privacy which encrypts transmitted data Developers can take advantage of the GSS API through the use of the RPCSEC_GSS API interface see rpcsec_gss 3NSL EXAMPLE 1 Examples of valid principal names The following are examples of valid principal names joe joe admin joe ENG ACME COM joe admineENG ACME COM rlogin bigmachine eng acme comeENG ACME COM host bigmachine eng acme comQENG ACME COM The first four cas
317. pam 1dap module The EXAMPLES section shows how the UNIX modules are stacked with pam ldap When stacked together the UNIX modules are used to control local accounts such as root pam 1dap is used for control with the network accounts that is LDAP users For the stacks to work pam unix auth pam unix account pam passwd auth and pam authtok store must to configured with the binding control flag and the server policy option This configuration allows local account override of a network account The LDAP authentication module verifies the identity of a user The pam sm authenticate function uses the password entered by the user to attempt to authenticate to the LDAP server If successful the user is authenticated The authentication method used is either defined in the client profile or the authentication method is configured by using the 1dapclient 1M command To determine the authentication method to use this module first attempts to use the authentication method that is defined for service pam 1dap for example serviceAuthenticationMethod pam ldap sasl DIGEST MD5 lfno authentication method is defined pam ldap uses the default authentication method If neither are set the authentication fails This module skips the configured authentication method if the authentication method is set to none The pam sm setcred 3PAM function does nothing This function always returns PAM IGNORE man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macr
318. pecial symbol UNDEFINED The order in which collating elements are specified determines the character order sequence such that each collating element compares less than the elements following it The NUL character compares lower than any other character A lt collating element gt is used to specify multi character collating elements and indicates that the character sequence specified via the lt collating element gt is to be collated as a unit and in the relative order specified by its place A collating symbol is used to define a position in the relative order for use in weights No weights are specified with a lt collating symbol gt The ellipsis symbol specifies that a sequence of characters will collate according to their encoded character values It is interpreted as indicating that all characters with a coded character set value higher than the value of the character in the preceding line and lower than the coded character set value for the character in the following line in the current coded character set will be placed in the character collation order between the previous and the following character in ascending order according to their coded character set values An initial ellipsis is interpreted as if the preceding line specified the NUL character and a trailing ellipsis as if the following line specified the highest coded character set value in the current coded character set An ellipsis is treated as invalid if the precedin
319. penat 2 Using the API The following examples demonstrate how the API might be used to perform basic operations on extended attributes EXAMPLE 1 List extended attributes on a file attrdirfd attropen test O RDONLY dirp fdopendir attrdirfd while dp readdir dirp 102 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Aug 2001 Extended Archive Formats fsattr 5 EXAMPLE 2 Open an extended attribute attrfd attropen test dp gt d_name O RDONLY or attrfd openat attrdirfd dp gt d_name O RDONLY EXAMPLE 3 Read from an extended attribute while read attrfd buf 512 gt 0 EXAMPLE 4 Create an extended attribute newfd attropen test attr O CREAT O RDWR or newfd openat attrdirfd attr O CREAT O RDWR EXAMPLE 5 Write to an extended attribute count write newfd buf length EXAMPLE 6 Delete an extended attribute error unlinkat attrdirfd attr Applications intending to access the interfaces defined here as well as the POSIX and X Open specification conforming interfaces should define the macro ATFILE SOURCE to be 1 and set whichever feature test macros are appropriate to obtain the desired environment See standards 5 As noted above in the description of command utilities modified to provide support for extended attributes the archive formats for tar 1 and cpio 1 have been extended to provide support for archiv
320. pression specifies a set of character strings A member of this set of strings is said to be matched by the regular expression Some characters have special meaning when used in a regular expression other characters stand for themselves The following one character REs match a single character 14 An ordinary character not one of those discussed in 1 2 below is a one character RE that matches itself 1 2 A backslash X followed by any special character is a one character RE that matches the special character itself The special characters are Standards Environments and Macros 313 regexp 5 1 3 1 4 a and period asterisk left square bracket and backslash respectively which are always special except when they appear within square brackets 1 see 1 4 below b caret or circumflex which is special at the beginning of an entire RE see 4 1 and 4 3 below or when it immediately follows the left of a pair of square brackets 1 see 1 4 below c dollar sign which is special at the end of an entire RE see 4 2 below d The character used to bound that is delimit an entire RE which is special for that RE for example see how slash is used in the g command below A period is a one character RE that matches any character except new line A non empty string of characters enclosed in square brackets 1 isa one character RE that matches any one character in that str
321. r add on system software or for applications is opt packagename sbin usr share Platform amp hyphen independent sharable files An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software usr share admserv5 1 iPlanet Console and Administration Server documentation usr share audio Sample audio files usr share ds5 iPlanet Server documentation usr share lib Platform amp hyphen independent sharable databases An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software 60 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Nov 2001 filesystem 5 usr share lib dict Contains word list for spe11 1 usr share lib keytables Keyboard layout description tables usr share lib mailx Help files for mailx 1 usr share lib nterm nroff 1 terminal tables usr share lib pub Character set data files usr share lib tabset Tab setting escape sequences usr share lib terminfo Terminal description files for terminfo 4 usr share lib tmac Macro packages and related files for text processing tools for example nro f 1 and troff 1 usr share lib zoneinfo Time zone information usr share s man Platform amp hyphen independent sharable manual pages An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is opt packagename s man usr share src Source code for kernel utilities and libr
322. r levels Standards Environments and Macros 19 attributes 5 Release Version Significance Major x 0 Likely to contain major feature additions adhere to different possibly incompatible Standard revisions and though unlikely could change drop or replace Standard or Stable interfaces Initial product releases are usually 1 0 Minor Xy Compared to an x 0 or earlier release y 0 it s likely to contain minor feature additions compatible Standard and Stable interfaces possibly incompatible Evolving interfaces or likely incompatible Unstable interfaces Micro X y z Intended to be interface compatible with the previous release z 0 but likely to add bug fixes performance enhancements and support for additional hardware Classifications The following table summarizes how stability level classifications relate to release level The first column lists the Stability Level The second column lists the Release Level for Incompatable Changes and the third column lists other comments For a complete discussion of individual classifications see the appropriate subsection below Stability Release Comments Standard Major x 0 Actual or de facto Stable Major x 0 Incompatibilities are exceptional Evolving Minor x y Migration advice might accompany an incompatibility Unstable Minor x y Experimental or transitional incompatibilities are common External Micro x y z Not
323. r more information about man pages in general NAME This section gives the names of the commands or functions documented followed by a brief description of what they do SYNOPSIS This section shows the syntax of commands or functions When a command or file does not exist in the standard path its full path name is shown Options and arguments are alphabetized with single letter arguments first and options with arguments next unless a different argument order is required The following special characters are used in this section Brackets The option or argument enclosed in these brackets is optional If the brackets are omitted the argument must be specified Ellipses Several values can be provided for the previous argument or the previous argument can be specified multiple times for example filename Separator Only one of the arguments separated by this character can be specified at a time I Braces The options and or arguments enclosed within braces are interdependent such that everything enclosed must be treated as a unit 8 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros September 2004 PROTOCOL DESCRIPTION IOCTL OPTIONS OPERANDS OUTPUT RETURN VALUES ERRORS This section occurs only in subsection 3R to indicate the protocol description file This section defines the functionality and behavior of the service Thus it describes concisely what the command does It does not
324. r server that maintains the FNS information For example the command fncreate 1M creates the NIS map for the associated NIS domain in the system on which it is executed Hence the command must be run by a privileged user either on the NIS master server or on a system that will serve as a NIS master server for FNS The NIS object name that corresponds to an FNS composite name can be obtained using fnlookup 1 and fnlist 1 Standards Environments and Macros 79 fns nis 5 SEE ALSO fnbind 1 fnlist 1 fnlookup 1 fnunbind 1 ypcat 1 ypmat ch 1 ncheck 1M ncreate 1M ncreate fs 1M ncreate printer 1M ndestroy 1M x n 3XEN ypfiles 4 fns 5 fns dns 5 fns_files 5 fns initial context 5 fns nis 5 fns policies 5 fns references 5 fns x500 5 80 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 22 Nov 1996 NAME DESCRIPTION fns policies 5 fns policies overview of the ENS Policies FNS defines policies for naming objects in the federated namespace The goal of these policies is to allow easy and uniform composition of names The policies use the basic rule that objects with narrower scopes are named relative to objects with wider scopes FNS policies are described in terms of the following three categories global enterprise and application Global naming service A global naming service is a naming service that has world wide scope Internet DNS and X 500 are e
325. rap Protocol Carnegie Mellon University October 1993 34 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 13 Mar 2001 NAME DESCRIPTION SUNWfiles SUNWbinfiles SUNWnhisplus dhcp_modules 5 dhcp modules data storage modules for the DHCP service This man page describes the characteristics of data storage modules public modules for use by the Solaris Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP service Public modules are the part of the DHCP service architecture that encapsulate the details of storing DHCP service data in a data storage service Examples of data storage services are NIS Oracle and ufs file systems Public modules are dynamic objects which can be shipped separately from the Solaris DHCP service Once installed a public module is visible to the DHCP service and can be selected for use by the service through the DHCP service management interfaces dhepmgr 1M dhcpconfig 1M dhtadm 1M and pntadm 1M Public modules may be provided by Sun Microsystems Inc or by third parties The Solaris DHCP service management architecture provides a mechanism for plugging in public module specific administration functionality into the dhcpmgr 1M and dhcpconfig 1M utilities This functionality is in the form of a Java Bean which is provided by the public module vendor This Java Bean collects public module specific configuration from the user you and provides it to the Solaris DHCP service
326. ration for the login service when using pam 1dap The service name login can be substituted for any other authentication service such as dtlogin or su Lines that begin with the symbol are comments and these lines ignored Authentication management for login service is stacked If pam unix auth succeeds pam ldap is not invoked The control flag binding provides a local overriding remote LDAP control The server policy option is used to tell pam unix auth so 1 to ignore the LDAP users login auth requisite pam authtok get so 1 login auth required pam dhkeys so 1 login auth binding pam unix auth so 1 server policy login auth required pam ldap so 1 EXAMPLE 2 Using pam 1dap With Account Management The following is a configuration for account management when using pam 1dap Lines that begin with the symbol are ignored man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 21 Jan 2003 pam ldap 5 EXAMPLE 2 Using pam 1dap With Account Management Continued Account management for all services is stacked If pam unix account succeeds pam ldap is not invoked The control flag binding provides a local overriding remote LDAP control The server policy option is used to tell pam unix account so 1 to ignore the LDAP users other account requisite pam roles so 1 other account required pam projects so 1 other account binding pam unix account so 1 server policy other account required pa
327. rd operand is assumed The character and collating element order is defined by the order in which characters and elements are specified between the order_start and order_end keywords This character order is used in range expressions in regular expressions see regex 5 Weights assigned to the characters and elements define the collation sequence in the absence of weights the character order is also the collation sequence The position keyword provides the capability to consider in a compare the relative position of characters not subject to IGNORE As an example consider the two strings o ring and or ing Assuming the hyphen is subject to IGNORE on the first pass the two strings will compare equal and the position of the hyphen is immaterial On second pass all characters except the hyphen are subject to IGNORE and in the normal case the two strings would again compare equal By taking position into account the first collates before the second The order start keyword is followed by collating identifier entries The syntax for the collating element entries is oo oe S s s s n lt collating identifier gt weight lt weight gt man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 locale 5 Each collating identifier consists of either a character described in Locale Definition above a lt collating element gt a lt collating symbol gt an ellipsis or the s
328. re and for add on system software usr platform uname i lib ia64 x86 64 bit platform amp hyphen specific daemon and shared objects Note that 1a64 is an example name the actual name might be different An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software usr platform uname i lib sparcv9 SPARC 64 bit plattorm amp hyphen specific daemon and shared objects An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software usr platform uname i s mannum Where num can be one of 3x 1m 4 7d or 9e Platform amp hyphen specific system manual pages for documenting platform amp hyphen specific shared objects administration utilities configuration files special files modules and header files An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software usr platform uname i sbin Platform specific system administration utilities with semantics equivalent to usr sbin An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software usr preserve Symbolic link to the var preserve directory usr proc Directory for the proc tools usr proc bin Contains links to SPARC Version 8 binaries in usr bin usr pub Files for online man page and character processing usr sadm System administration files and directories Standards Environments and Macros 59 filesystem 5
329. rguments their associated path arguments old and new are interpreted relative to the current working directory if they are not specified as absolute paths Any attempt to use renameat to move a file that is not an extended attribute into an extended attribute directory so that it becomes an extended attribute will fail The same is true for an attempt to move a file that is an extended attribute into a directory that is not an extended attribute directory Obtain information about a file int fstatat int fd const char path struct stat buf int flag The statat 2 function obtains information about a file If the path argument is relative it is resolved relative to the fd argument file descriptor otherwise the fd argument is ignored If the fd argument is a special value AT FDCWD the path is resolved relative to the current working directory If the path argument is a null 100 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Aug 2001 fsattr 5 pointer the function returns information about the file referenced by the fd argument In all other relative path cases if the fd argument does not refer to a valid directory the function returns ENOTDIR If the flag argument is set to AT_SYMLINK_NOFOLLOW the function will not automatically traverse a symbolic link at the position of the path The fstatat function is a multi purpose function that can be used in place of stat Istat or fstat See st
330. rgv NULL crabort INVALIDUSER if ruid 0 if pwp gt pw_uid ruid crabort NOTROOT else pp getuser ruid else pp argv else EXAMPLE 2 Authorization check ruid getuid if pwp getpwuid ruid NULL crabort INVALIDUSER strcpy real login pwp pw name if eflag lflag rflag amp amp argc 1 if pwp getpwnam argv NULL crabort INVALIDUSER if chkauthattr solaris jobs admin real_login if pwp gt pw_uid ruid crabort NOTROOT else pp getuser ruid else pp argv else For new applications find an appropriate location for the test and use chkauthattr as shown above Typically the authorization check makes an access decision based on the identity of the calling user to determine if a privileged action for example a system call should be taken on behalf of that user Applications that perform a test to restrict who can perform their security relevant functionality are generally setuid to root Programs that were written prior to RBAC and that are only available to the root user may not have such checks In most cases the kernel requires an effective user ID of root to override policy enforcement Therefore authorization checking is most useful in programs that are setuid to root For instance if you want to write a program that allows authorized users to set the system date the command must be run with an effectiv
331. riod left bracket and backslash are special except when used in a bracket expression see RE Bracket Expression below An expression containing a that is not preceded by a backslash and is not part of a bracket expression produces undefined results P The asterisk is special except when used m ina bracket expression m as the first character of an entire BRE after an initial if any 304 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 12 Jul 1999 Periods in BREs RE Bracket Expression regex 5 m as the first character of a subexpression after an initial if any see BREs Matching Multiple Characters below A The circumflex is special when used m asan anchor see BRE Expression Anchoring below m as the first character of a bracket expression see RE Bracket Expression below The dollar sign is special when used as an anchor A period when used outside a bracket expression is a BRE that matches any character in the supported character set except NUL A bracket expression an expression enclosed in square brackets is an RE that matches a single collating element contained in the non empty set of collating elements represented by the bracket expression The following rules and definitions apply to bracket expressions 1 A bracket expression is either a matching list expression or a non matching list expression It consists of one or more expressions collating elemen
332. ronments and Macros Last Revised 18 Apr 1997 NAME DESCRIPTION CONVERSIONS ISO 8859 5 to KOI8 R iconv_8859 5 5 iconv_8859 5 code set conversion tables for ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic The following code set conversions are supported Code Set Conversions Supported Code Symbol Target Code Symbol Target Output ISO 8859 5 iso5 KOI8 R koi8 KOI8 R ISO 8859 5 iso5 PC Cyrillic alt Alternative PC Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 iso5 MS 1251 win5 Windows Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 iso5 Mac Cyrillic mac Macintosh Cyrillic The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal For the conversion of ISO 8859 5 to KOI8 R all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R 24 4 320 301 241 263 321 302 242 261 322 327 243 262 323 307 244 264 324 304 245 265 325 305 246 266 327 332 247 267 330 311 250 270 331 312 251 271 332 313 252 272 333 314 253 273 334 315 254 274 335 316 256 276 336 317 Standards Environments and Macros 147 iconv_8859 5 5 148 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R ISO 8859 5 KOI8 R 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 310 311 312 277 341 342 367 347 344 345 366 372 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 3
333. ronments and Macros 275 pam krb5 5 276 ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES dtlogin account required usr lib security ISA pam_unix so 1 dtlogin account optional usr lib security ISA pam krb5 so 1 Session management other session required usr lib security ISA pam_unix so 1 other session optional usr lib security ISA pam_krb5 so 1 Password management other password required usr lib security 1SA pam unix so 1 other password optional usr lib security 1SA pam krb5 so 1 try first pass The Kerberos V5 module entries typically follow the Unix module entries Thus the Kerberos V5 modules are stacked behind the Unix module For the login service the Kerberos V5 authentication module runs after the Unix module Its entry is optional so the user can still login if it fails assuming that the previous Unix module succeeded If the entry designates required instead of optional the user cannot login if Kerberos V5 authentication fails Because the try first pass option is designated it tries the user s password entered for the Unix module If Kerberos V5 authentication fails or no password has been entered the user is prompted for the Kerberos V5 password For all session related services the Kerberos V5 session module runs after the Unix module For the dtlogin service the Kerberos V5 account management module runs after the Unix module For all password changing related services the Kerberos V5 module runs after the
334. routine will not deadlock with itself if interrupted by a signal Signals are only a problem for MT Safe routines that acquire locks Standards Environments and Macros 23 attributes 5 24 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Aug 2001 Signals are disabled when locks are acquired in Async Signal Safe routines This prevents a signal handler that might acquire the same lock from being called The list of Async Signal Safe functions includes exit aio return cfgetispeed cfsetospeed chown creat execle fdatasync fsync getgid getpid kill mkdir pathconf read sem post setpgid sigaction sigemptyset sigpending sigsuspend Ssysconf tcflush tcsendbreak thr kill timer getoverrun times access aio suspend cfgetospeed chdir clock gettime dup execve fork getegid getgroups getppid link mkfifo pause rename sema post setsid sigaddset sigfillset sigprocmask sleep tcdrain tcgetattr tcsetattr thr sigsetmask timer gettime umask aio error alarm cfsetispeed chmod close dup2 fcntl fstat geteuid getpgrp getuid lseek open pipe rmdir setgid setuid sigdelset sigismember sigqueue stat tcflow tcgetpgrp tcsetpgrp time timer settime uname SEE ALSO attributes 5 unlink utime wait waitpid write MT Safe with Exceptions See the NOTES or USAGE sections of these pages for a description of the exceptions Safe w
335. rst PRELIM invocation the implementation of pam sm chauthtok 3PAM moves the contents of the PAM AUTHTOK current authentication token to PAM OLDAUTHTORK and subsequentially prompts the user for a new password This new password is stored in PAM AUTHTOK If a previous module has set PAM AUTHTOK prior to the invocation of pam authtok get this module turns into a NO OP and immediately returns PAM SUCCESS In the second UPDATE invocation the user is prompted to Re enter his password The pam sm chauthtok implementation verifies this reentered password with the password stored in PAM AUTHTOK If the passwords match the module returns PAM SUCCESS The following option can be passed to the module debug syslog 3C debugging information at the LOG DEBUG level The authentication service returns the following error codes PAM SUCCESS Successfully obtains authentication token PAM SYSTEM ERR Fails to retrieve username username is NULL or empty The password management service returns the following error codes PAM SUCCESS Successfully obtains authentication token PAM AUTHTOK ERR Authentication token manipulation error Standards Environments and Macros 267 pam authtok get 5 ATTRIBUTES See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Interface Stability Evolving MT Level MT Safe with exceptions SEE ALSO pam 3PAM pam authenticate 3PAM syslog 3C
336. rvice operating at its highest efficiency See nisping 1M and crontab 1 for more information Standards Environments and Macros 35 dhcp modules 5 SEE ALSO crontab 1 dhepconfig 1M dhcpmgr 1M dhtadm 1M nisping 1M pntadm 1M dhcpsvec con f 4 dhep 5 Solaris DHCP Service Developer s Guide 36 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 24 Jan 2003 NAME DESCRIPTION environ 5 environ user environment When a process begins execution one of the exec family of functions makes available an array of strings called the environment see exec 2 By convention these strings have the form variable value for example PATH sbin usr sbin These environmental variables provide a way to make information about a program s environment available to programs A name may be placed in the environment by the export command and name value arguments in sh 1 or by one of the exec functions It is unwise to conflict with certain shell variables such as MAIL PS1 PS2 and IFS that are frequently exported by profile files see profile 4 The following environmental variables can be used by applications and are expected to be set in the target run time environment HOME The name of the user s login directory set by login 1 from the password file see passwd 4 LANG The string used to specify internationalization information that allows users to work with different national conv
337. s m n matches any number of occurrences between m and n inclusive Whenever a choice exists the RE matches as many occurrences as possible The concatenation of REs is a RE that matches the concatenation of the strings matched by each component of the RE 314 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 2 Apr 1996 Addressing with REs 2 5 2 6 regexp 5 A RE enclosed between the character sequences and V isa RE that matches whatever the unadorned RE matches The expression n matches the same string of characters as was matched by an expression enclosed between and X earlier in the same RE Here n is a digit the sub expression specified is that beginning with the n th occurrence of counting from the left For example the expression N NV 1 matches a line consisting of two repeated appearances of the same string An RE may be constrained to match words 3 1 32 lt constrains a RE to match the beginning of a string or to follow a character that is not a digit underscore or letter The first character matching the RE must be a digit underscore or letter gt constrains a RE to match the end of a string or to precede a character that is not a digit underscore or letter An entire RE may be constrained to match only an initial segment or final segment of a line or both 4 1 4 2 4 3 A circumflex at the beginning of an entire RE constr
338. s do not match or if no password has been entered it prompts the user for the old password It also attempts to use the new password entered to the first password module in the stack as the new password for this module If the new password fails it prompts the user for a new password If the user s password has expired the UNIX account module saves this information in the authentication handle using pam set data witha unique name SUNW UNIX AUTHOK DATA The UNIX password module retrieves this information from the authentication handle using pam get data to determine whether or not to force the user to update the user s password See attributes 5 for description of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE MT Level MT Safe with exceptions keylogin 1 pam 3PAM pam authenticate 3PAM pam_setcred 3PAM syslog 3C Libpam 3LIB pam con 4 attributes 5 pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 pam unix session 5 The interfaces in 1ibpam 3LIB are MT Safe only if each thread within the multi threaded application uses its own PAM handle The pam unix 5 module might not be supported in a future release Similar functionality is provided by pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam dhkeys 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 pam unix auth 5 and pam unix session 5
339. s interpreted to mean that each character in the sequence has unique weights equal to the relative order of their character in the character collation sequence The use of the ellipsis as a weight is treated as an error if the collating element is neither an ellipsis nor the special symbol UNDEFINED The special keyword IGNORE as a weight indicates that when strings are compared using the weights at the level where IGNORE is specified the collating element is ignored that is as if the string did not contain the collating element In regular expressions and pattern matching all characters that are subject to IGNORE in their primary weight form an equivalence class An empty operand is interpreted as the collating element itself For example the order statement a lt a gt j lt a gt is equal to lt a gt An ellipsis can be used as an operand if the collating element was an ellipsis and is interpreted as the value of each character defined by the ellipsis The collation order as defined in this section defines the interpretation of bracket expressions in regular expressions For example order_start forward backward UNDEFINED IGNORE IGNORE 224 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 order end keyword LC MONETARY locale 5 lt LOW gt lt space gt lt LOW gt lt space gt lt LOW gt lt a gt lt a gt lt a gt lt a acute gt lt a
340. s to be classified as punctuation characters In the POSIX locale neither the space character nor any characters in classes alpha digit or cntr1 are included In a locale definition file no character specified for the keywords upper lower alpha digit cntrl xdigit or as the space character can be specified Define characters to be classified as printable characters not including the space character In the POSIX locale all characters in classes alpha digit and punct are included no characters in class cntrl are included In a locale definition file characters specified for the keywords upper lower alpha digit xdigit and punct are automatically included in this class No character specified for the keyword cntr1 can be specified Define characters to be classified as printable characters including the space character In the POSIX locale all characters in class graph are included no characters in class cntr1 are included In a locale definition file characters specified for the keywords upper lower alpha digit xdigit punct and the space character are automatically included in this class No character specified for the keyword cntr1 can be specified Define the characters to be classified as hexadecimal digits In the POSIX locale only 0123456789 ABCDEFabcdef are included Standards Environments and Macros 217 locale 5 blank charclass charclass name toupper In a loca
341. s will be recognised The class is expressed by enclosing any one of the collating elements in the equivalence class within bracket equal delimiters For example if a and belong to the same equivalence class then a b b and b will each be equivalent to ab If the collating element does not belong to an equivalence class the equivalence class expression will be treated as a collating symbol Acharacter class expression represents the set of characters belonging to a character class as defined in the LC_CTYPE category in the current locale All character classes specified in the current locale will be recognized A character class expression is expressed as a character class name enclosed within bracket colon delimiters The following character class expressions are supported in all locales alnum ecntr1 lower space alpha digit print upper blank graph punct xdigit In addition character class expressions of the form name are recognized in those locales where the name keyword has been given a charclass definition in the LC CTYPE category A range expression represents the set of collating elements that fall between two elements in the current collation sequence inclusively It is expressed as the starting point and the ending point separated by a hyphen Range expressions must not be used in portable applications because their behav
342. sc This is the section title of the reference page for example User Commands The value of this attribute may be a text entity reference software This is the name of the software product that the topic discussed on the reference page belongs to For example UNIX commands are part of the SunOS x x release The value of this attribute may be a text entity reference arch This is the architectural platform limitation of the subject discussed on the reference page If there are no limitations the value used is generic Other values are sparc and x86 copyright This attribute contains the Sun Microsystems copyright Any other copyrights that may pertain to the individual reference page file should be entered as separate lt refmiscinfo gt entries The value of this attribute may be a text entity reference This tag contains the equivalent information to the TH macro line in an nroff 1 reference page lt refnamediv gt contains three tags These tags contain the text that is before and after the dash on the NAME line lt refname gt These are the names of the topics that are discussed in the file There may be more than one lt refname gt for a page The first lt refname gt must match the name of the file and the lt refentrytitle gt If there are more than one lt refname gt tags each is separated by a comma The comma is generated by the publisher of sgml files so it should not be typed This is referred to as auto
343. se an E type header The prefix and name fields in extended attribute headers are ignored though they should be set to meaningful values for the benefit of archivers that do not process these headers Solaris archivers set the prefix field to dev nu11 to prevent archivers that do not understand the type E header from trying to restore extended attribute files in inappropriate places Extended cpio format The cpio archive format is octet oriented rather than block oriented Each file entry in the archive includes a header that describes the file followed by the file name followed by the contents of the file These data are arranged as described in the following table Field Name Length in Octets Description c magic 6 70707 c dev 6 First half of unique file ID 104 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Aug 2001 fsattr 5 Field Name Length in Octets Description c_ino 6 Second half of unique file ID c_mode 6 File mode bits c_uid 6 User ID of file owner c gid 6 Group ID of file owner c nlink 6 Number of links referencing file c rdev 6 Information for special files c mtime 11 Modification time of file c namesize 6 Length of file pathname c filesize 11 Length of file content c name c namesize File pathname c filedata c filesize File content The basic archive file structure is not changed for extended attributes The file type bits stored in the c mode fie
344. serok 286 pam sample sample module for PAM 289 pam unix authentication account session and password management for UNIX 293 pam unix account PAM account management module for UNIX 296 348 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros September 2004 pam unix session session management PAM module for UNIX 299 password management module pam authtok store 269 POSIX standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 POSIX 1 standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 POSIX 2 standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 profiling utilities profile within a function prof 300 R rbac role based access control 301 regex internationalized basic and extended regular expression matching 304 regular expression compile and match routines advance 313 compile 313 regexp 313 step 313 role based access control rbac 301 S ftp authentication system 320 session management PAM module for UNIX pam unix session 299 sgml Standard Generalized Markup Language 322 sgml Standard Generalized Markup language RefEntry 322 sgml Standard Generalized Markup Language RefMeta 322 RefNameDiv 323 RefSectl 324 RefSect2 324 RefSynopsisDiv 324 shell environment conventional names for terminals term 334 solbook Standard Generalized Markup Language 322 special character definitio
345. sers sites and services The enterprise level naming service provides contexts to allow other objects to be named relative to these objects The organizational unit namespace provides a hierarchical namespace for naming subunits of an enterprise An organizational unit maps to an NIS domain Organizational unit names can be either fully qualified NIS domain names or relatively NIS domain names If a terminal dot is present in the name it is treated as a fully qualified name Otherwise the name is resolved relative to the root NIS domain Users in the NIS namespace are found in the passwd org_dir table of an NIS domain Users in an FNS organizational unit correspond to the users in the passwd org_dir table of the corresponding NIS domain FNS provides a context for each user in the passwd org_dir table Hosts in the NIS namespace are found in the hosts org dir table of an NIS domain Hosts in an FNS organizational unit correspond to the hosts in the hosts org_dir table of the corresponding NIS domain FNS provides a context for each host in the hosts org dir table In NIS users and hosts have a notion of a home domain It is the primary NIS domain that maintains information associated with them A user or host s home domain can be determined directly using its NIS principal name which is composed of the atomic user login name or the atomic host name and the name of the NIS home domain For example user j smith with home domai
346. set whichever feature test macros are appropriate to obtain the desired environment see standards 5 In the following examples the large file compilation environment is accessed by invoking the get conf utility with one of the arguments listed in the table above The additional large file interfaces are accessed by specifying D LARGEFILE SOURCE The examples that use the form of command substitution specifying the command within parentheses preceded by a dollar sign can be executed only in a POSIX conforming shell such as the Korn Shell see ksh 1 In a shell that is not POSIX conforming such as the Bourne Shell see sh 1 and the C Shell see csh 1 the getconf calls must be enclosed within grave accent marks as shown in the second example EXAMPLE 1 An example of compiling a program with a large of _t and that uses fseeko ftello and yacc 1 c89 D LARGEFILE SOURCE D FILE OFFSET BITS 64 o foo getconf LFS CFLAGS y tab c b o getconf LFS LDFLAGS ly getconf LFS LIBS a an nw EXAMPLE 2 An example of compiling a program with a large o f t that does not use fseeko and ftello and has no application specific libraries c89 D FILE OFFSET BITS 64 N getconf LFS CFLAGS a c getconf LFS LDFLAGS getconf LFS LIBS N EXAMPLE 3 An example of compiling a program with a default of _t and that uses fseeko and ftello c89 D LARGEFILE SOURCE a c csh 1 getconf 1 ksh 1 Li
347. sion of these standards with a brief description and the SunOS or Solaris release that first conformed to it POSIX Standard Description Release POSIX 1 1988 system interfaces and headers SunOS 4 1 POSIX 1 1990 POSIX 1 1988 update Solaris 2 0 POSIX 1b 1993 realtime extensions Solaris 2 4 POSIX 1c 1996 threads extensions Solaris 2 6 POSIX 2 1992 shell and utilities Solaris 2 5 POSIX 2a 1992 interactive shell and utilities Solaris 2 5 Solaris 9also supports the X Open Common Applications Environment CAE Portability Guide Issue 3 XPG3 and Issue 4 XPG4 Single UNIX Specification SUS also known as XPG4v2 and Single UNIX Specification Version 2 SUSv2 Both XPG4 and SUS include Networking Services Issue 4 XNS4 SUSv2 includes Networking Services Issue 5 XNS5 The following table lists each X Open specification with a brief description and the SunOS or Solaris release that first conformed to it X Open CAE Specification Description Release XPG3 superset of POSIX 1 1988 containing SunOS 4 1 utilities from SVID3 XPG4 superset of POSIX 1 1990 POSIX 2 1992 Solaris 2 4 and POSIX 2a 1992 containing extensions to POSIX standards from XPG3 SUS XPG4v2 superset of XPG4 containing historical Solaris 2 6 BSD interfaces widely used by common application packages XNS4 sockets and XTI interfaces Solaris 2 6 SUSv2 superset of SUS extended to support Solaris 7 POSIX 1b 1993 POSIX 1c 1996 and ISO IEC
348. sity Panda Programming June 1993 Nussbacher H and Y Bourvine Hebrew Character Encoding for Internet Messages RFC 1555 Israeli Inter University Hebrew University December 1993 Ohta M Character Sets ISO 10646 and ISO 10646 J 1 RFC 1815 Tokyo Institute of Technology July 1995 Ohta M and K Handa ISO 2022 JP 2 Multilingual Extension of ISO 2022 JP RFC 1554 Tokyo Institute of Technology December 1993 Reynolds J and J Postel ASSIGNED NUMBERS RFC 1700 University of Southern California Information Sciences Institute October 1994 Simonson K Character Mnemonics amp Character Sets RFC 1345 Rationel Almen Planlaegning June 1992 Spinellis D Greek Character Encoding for Electronic Mail Messages RFC 1947 SENA S A May 1996 Standards Environments and Macros 187 iconv_unicode 5 188 NOTES The Unicode Consortium The Unicode Standard Version 2 0 Addison Wesley Developers Press July 1996 Wei Y Y Zhang J Li J Ding and Y Jiang ASCII Printable Characters Based Chinese Character Encoding for Internet Messages RFC 1842 AsiaInfo Services Inc Harvard University Rice University University of Maryland August 1995 Yergeau F UTF 8 a transformation format of Unicode and ISO 10646 RFC 2044 Alis Technologies October 1996 Zhu H D Hu Z Wang T Kao W Chang and M Crispin Chinese Character Encoding for Internet Messages RFC 1922 Tsinghua University China In
349. sponding to one and so on Up to 100 alternative symbols may be specified The following table displays the correspondence between the items described above and the conversion specifiers used by date 1 and the strftime 3C wcsftime 3C and st rptime 3C functions localedef langinfo Conversion Keyword Constant Specifier abday ABDAY x a day DAY x A abmon ABMON x sb mon MON SB d t fmt D T FMT c date fmt DATE FMT C d fmt D FMT x t fmt T FMT X am_pm AM STR sp am_pm PM_STR sp t_fmt_ampm T FMT AMPM Sr Standards Environments and Macros 235 236 locale 5 LC TIME General Information LC MESSAGES localedef langinfo Conversion Keyword Constant Specifier era ERA SEC Eg SEG Ey SEY era d fmt ERA D FMT SEX era_t_fmt ERA_T_FMT SEX era d t fmt ERA D T FMT SEC alt digits ALT DIGITS O Although certain of the field descriptors in the POSIX locale such as the name of the month are shown with initial capital letters this need not be the case in other locales Programs using these fields may need to adjust the capitalization if the output is going to be used at the beginning of a sentence The LC TIME descriptions of abday day mon and abmon imply a Gregorian style calendar 7 day weeks 12 month years leap years and so forth Formatting time strings for other types of calendars is outside the scope of this document set As specified under date in Locale Definit
350. st macro it Standards Environments and Macros 329 standards 5 must also define EXTENSIONS Defininpg EXTENSIONS provides the application with access to all interfaces and headers not in conflict with the specified standard The application must define _ EXTENSIONS either at compile time or within the applicatio n source files ANSI ISO C No feature test macros need to be defined to indicate that an application is a conforming C application ANSI ISO C ANSI ISO C does not define any feature test macros If the standard C announcement macro cplusplus is predefined to value 199711 or greater the compiler operates in a standard conforming mode indicating C standards conformance The value 199711 indicates conformance to ISO IEC 14882 1998 as required by that standard As noted above conformance to the standard is incomplete A standard conforming mode is not available with compilers prior to Sun WorkShop C 5 0 C bindings are not defined for POSIX or X Open CAE so specifying feature test macros such as_POSIX SOURCE and XOPEN SOURCE can result in compilation errors due to conflicting requirements of standard C and those specifications POSIX Applications that are intended to be conforming POSIX 1 applications must define the feature test macros specified by the standard before including any headers For the standards listed below applications must define the feature test macros listed Application writ
351. standards development organization approves a non upward compatible change to a Standard interface that Sun decides to support Sun will announce a compatibility and migration strategy Programmers producing portable applications should rely on the interface descriptions present in the standard or specification to which the application is intended to conform rather than the manual page descriptions of Standard interfaces When the standard or specification allows alternative implementation choices the manual page usually only describes the alternative implemented by Sun The manual page also describes any compatible extensions to the base definition of Standard interfaces provided by Sun Stable A Stable interface is a mature interface under Sun s control Sun will try to avoid non upwards compatible changes to these interfaces especially in minor or micro releases If support of a Stable interface must be discontinued Sun will attempt to provide notification and the stability level changes to Obsolete Evolving An Evolving interface may eventually become Standard or Stable but is still in transition Standards Environments and Macros 21 attributes 5 22 Sun will make reasonable efforts to ensure compatibility with previous releases as it evolves When non upwards compatible changes become necessary they will occur in minor and major releases such changes will be avoided in micro releases whenever possible If such a cha
352. stems Before these can be used the system must be configured to be part of a Kerberos realm see SEAM 5 sys Use AUTH_SYS authentication The user s UNIX user id and group ids are passed in the clear on the network unauthenticated by the NFS server This is the simplest security method and requires no additional administration It is the default used by Solaris NFS Version 2 clients and Solaris NFS servers dh Use a Diffie Hellman public key system AUTH_DES which is referred to as AUTH_DH in the forthcoming Internet RFC krb5 Use Kerberos V5 protocol to authenticate users before granting access to the shared filesystem krb5i Use Kerberos V5 authentication with integrity checking checksums to verify that the data has not been tampered with krb5p User Kerberos V5 authentication integrity checksums and privacy protection encryption on the shared filesystem This provides the most secure filesystem sharing as all traffic is encrypted It should be noted that performance might suffer on some systems when using krb5p depending on the computational intensity of the encryption algorithm and the amount of data being transferred none Use null authentication AUTH NONE NFS clients using AUTH_NONE have no identity and are mapped to the anonymous user nobody by NFS Standards Environments and Macros 263 nfssec 5 FILES ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES servers A client using a security mode other than the one wi
353. sticky mark files for special treatment 333 349 subset of a user s environment that depends on language and cultural conventions locale 212 SUS standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 SUSv2 standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 SVID standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 SVID3 standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 T term conventional names for terminals 334 terminals conventional names term 334 traditional UNIX crypt algorithm crypt unix 32 transitional compilation environment Ifcompile64 206 transitional interfaces for 64 bit file offsets 1f64 196 unicode code set conversion tables iconv_unicode 185 user environment environ 37 V vgrindefs vgrind language definitions 338 Ww wbem Web Based Enterprise Management 341 Web Based Enterprise Management wbem 341 X XNS standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 XNS4 standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 XNS5 standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 XPG standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 XPG3 standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 XPG4 standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 XPG4v2 standards and specifications supported by Solaris 328 350 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros
354. sts of a category header a category body and a category trailer A category header consists of the character string naming of the category beginning with the characters LC The category trailer consists of the string END followed by one or more blank characters and the string used in the corresponding category header 212 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 20 Dec 1996 locale 5 The category body consists of one or more lines of text Each line contains an identifier optionally followed by one or more operands Identifiers are either keywords identifying a particular locale element or collating elements Each keyword within a locale must have a unique name that is two categories cannot have a commonly named keyword no keyword can start with the characters LC Identifiers must be separated from the operands by one or more blank characters Operands must be characters collating elements or strings of characters Strings must be enclosed in double quotes Literal double quotes within strings must be preceded by the escape character described below When a keyword is followed by more than one operand the operands must be separated by semicolons blank characters are allowed both before and after a semicolon The first category header in the file can be preceded by a line modifying the comment character It has the following format starting in column 1 comment char c n lt comment chara
355. system 5 var ftp FTP server directory var inet IPv6 router state files var krb5 Database and log files for Kerberos var ld Configuration files for runtime linker var ldap LDAP client configuration files var log System log files var lp Line printer subsystem logging information var mail Directory where users mail is kept var news Community service messages This is not the same as USENET style news var nfs NFS server log files var nis NIS databases var ntp Network Time Protocol NTP server state directory var opt Root of a subtree for varying files associated with optional software packages An approved installation location for add on system software and applications var preserve Backup files for vi 1 and ex 1 var run Temporary files which are not needed across reboots Only root may modify the contents of this directory var sadm Databases maintained by the software package management utilities var sadm system logs Status log files produced by software management functions and or applications For example log files produced for product installation An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software and for add on system software and applications Standards Environments and Macros 51 filesystem 5 var saf Service access facility logging and accounting files var samba Log and lock files for Samba var snmp SNMP status and
356. t 1M tc rc2 d Scripts for entering or leaving run level 2 See init 1M tc rc3 d Scripts for entering or leaving run level 3 See init 1M tc rcS d Scripts for bringing the system up in single user mode tc rcem Directory for reconfiguration manager RCM custom scripts tc rpcsec This directory might contain an NIS authentication configuration file tc saf Service Access Facility files Standards Environments and Macros 47 filesystem 5 etc security Basic Security Module BSM configuration files etc sfw Samba configuration files etc skel Default profile scripts for new user accounts See useradd 1M etc smartcard Solaris SmartCard configuration files etc snmp Solstice Enterprise Agents configuration files etc ssh Secure Shell configuration files See ssh 1 etc sysevent syseventd configuration files etc subsystem Platform amp hyphen dependent subsystem configuration files that are not shared among systems An approved installation location for bundled Solaris software The analogous location for add on system software or for applications is etc opt packagename etc tm Trademark files contents displayed at boot time etc usb USB configuration information etc uucp UUCP configuration information See uucp 1C etc wrsm WCI Remote Shared Memory WRSM configuration information See wrsmconf 1M export Default root of the shared file system tree ho
357. t Define the appropriate date and time representation corresponding to the C field descriptor The operand consists of a string and can contain any combination of characters and field Standards Environments and Macros 231 locale 5 d fmt t fmt am pm t fmt ampm era descriptors In addition the string can contain the escape sequences Na Nb f Nn r NC v Define the appropriate date representation corresponding to the x field descriptor The operand consists of a string and can contain any combination of characters and field descriptors In addition the string can contain the escape sequences NN Na Vb An Nr NE v Define the appropriate time representation corresponding to the X field descriptor The operand consists of a string and can contain any combination of characters and field descriptors In addition the string can contain the escape sequences NN Na Vb An Nr t v Define the appropriate representation of the ante meridiem and post meridiem strings corresponding to the p field descriptor The operand consists of two strings separated by a semicolon each surrounded by double quotes The first string represents the ante meridiem designation the last string the post meridiem designation Define the appropriate time representation in the 12 hour clock format with am pm corresponding to the r field descriptor The operand consists of a string and can contain any c
358. t ETX gt lt IS2 gt lt SI gt lt US gt lt DC1 gt lt EM gt lt FF gt lt IS3 gt lt SO gt VT The following declarations can precede the character definitions Each must consist of the symbol shown in the following list starting in column 1 including the surrounding brackets followed by one or more blank characters followed by the value to be assigned to the symbol code set name The name of the coded character set for which the character set description file is defined mb cur max The maximum number of bytes in a multi byte character This defaults to 1 mb cur min An unsigned positive integer value that defines the minimum number of bytes in a character for the encoded character set 26 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 3 May 1995 Format charmap 5 escape char The escape character used to indicate that the characters following will be interpreted in a special way as defined later in this section This defaults to backslash thinsp which is the character glyph used in all the following text and examples unless otherwise noted lt comment_char gt The character that when placed in column 1 of a charmap line is used to indicate that the line is to be ignored The default character is the number sign The character set mapping definitions will be all the lines immediately following an identifier line containing the string CHARMAP starting in
359. t active compare the files in any pair of BEs delete or rename a BE and perform other administrative tasks The Live Upgrade software supports upgrade from any valid Solaris installation medium including a CD ROM an NFS or UFS directory or a flash archive See flash archive 4 for a description of the flash archive feature man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 14 Apr 2004 live upgrade 5 In simplest terms a BE for Live Upgrade consists of the disk slice containing a root file system and the file system device usually disk slice entries specified in v stab 4 This set of slices is not limited to a single disk This means that you can have multiple BEs on a single device or have a BE spread across slices on multiple devices The minimal requirement for a Live Upgrade BE is the same as for any Solaris boot environment you must have root and usr filesystems which might both reside on All filesystems except for usr var and opt can be shared among multiple BEs if you choose Each BE must have a unique copy of the file systems that contain the OS usr var and opt For Live Upgrade purposes these are referred to as non shareable sometimes referred to as critical file systems With other file systems such as export or home you have the option of copying the files to a new BE or the default sharing them among BEs These are referred to as shareable file syste
360. t are Safe however most of the library s routines are unsafe to call The following table contains reentrant counterparts for Unsafe functions This table is subject to change by Sun Reentrant functions for libc Unsafe Function Reentrant counterpart ctime ctime r localtime localtime r asctime asctime r gmtime gmtime r ctermid ctermid r getlogin getlogin r rand rand r readdir readdir r strtok strtok r tmpnam tmpnam r MT Safe An MT Safe library is fully prepared for multithreaded access It protects its global and static data with locks and can provide a reasonable amount of concurrency Note that a library can be safe to use but not MT Safe For example surrounding an entire library with a monitor makes the library Safe but it supports no concurrency so it is not considered MT Safe An MT Safe library must permit a reasonable amount of concurrency This definition s purpose is to give precision to what is meant when a library is described as Safe The definition of a Safe library does not specify if the library supports concurrency The MT Safe definition makes it clear that the library is Safe and supports some concurrency This clarifies the Safe definition which can mean anything from being single threaded to being any degree of multithreaded Async Signal Safe Async Signal Safe refers to particular library routines that can be safely called from a signal handler A thread that is executing an Async Signal Safe
361. t of the result to bea zero For x or X conversion a non zero result has Ox or OX prefixed to it respectively For e E f g and G conversions the result always contains a radix character even if no digits follow the radix character For g and G conversions trailing zeros are not removed from the result as they usually are For d i o u x X e E f g and G conversions leading zeros following any indication of sign or base are used to pad to the field width no space padding is performed If the 0 and flags both appear the 0 flag is ignored For d i o u xand X conversions if a precision is specified the 0 flag is ignored For other conversions the behaviour is undefined Each conversion character results in fetching zero or more arguments The results are undefined if there are insufficient arguments for the format If the format is exhausted while arguments remain the excess arguments are ignored The conversion characters and their meanings are d i 0 U X X The integer argument is written as signed decimal d or i unsigned octal o unsigned decimal u or unsigned hexadecimal notation x and X The d and i specifiers convert to signed decimal in the style dddd The x conversion uses the numbers and letters 0123456789abcdef and the X conversion uses the numbers and letters 0123456789 ABCDEF The precision component of the argument specifies the minimum number of digits to appear If the value being conv
362. tal constants must be represented by two or three octal digits preceded by the escape character for example 05 141 or 217 In a portable charmap file each constant must represent an 8 bit byte Implementations supporting other byte sizes may allow constants to represent values larger than those that can be represented in 8 bit bytes and to allow additional digits in constants When constants are concatenated for multi byte character values they must be of the same type and interpreted in byte order from first to last with the least significant byte of the multi byte character specified by the last constant In lines defining ranges of symbolic names the encoded value is the value for the first symbolic name in the range the symbolic name preceding the ellipsis Subsequent symbolic names defined by the range will have encoding values in increasing order For example the line lt j0101 gt lt j0104 gt d129 d254 will be interpreted as lt j0101 gt d129 d254 lt j0102 gt d129 d255 lt j0103 gt d130 do lt j0104 gt d130 d1 Note that this line will be interpreted as the example even on systems with bytes larger than 8 bits The comment is optional locale 1 localedef 1 nl_langinfo 3C extensions 5 locale 5 28 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 3 May 1995 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO crypt bsdbf 5 crypt_bsdbf password hashing mod
363. talling or running Live Upgrade you are required to install the limited set of patch revisions Make sure you have the most recently updated patch list by consulting http sunsolve sun com Search for the infodoc 72099 on the SunSolve web site It is possible for an operating system upgrade to remove installed patches Prior to such an upgrade use analyze_patches as described in luupgrade 1M to determine which if any patches will be removed Live Upgrade supports the release it is distributed on and up to three marketing releases back For example if you obtained Live Upgrade with Solaris 9 including a Solaris 9 upgrade that version of Live Upgrade supports Solaris versions 2 6 Solaris 7 and Solaris 8 in addition to Solaris 9 No version of Live Upgrade supports a Solaris version prior to Solaris 2 6 Standards Environments and Macros 211 locale 5 NAME DESCRIPTION Locale Definition locale subset of a user s environment that depends on language and cultural conventions A locale is the definition of the subset of a user s environment that depends on language and cultural conventions It is made up from one or more categories Each category is identified by its name and controls specific aspects of the behavior of components of the system Category names correspond to the following environment variable names LC CTYPE Character classification and case conversion LC COLLATE Collation order LC TIME Date a
364. tching notation is based on the description of regular expression notation described on the regex 5 manual page The following patterns matching a single character match a single character ordinary characters special pattern characters and pattern bracket expressions The pattern bracket expression will also match a single collating element An ordinary character is a pattern that matches itself It can be any character in the supported character set except for NUL those special shell characters that require quoting and the following three special pattern characters Matching is based on the bit pattern used for encoding the character not on the graphic representation of the character If any character ordinary shell special or pattern special is quoted that pattern will match the character itself The shell special characters always require quoting When unquoted and outside a bracket expression the following three characters will have special meaning in the specification of patterns A question mark is a pattern that will match any character An asterisk is a pattern that will match multiple characters as described in Patterns Matching Multiple Characters below The open bracket will introduce a pattern bracket expression The description of basic regular expression bracket expressions on the regex 5 manual page also applies to the pattern bracket expression except that the exclamation mark character replaces the
365. ted via a symbolic name enclosed within angle brackets and The symbolic name including the angle brackets must exactly match a symbolic name defined in the charmap file specified via the localedef option and will be replaced by a character value determined from the value associated with the symbolic name in the charmap file The use of a symbolic name not found in the charmap file constitutes an error unless the category is LC CTYPE Standards Environments and Macros 213 locale 5 or LC COLLATE in which case it constitutes a warning condition see localedef 1 for a description of action resulting from errors and warnings The specification of a symbolic name in a collating element or collating symbol section that duplicates a symbolic name in the charmap file if present is an error Use of the escape character or a right angle bracket within a symbolic name is invalid unless the character is preceded by the escape character Example c c cedilla M a y A character can be represented by the character itself in which case the value of the character is implementation dependent Within a string the double quote character the escape character and the right angle bracket character must be escaped preceded by the escape character to be interpreted as the character itself Outside strings the characters i gt escape_char must be escaped to be interpreted as the character itself For exampl
366. ter header Sets prevailing indent and tabs to 5i Begin indented paragraph with the tag given on the next text line Set prevailing indent to i Resolve the title abbreviation t join to punctuation mark or text p When formatting a manual page man examines the first line to determine whether it requires special processing For example a first line consisting of ENGU t indicates that the manual page must be run through the tb1 1 preprocessor Standards Environments and Macros 239 man 5 A typical manual page for a command or function is laid out as follows TH title 1 9 The name of the command or function which serves as the title of the manual page This is followed by the number of the section in which it appears SH NAME The name or list of names by which the command is called followed by a dash and then a one line summary of the action performed All in roman font this section contains no trof 1 commands or escapes and no macro requests It is used to generate the windex database which is used by the whatis 1 command SH SYNOPSIS Commands The syntax of the command and its arguments as typed on the command line When in boldface a word must be typed exactly as printed When in italics a word can be replaced with an argument that you supply References to bold or italicized items are not capitalized in other sections even when they begin a sentence Syntactic symbols appear in roman face
367. th The openat function in particular can be used in many contexts where chdir or fchdir is currently required See chdir 2 Open a file relative to a file descriptor int openat int fd const char path int oflag mode t model The openat 2 function behaves exactly as open 2 except when given a relative path Where open resolves a relative path from the current working directory openat resolves the path based on the vnode indicated by the supplied file descriptor When oflag is O_XATTR openat interprets the path argument as an extended attribute reference The following code fragment uses openat to examine the attributes of some already opened file dfd openat fd O RDONLY O XATTR void getdents dfd buf nbytes Standards Environments and Macros 99 fsattr 5 If openat is passed the special value AT FDCWD as its first fd argument its behavior is identical to open and the relative path arguments are interpreted relative to the current working directory If the O_XATTR flag is provided to openat or to open the supplied path is interpreted as a reference to an extended attribute on the current working directory Unlink a file relative to a directory file descriptor int unlinkat int dirfd const char pathflag int flagflag The unlinkat 2 function deletes an entry from a directory The path argument indicates the name of the entry to remove If path an absolute path the dirfd
368. th which a Solaris NFS server shares the file system will have its security mode mapped to AUTH NONE In this case if the file system is shared with sec none users from the client will be mapped to the anonymous user The NFS security mode none is supported by share nfs 1M but not by mount nfs 1M or automount 1M etc nfssec conf NFS security service configuration file See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Availability SUNWnfscr automount 1M mount_nfs 1M share_nfs 1M rpc_clnt_auth 3NSL secure rpc 3NSL attributes 5 etc nf ssec conf lists the NFS security services Do not edit this file It is not intended to be user configurable 264 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 10 Jul 2001 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION ERRORS FILES ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES pam authtok check 5 pam authtok check authentication and password management module pam authtok check so 1 pam authtok check provides functionality to the Password Management stack The implementation of pam sm chauthtok performs a number of checks on the construction of the newly entered password pam sm chauthtok is invoked twice by the PAM framework once with flags set to PAM PRELIM CHECK and once with flags setto PAM UPDATE AUTHTOK This module only performs its checks during the first invocation This module expects the curr
369. the hidden extended attribute directory The 1s command displays an following the mode information when extended attributes are present More precisely the output line for a given file contains an character following the mode characters if the pathconf 2 variable XATTR_EXISTS is set to true See the pathconf section below The option uses the same general output format as the 1 option When a file is moved all attributes are carried along with the file rename When a file is moved across a file system boundary the copy command invoked is similar to the cp p variant described above and extended attributes are moved If the extended file attributes cannot be replicated the move operation fails and the source file is not removed The option informs pax to archive attributes but by default pax ignores extended attributes The pax 1 utility is a generic replacement for both tar 1 and cpio 1 and is able to produce either output format in its archive See Extended Archive Formats below for a description of the new archive records In the default case tar does not attempt to place attributes in the archive If the option is specified however tar traverses into the attribute space of all files being placed in the archive and attempts to add the attributes to the archive A new record type has been introduced for extended attribute entries in tar archive files the same is true for pax and cpio archives sim
370. the converted value has fewer bytes than the field width it is padded on the left or right if the left adjustment flag described below has been given to the field width Gives the minimum number of digits to appear for the d o i u x or X conversions the field is padded with leading zeros the number of digits to appear after the radix character for the e and f conversions the maximum number of significant digits for the g conversion or the maximum number of bytes to be written from a string in s conversion The precision takes the form of a period followed by a decimal digit string a null digit string is treated as zero A conversion character see below that indicates the type of conversion to be applied flags The flags and their meanings are The result of the conversion is left justified within the field The result of a signed conversion always begins with a sign or 92 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 28 Mar 1995 Conversion Characters space formats 5 If the first character of a signed conversion is not a sign a space character is prefixed to the result This means that if the space character and flags both appear the space character flag is ignored The value is to be converted to an alternative form For c d i u and s conversions the behaviour is undefined For o conversion it increases the precision to force the first digi
371. the KDC database is updated with the new password if both responses match use xfn pass Requests Kerberos V5 authentication with a mapped password that has been stored under XEN If Kerberos V5 authentication fails or if no password has been stored it quits and does not prompt the user for a password If authentication succeeds the user is prompted by New KRB5 password for a new password The user is then prompted a second time for the new password for verification and the KDC database is updated with the new password if both responses match try xfn pass Requests Kerberos V5 authentication with a mapped password that has been stored under XEN If Kerberos V5 authentication fails or if no password has been stored the user is prompted for a password with the prompt Old KRB5 Password If authentication succeeds the user is prompted by New KRB5 password for a new password The user is then prompted a second time for the new password for verification and the KDC database is updated with the new password if both responses match The following is a sample pam conf configuration file with Kerberos V5 support Please note that this is only intended to give the flavor of the pam conf Kerberos V5 entries and is not complete Authentication management login auth required usr lib security 1SA pam unix so 1 login auth optional usr lib security 1ISA pam krb5 so 1 try first pass Account management Standards Envi
372. the string encoding function used by crypt 3C when the first character of the salt is not a This algorithm is based on a one way encryption algorithm with variations intended among other things to frustrate use of hardware implementations of a key search Only the first eight characters of the key passed to crypt are used with this algorithm the rest are silently ignored The salt is a two character string chosen from the set a zA Z0 9 This string is used to perturb the hashing algorithm in one of 4096 different ways The return value of the crypt_unix algorithm might not be portable among standard conforming systems See standards 5 See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE MT Level Safe passwd 1 crypt 3C crypt_genhash_imp1 3C crypt_gensalt 3C crypt gensalt impl 3C getpassphrase 3C crypt conf 4 passwd 4 policy conf 4 attributes 5 crypt_bsdbf 5 crypt_bsdmd5 5 crypt_sunmd5 5 standards 5 32 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 10 Jun 2002 NAME DESCRIPTION Solaris DHCP Client Solaris DHCP Server DHCP Configuration Tables dhcp 5 dhcp Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP enables host systems in a TCP IP network to be configured automatically for the network as they boot DHCP uses a client server mechanism servers store co
373. tion compile uses the macro RETURN on success and the macro ERROR on failure see above The functions step and advance return non zero on a successful match and zero if there is no match Errors are 11 range endpoint too large 16 bad number 25 digit out of range 36 illegal or missing delimiter man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 2 Apr 1996 regexp 5 41 no remembered search string 42 XC X imbalance 43 too many 44 more than 2 numbers given in 45 expected after V 46 first number exceeds second in 49 imbalance 50 regular expression overflow SEE ALSO regex 5 Standards Environments and Macros 319 SEAM 5 NAME SEAM overview of Sun Enterprise Authentication Mechanism DESCRIPTION SEAM Sun Enterprise Authentication Mechanism authenticates clients in a network environment allowing for secure transactions A client may be a user or a network service SEAM validates the identity of a client and the authenticity of transferred data SEAM is a single sign on system meaning that a user needs to provice a password only at the beginning of a session SEAM is based on the Kerberos system developed at MIT and is compatible with Kerberos V5 systems over heterogeneous networks SEAM works by granting clients tickets which uniquely identify a client and which have a finite lifetime A client possessing a ticket is automatically validate
374. tput ISO 8859 2 iso2 MS 1250 win2 Windows Latin 2 ISO 8859 2 iso2 MS 852 dos2 MS DOS Latin 2 ISO 8859 2 iso2 Mazovia maz Mazovia ISO 8859 2 iso2 DHN dhn Dom Handlowy Nauki The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal For the conversion of ISO 8859 2 to MS 1250 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed ISO 8859 2 MS 1250 ISO 8859 2 MS 1250 24 4 261 271 177 237 40 265 276 241 245 266 234 245 274 267 241 246 214 271 232 251 212 273 235 253 215 274 237 254 217 276 236 256 216 266 236 For the conversion of ISO 8859 2 to MS 852 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Standards Environments and Macros 141 iconv 8859 2 5 142 Conversions Performed ISO 8859 2 MS 852 ISO 8859 2 MS 852 24 177 237 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 270 271 40 377 244 364 235 317 225 227 365 371 346 270 233 215 360 246 275 370 245 362 210 357 226 230 363 367 347 316 317 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 327 322 321 343 325 340 342 212 231 236 374 336 351 353 232 355 335 341 352 240 203 307 204 222 206 207 23
375. ts collating symbols equivalence classes character classes or range expressions see rule 7 below Portable applications must not use range expressions even though all implementations support them The right bracket loses its special meaning and represents itself in a bracket expression if it occurs first in the list after an initial circumflex if any Otherwise it terminates the bracket expression unless it appears in a collating symbol such as or is the ending right bracket for a collating symbol equivalence class or character class The special characters SER HO period asterisk left bracket and backslash respectively lose their special meaning within a bracket expression The character sequences left bracket followed by a period equals sign or colon are special inside a bracket expression and are used to delimit collating symbols equivalence class expressions and character class expressions These symbols must be followed by a valid expression and the matching terminating sequence or as described in the following items 2 A matching list expression specifies a list that matches any one of the expressions represented in the list The first character in the list must not be the circumflex For example abc is an RE that matches any of the characters a b or c 3 A non matching list expression begins with a circumflex and specifies a list that matches any character or collating
376. tural components are called elements The organization and structure of a document and the meaning of elements are described in the Document Type Definition DTD Elements are the tags that identify the content Element names may be descriptive of the content for ease of use For example para for paragraphs Elements can have attributes which are used to modify or refine the properties or characteristics of the element Within the DTD a valid context for each element is defined and a framework is provided for the types of elements that constitute a compliant document Another component of the DTD is entities Entities are a collection of characters that can be referenced as a unit Entities are similar to constants in a programming language such as C They can be defined and referenced An entity can represent one character or symbol which does not appear on a standard keyboard a word or group of words or an entire separate sgml marked up file Entities allow reuse of standard text There is no single standard DTD but the de facto standard for the computer industry is the DocBook DTD developed and maintained by the Davenport Group Within Sun the SolBook DTD which is a proper subset of DocBook DTD is used when writing reference manual pages The SolBook DTD contains a number of tags that are designed for the unique needs of the reference pages Elements are defined with a hierarchical structure that gives a structure to the document
377. ty pam ldap so 1 The pam 1dap module implements pam sm authenticate pam sm setcred pam sm acct mgmt and pam sm chauthtok the functions that provide functionality for the PAM authentication account management and password management stacks The pam 1dap module ties the authentication account management and password change functionality to the functionality of the supporting LDAP server For authentication pam 1dap can authenticate the user directly to any LDAP directory server by using any supported authentication mechanism such as DIGEST MD5 However the account management and password change components of pam 1dap will only work with the bundled Sun ONE Directory Server The Sun ONE Directory Server user account management that is password and account lockout policy must be properly configured on the server before it can be used by pam 1ldap to provide the account management password aging and password syntax checking controls Refer to the Sun ONE Directory Server Administrator s Guide that is cited in the NOTES section pam ldap must be used in conjunction with the modules that support the UNIX authentication password and account management which are pam authtok check 5 pam authtok get 5 pam authtok store 5 pam passwd auth 5 pam unix account 5 and pam unix auth 5 pam ldap is designed to be stacked directly below these modules If other modules are designed to be stacked in this manner the modules can be stacked below the
378. uld not contain hyphens except that synonyms may be chosen that do not conflict with other names Up to 8 characters chosen from the set a through z and 0 through 9 make up a basic terminal name Names should generally be based on original vendors rather than local distributors A terminal acquired from one vendor should not have more than one distinct basic name Terminal sub models operational modes that the hardware can be in or user preferences should be indicated by appending a hyphen and an indicator of the mode Thus an AT amp T 4425 terminal in 132 column mode is att4425 w The following suffixes should be used where possible Suffix Meaning Example w Wide mode more than 80 att4425 w columns am With auto margins usually vt100 am default nam Without automatic margins vt100 nam n Number of lines on the screen aaa 60 na No arrow keys leave them in c100 na local np Number of pages of memory c100 4p man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 3 Jul 1990 term 5 Reverse video att4415 rv To avoid conflicts with the naming conventions used in describing the different modes of a terminal for example w it is recommended that a terminal s root name not contain hyphens Further it is good practice to make all terminal names used in the terminfo 4 database unique Terminal entries that are present only for inclusion in other entries via the use facilities
379. ule using Blowfish cryptographic algorithm usr lib security ISA crypt bsdbf so The crypt_bsdmd5 module is a one way password hashing module for use with crypt 3C that uses the Blowfish cryptographic algorithm The algorithm identifier for crypt conf 4 and policy conf 4 is 2a See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE MT Level Safe passwd 1 crypt 3C crypt_genhash_imp1 3C crypt gensalt 3C crypt_gensalt_imp1 3C getpassphrase 3C crypt conf 4 passwd 4 policy conf 4 attributes 5 Standards Environments and Macros 29 crypt bsdmdb 5 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO crypt_bsdmd5 password hashing module using MD5 message hash algorithm usr lib security ISA crypt bsdmd5 so The crypt_bsdmd5 module is a one way password hashing module for use with crypt 3C that uses the MD5 message hash algorithm The algorithm identifier for crypt conf 4 and policy conf 4 is 1 The output is compatible with md5crypt on BSD and Linux systems See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE MT Level Safe passwd 1 crypt 3C crypt_genhash_imp1 3C crypt gensalt 3C crypt gensalt impl 3C getpassphrase 3C crypt conf 4 passwd 4 policy conf 4 attributes 5 30 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 10 Jun 2002 N
380. ules of the organizational unit thisorgunit user cmead names the user cmead in H s organizational unit myorgunit fs pub project plans widget ps names the file pub project plans widget ps exported by U s organizational unit s file system EXAMPLE 3 Names beginning with site names The types of objects that may be named relative to a site name are users hosts services and files Here are some examples of names that begin with site names via site and name objects relative to sites when resolved in the Initial Context Site b5 mtv service printer speedy names a printer speedy in the b5 mtv site site admin fs usr dist names a file directory usr dist available in the site admin EXAMPLE 4 Names beginning with user names The types of objects that may be named relative to a user name are services and files Here are some examples of names that begin with user names explicitly via user or implicitly via thisuser and name objects relative to users when resolved in the Initial Context user jsmith service calendar names the calendar service of the user j smith user jsmith fs bin games riddles names the file bin games riddles ofthe user jsmith thisuser service printer names the printer service of U Standards Environments and Macros 75 fns initial context 5 EXAMPLE 5 Names beginning with host names The types of objects that may be named relative to a host name are services and files Here are some examples of names
381. ure most functions place an error code in the global variable errno indicating why they failed This section lists alphabetically all error codes a function can generate and describes the conditions that cause each error When more than USAGE EXAMPLES ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES EXIT STATUS FILES ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO one condition can cause the same error each condition is described in a separate paragraph under the error code This section lists special rules features and commands that require in depth explanations The subsections listed here are used to explain built in functionality Commands Modifiers Variables Expressions Input Grammar This section provides examples of usage or of how to use a command or function Wherever possible a complete example including command line entry and machine response is shown Whenever an example is given the prompt is shown as examples or if the user must be superuser example Examples are followed by explanations variable substitution rules or returned values Most examples illustrate concepts from the SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION OPTIONS and USAGE sections This section lists any environment variables that the command or function affects followed by a brief description of the effect This section lists the values the command returns to the calling program or shell and the conditions that cause these values to be returned Usually zero is returned for successful completi
382. user account management including password and account lockout policy for the bundled Sun ONE Directory Server please browse the html file usr iplanet ds5 manual en slapd ag password htm 282 man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 21 Jan 2003 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION ERRORS ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO NOTES pam passwd auth 5 pam passwd auth authentication module for password pam passwd auth so 1 pam passwd auth provides authentication functionality to the password service as implemented by passwa 1 It differs from the standard PAM authentication modules in its prompting behavior The name of the user whose password attributes are to be updated must be present in the PAM USER item This can be accomplished due to a previous call to pam start 3PAM or explicitly set by pam set item 3PAM Based on the current user id and the repository that is to by updated the module determines whether a password is necessary for a successful update of the password repository and if so which password is required The following option can be passed to the module debug syslog 3C debugging information at the LOG DEBUG level nowarn Turn off warning messages server policy If the account authority for the user as specified by PAM USER is a server do not apply the Unix policy from the passwd entry in the name service switch The following error codes are returned PAM BUF ERR Memory
383. usr is mounted tc gss Generic Security Service GSS Application Program Interface configuration files tc gtk GNOME GNU Network Object Model Environment configuration files tc inet Configuration files for Internet services tc init d Shell scripts for transitioning between run levels tc iplanet iPlanet configuration files tc krb5 Kerberos configuration files tc lib Shared libraries needed during booting tc lp Configuration information for the printer subsystem Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 15 Nov 2001 e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e filesystem 5 tc 11c2 Logical link control 11c2 driver configuration files tc lp Configuration information for the printer subsystem tc 1lu Solaris Live Upgrade configuration files tc lvm Solaris Logical Volume Manager configuration files tc mail Mail subsystem configuration tc nca Solaris Network Cache and Accelerator NCA configuration files tc net Configuration information for transport independent network services tc nfs NFS server logging configuration file tc openwin OpenWindows configuration files tc opt Configuration information for optional packages tc ppp Solaris PPP configuration files tc rcO d Scripts for entering or leaving run level 0 See init 1M tc rcl d Scripts for entering or leaving run level 1 See ini
384. ut Mac Cyrillic mac ISO 8859 5 iso5 ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic mac KOI8 R koi8 KOI8 R Mac Cyrillic mac PC Cyrillic alt Alternative PC Cyrillic Mac Cyrillic mac MS 1251 wind Windows Cyrillic The conversions are performed according to the following tables All values in the tables are given in octal For the conversion of Mac Cyrillic to ISO 8859 5 all characters not in the following table are mapped unchanged Conversions Performed Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 24 4 276 252 200 260 277 372 201 261 300 370 202 262 301 245 203 263 302 311 40 204 264 312 240 205 265 313 242 206 266 314 362 207 267 315 254 210 270 316 374 211 271 317 365 212 272 320 327 40 213 273 330 256 214 274 331 376 Standards Environments and Macros 167 iconv mac cyr 5 168 Conversions Performed Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 Mac Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 215 216 217 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 240 246 247 250 252 253 254 255 256 257 260 263 275 276 277 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 40 246 40 242 362 40 243 363 40 332 333 334 335 336 337 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 365 257 377 360 241 361 357 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333
385. utility that is large file aware will accept configuration or support files that are large files If a large file aware utility does not accept configuration or support files that are large files it will cause no data loss or corruption upon encountering such files and will return an appropriate error The following usr bin utilities are large file aware adb awk chmod chown cp csh dircmp du find ftp join jsh mdb mkdir nawk page rcp remsh rsh sed sum tail touch tr wc zcat bdiff cksum csplit egrep getconf ksh mkfifo paste rksh sh tar uncompress cat cmp cut fgrep grep in more pathchk rm sort tee uudecode The following usr xpg4 bin utilities are large file aware awk cp grep in rm sed ls sh egrep more sort 192 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 16 Jul 2003 chgrp compress dd file head ls mv Pg rmdir split test uuencode fgrep tail cachefs file systems nfs file systems ufs file systems largefile 5 tr The following usr sbin utilities are large file aware install mkfile mknod mvdir Swap See the USAGE section of the swap 1M manual page for limitations of swap on block devices greater than 2 Gbyte on a 32 bit operating system The following usr ucb utilities are large file aware chown from in ls sed sum touch The usr bin cpio and usr bin pax utilities are large file aware but cannot archive a fi
386. vileges lu FMLI based interface for creating and administering BEs luactivate Designate a BE as the BE to boot from upon the next reboot of the system lucancel Cancel a previously scheduled operation lucompare Compare the contents of two BEs lucreate Create a BE lucurr Display the name of the current BE ludelete Delete a BE ludesc Add or change BE descriptions lufslist List the file systems on a specified BE lumake Re create a BE based on the active BE lumount luumount Mount unmount file systems of a specified BE lurename Rename a BE 210 manpages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 14 Apr 2004 FILES SEE ALSO NOTES live upgrade 5 lustatus For all BEs on a system report on whether a BE is active active upon the next reboot in the midst of a copy operation and whether a copy operation is scheduled for it luupgrade Upgrade an OS and install application software on a BE Such software includes flash archives complete OS installations OS and application packages and OS patches etc lutab list of BEs on the system lu 1M Luactivate 1M lucancel 1M lucompare 1M 1ucreate 1M lucurr 1M ludelete 1M 1udesc 1M lufslist 1M lumake 1M lumount 1M lurename 1M lustatus 1M luupgrade 1M 1utab 4 Correct operation of Solaris Live Upgrade requires that a limited set of patch revisions be installed for a given OS version Before ins
387. xamples of global naming services The types of objects named at this global level are typically countries states provinces cities companies universities institutions and government departments and ministries These entities are referred to as enterprises Enterprise level naming service Enterprise level naming services are used to name objects within an enterprise Within an enterprise there are naming services that provide contexts for naming common entities such as organizational units physical sites human users and computers Enterprise level naming services are bound below the global naming services Global naming services provide contexts in which the root contexts of enterprise level naming services can be bound Application level naming service Application level naming services are incorporated in applications offering services such as file service mail service print service and so on Application level naming services are bound below enterprise naming services The enterprise level naming services provide contexts in which contexts of application level naming services can be bound FNS has policies for global and enterprise naming Naming within applications is left to individual applications or groups of related applications and not specified by FNS ENS policy specifies that DNS and X 500 are global naming services that are used to name enterprises The global namespace is named using the name A DNS name
388. xxx64 and types in addition to all the regular functions xxx and types Both xxx and xxx64 functions are available to the program source A 32 bit application must use the xxx64 functions in order to access large files See the 1 64 5 manual page for a complete listing of the 64 bit transitional interfaces The transitional compilation environment differs from the large file compilation environment wherein the underlying interfaces are bound to 64 bit functions structures and types An application compiled in the large file compilation environment is able to use the xxx source interfaces to access both large and small files rather than having to explicitly utilize the transitional xxx64 interface calls to access large files See the 1 compile 5 manual page for more information regarding the large file compilation environment Applications may combine objects produced in the large file compilation environment with objects produced in the transitional compilation environment but must be careful with respect to interoperability between those objects Applications should not declare global variables of types whose sizes change between compilation environments For applications that do not wish to conform to the POSIX or X Open specifications the 64 bit transitional interfaces are available by default No compile time flags need to be set Applications that wish to access the transitional interfaces as well as the POSIX
389. yr EM em dash LE LIST OF FIGURES title Lt LIST OF TABLES title Lx LIST OF EXHIBITS title Le LIST OF EQUATIONS title Rp REFERENCES title Tm trademark character TM When using the extended accent mark definitions available with AM these strings should come after rather than before the letter to be accented FILES usr share lib tmac m usr share lib tmac mm nt nroff and troff definitions of mm man pages section 5 Standards Environments and Macros Last Revised 1 Jan 1997 ATTRIBUTES SEE ALSO BUGS mm 5 See attributes 5 for descriptions of the following attributes ATTRIBUTE TYPE ATTRIBUTE VALUE Availability SUNWdoc col 1 eqn 1 nro f 1 refer 1 tb1 1 troff 1 attributes 5 Floating keeps and regular keeps are diverted to the same space so they cannot be mixed together with predictable results Standards Environments and Macros 257 ms 5 258 NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION REQUESTS ms text formatting macros nroff ms options filename troff ms options filename This package of nrof 1 and trof 1 macro definitions provides a formatting facility for various styles of articles theses and books When producing 2 column output on a terminal or lineprinter or when reverse line motions are needed filter the output through co1 1 All external ms macros are defined below Note this ms macro packag

man pages section 5 - Oracle Documentation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents